GE Water and Process Tech OMManual PDF

GE Water & Process
Technologies
3239 Dundas Street West
Oakville, ON, Canada
L6M 4B2
Phone: 905-465-3030
Fax: 905-465-3050
Email: zenon.service@ge.com
OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SYSTEM: ZeeWeed MBR-Ultrafiltration System
CLIENT: SCLA Industrial Wastewater Treatment Facility
LOCATION: City of Victorville, CA
PROJECT: 200326
REV.: 0
DATE: June, 2010
NOTICE
The enclosed materials are considered proprietary property of GE Water & Process Technologies. No assignments, either implied or expressed, of intellectual
property rights, data, know-how, trade secrets or licenses of use thereof are given. All information is provided exclusively for the addressee for the purposes of
evaluation and is not to be reproduced or divulged to other parties, nor used for manufacture or other means, or to authorize any of the above, without the
express written consent of GE Water & Process Technologies. The acceptance of this document will be construed as an acceptance of the foregoing conditions.
* Trademark of General Electric Company; may be registered in one or more countries.
This page has been
intentionally left blank
200326 SCLA Industrial Wastewater Treatment
GE Water & Process Technologies
Facility
Operation & Maintenance Manual
ZeeWeed MBR-Ultrafiltration System
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Preface
Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Typographical Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
List of Effective Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi
Section 1 - General Safety

1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
1.2 Personal Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
1.2.1 Personal Protective Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
1.2.1.1 Head and Facial Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
1.2.1.2 Limb Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
1.2.1.3 Fall Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
1.2.2 Cleanliness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
1.3 Safety on Site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
1.3.1 General Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
1.3.2 Safety Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
1.3.3 Electrical and Thermal Hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
1.3.4 Mechanical and Chemical Hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
1.3.5 Pinch and Falling Hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
1.3.6 Noise and Vision Hazards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
1.3.7 Pressure and Rupture Hazards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
1.3.8 Bacterial Hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
1.4 High-Risk Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
1.4.1 Locking Out Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8
1.4.2 Entering Confined Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8
Section 2 - System Overview

2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1
2.2 System Design Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1
2.3 Primary Subsystems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1
2.3.1 Pretreatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
2.3.2 ZeeWeed Ultrafiltration Membranes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
2.3.2.1 ZeeWeed Trains and Membranes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
2.3.2.2 Aeration System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
2.3.2.3 Air Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
2.3.2.4 Recirculation/Drain Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
2.3.2.5 Chemical Feed System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
2.3.2.6 Air Compressors and Associated Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
2.3.2.7 Turbidimeters and Associated Eq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .uipment2-4
Section 3 - Pre-Installation & Initial Startup

3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1
Rev. 0 i
June, 2010
Facility
3.2 Preparing the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1

3.2.1 Foundations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1
3.2.2 Drains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1
3.3 Receiving Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
3.3.1 Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
3.3.2 Vessel Internals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
3.3.3 Instrumentation & Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
3.3.4 Pumps & Blowers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
3.3.5 Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
3.4 Pre-installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
3.4.1 Fastening & Connecting Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
3.4.2 Installing Mechanical Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
3.4.3 Installing Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
3.4.4 Completing Pre-Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
3.5 Initial Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
3.5.1 Preparing for Initial Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
3.5.2 Powering Up the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
3.5.3 Dry Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
3.5.3.1 Electrician . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
3.5.3.2 Millwright. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
3.5.3.3 Pipefitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.5.3.4 Miscellaneous. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.5.4 Introducing Media Into the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.5.5 Wet Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.5.5.1 Preparing for a Wet Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.5.5.2 Conducting a Wet Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Section 4 - Operating the System

4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1
4.2 Common Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1
4.3 ZeeWeed UF Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1
4.3.1 Starting Up the ZeeWeed UF Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1
4.4 Resuming Operation Following an Alarm Shutdown. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
4.5 Controlling Specific Equipment Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
4.5.1 Accessing Device Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
4.5.2 Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8
4.5.3 Process Pumps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
4.5.4 Chemical Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
4.5.5 Air Compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4.5.6 Power Control Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4.5.6.1 Control Panel Disconnect Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4.5.6.2 System Stop Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4.6 System Setpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Section 5 - Control Documentation
ii Rev. 0
June, 2010
Facility
Section 6 - Warranty
Section 7 - Recommended Spare Parts List
Section 8 - Material Safety Data Sheets
Section 9 - Service & Support
9.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-1
9.2 Contacting GE W&PT Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-1
9.3 MyZENON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-1
9.4 Available Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
9.4.1 ZenoTrac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
9.4.2 Site Visits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3
9.4.3 Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3
Section 10 - Glossary
10.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10.2 Acronyms & Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10.3 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Appendix A - ZeeWeed 500D

A.1 - Cautions
A.1.1 Cautions Specific to This Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1
A.2 - Subsystem Overview
A.2.1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-5
A.2.2 Membrane Fiber. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-6
A.2.3 Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-6
A.2.4 Cassettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-8
A.2.5 Theory Of Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
A.2.5.1 Filtration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
A.2.5.2 Ultrafiltration: An Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
A.2.5.3 ZeeWeed Ultrafiltration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
A.3 - Installation & Testing
A.3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
A.3.2 Installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
A.3.3 Personal Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
A.3.4 Handling of Factory Shipped ZeeWeed Cassettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
A.3.4.1 Unloading Shipped Cassettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17
A.3.4.2 Confirming Equipment and Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17
A.3.4.3 Confirming Handling Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
A.3.5 Storing Membranes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
A.3.5.1 Storing Crated Cassettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-20
A.3.5.2 Storing Bagged Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21
A.3.5.3 Storing Wetted Membranes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21
A.3.5.4 Storing Wetted Cassettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22
Rev. 0 iii
June, 2010
Facility
A.3.6 Uncrating and Installing Cassettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-23

A.3.6.1 Preparing the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-23
A.3.6.2 Installing Leveling Pins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25
A.3.6.3 Maneuvering the Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25
A.3.6.4 Uncrating Cassettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-26
A.3.6.4.1 Removing the Cassette Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-29
A.3.6.5 Moving Uncrated Cassettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-30
A.3.6.6 Inspecting the ZeeWeed 500D Cassette - Inspection 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-31
A.3.6.7 Installing Union to Cassette’s Main Aeration Pipes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-33
A.3.6.8 Uprighting a Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-33
A.3.6.8.1 Removing the Cassette from the Wooden Skid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-35
A.3.6.8.2 Uprighting Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-38
A.3.6.9 Installing Cassette Arms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39
A.3.6.10 Removing the Plastic Wrapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-41
A.3.6.11 Removing the Protective Foam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-41
A.3.6.12 Inspecting the ZeeWeed 500D Cassette - Inspection 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-42
A.3.6.13 Assembling Aeration Piping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-44
A.3.7 Preventing Debris Contamination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-44
A.3.8 Installing Cassettes in the Membrane Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-45
A.3.8.1 Installing Permeate and Air Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-47
A.3.8.2 Connecting Permeate Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-47
A.3.8.3 Connecting Air Piping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-49
A.3.9 After Cassette Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-50
A.3.9.1 Flushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-51
A.3.9.1.1 Purging Glycerin From Membranes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-51
A.3.9.2 Checking Aeration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-52
A.3.9.3 Testing Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-53
A.3.9.4 Bubble Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-53
A.3.9.4.1 Bubble Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-54
A.3.10 Membrane Inspection/Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-56
A.3.10.1 Heavy Cassette Lifting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-57
A.3.11 Returning Damaged Membranes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-59
A.3.12 System Shutdown and Membrane Preservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-59
A.3.12.1 Short Term Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-59
A.3.12.2 Long Term Membrane Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-60
A.4 - Membrane Care
A.4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-67
A.4.2 Membrane Fouling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-67
A.4.2.1 Problems Associated with Membrane Fouling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-67
A.4.2.2 Fouling and Foulants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-68
A.4.2.3 Fouling Treatment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-69
A.4.2.4 Fouling Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-70
A.4.2.4.1 Prescreening. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-70
A.4.3 Fiber Shrinkage and Slack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-71
A.4.3.1 Slack Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-74
A.4.3.1.1 Manpower Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-74
iv Rev. 0
June, 2010
Facility
A.4.3.1.2 Tools/Parts Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-75

A.4.3.1.3 Definitions and Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-76
A.4.3.1.4 Slack Adjustment Procedure - Preliminary Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-78
A.4.3.1.5 Adjustment for the Front/Back Beams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-80
A.4.3.1.6 Adjustment for the Center Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-84
A.4.4 Module Removal from a Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-91
A.4.4.1 Manpower and Time Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-92
A.4.4.1.1 Tool Preparation - Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-92
A.4.4.2 Tool Preparation – Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-94
A.4.4.2.1 Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-95
A.4.4.2.2 Module Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-96
A.4.5 Installation of Modules into the Cassette Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-100
A.4.5.1 Manpower Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-100
A.4.5.2 Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-100
A.4.5.3 Checking for Slack Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-101
A.4.5.4 Unpacking the Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-101
A.4.5.5 Installing the Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-101
A.4.5.5.1 Preliminary Inspection and Set Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-101
A.4.5.5.2 Installing the Top Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-102
A.4.5.5.3 Installing the Bottom Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-106
A.4.5.5.4 Completing the Module Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-108
A.4.5.5.5 Tightening the Expanders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-109
A.4.5.6 Final Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-109
A.4.5.7 Returning Damaged Membranes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-110
A.4.6 Fiber Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-110
A.4.6.1 Cut Fibers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-110
A.4.6.2 Leaking Fibers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-113
A.5 - Preventive Maintenance
A.5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-117
A.5.2 Vendor Data and Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-118
A.5.3 Preventive Maintenance Equipment Schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-119
A.5.4 ZeeWeed 500D Inspection Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-121
A.5.4.1 Tools and Equipment Needed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-121
A.5.4.2 Information Gathering and Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-121
A.5.4.3 Inspection Frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-122
A.5.4.4 Aeration Patterns and Hitch Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-123
A.5.4.5 Hoses, Camlocks, and Straub Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-124
A.5.4.6 Removing the Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-124
A.5.4.7 Leveling Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-125
A.5.4.8 Solids Accumulation Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-126
A.5.4.9 Shells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-127
A.5.4.10 Cassette Frame and Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-127
A.5.4.11 Permeate Collection and Saddle Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-128
A.5.4.12 Aeration Tube Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-129
A.5.4.12.1 Reporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-130
A.5.5 Module Interconnecting Strip Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-130
Rev. 0 v
June, 2010
Facility
A.5.6 Preventing Stainless Steel Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-133

A.5.6.1 Causes of Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-134
A.5.6.2 Preventing Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-134
A.5.6.3 Detecting, Cleaning, & Repairing Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-135
A.5.6.3.1 Detecting Embedded Iron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-135
A.5.6.3.2 Cleaning & Repairing Surface Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-135
A.6 - Cleaning & Ventilation
A.6.1 Cleaning Chemicals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-139
A.6.2 Frequency of Cleanings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-140
A.6.3 Types of Cleanings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-140
A.6.3.1 Cleaning Logsheet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-141
A.6.3.2 Relax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-141
A.6.3.3 Backpulse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-142
A.6.3.3.1 Entering Backpulse Setpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-142
A.6.3.3.2 Initiating Backpulses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-143
A.6.3.4 Maintenance Clean. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-144
A.6.3.4.1 Scheduling a Maintenance Clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-145
A.6.3.4.2 Performing a Maintenance Clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-146
A.6.3.4.3 Alternative Maintenance Clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-146
A.6.3.5 Recovery Clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-147
A.6.3.5.1 Preparing for a Recovery Clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-148
A.6.3.5.2 Performing a Recovery Clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-148
A.6.4 Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-149
A.7 - Troubleshooting
A.7.1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-153
A.7.2 Equipment Troubleshooting Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-154
A.7.3 Permeate Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-156
A.7.3.1 Membrane Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-156
A.7.3.2 Cassette Seal Leakage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-157
A.7.4 Process Pump Has Lost Prime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-157
A.7.5 Air Release Valves (Crispin Valve with ejector) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-159
A.7.6 Aeration Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-160
A.7.7 System Component Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-160
A.8 - Performance Monitoring
A.8.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-165
A.8.2 Logsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-165
A.8.3 ZenoTrac. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-165
A.9 - Calculations
A.9.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-169
A.9.1.1 Unit Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-169
A.9.2 General Dosing Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-171
A.9.3 Calculating Membrane Permeability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-172
vi Rev. 0
June, 2010
Facility
LIST OF TABLES
Table 1.1.1 - Safety Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
Table 2.1.1 - Membrane System Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1
Table 3.1.1 - Initial Startup Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
Table 10.1.1 - Acronyms & Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Table 10.1.2 - Log Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Table A.2.1 - Module Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-7
Table A.2.2 - Cassette Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-9
Table A.3.1 - Handling Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
Table A.4.1 - Recommended Inspection Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-72
Table A.4.2 - Pin Location and Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-92
Table A.5.1 - Preventive Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-119
Table A.5.2 - Ingredients to the Ferroxyl Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-135
Table A.5.3 - Effective Cleaning Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-136
Table A.6.1 - Chemicals Required for ZeeWeed Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-139
Table A.7.1 - Troubleshooting Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-155
Table A.9.1 - Solution Concentrations and Densities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-170
Table A.9.2 - Mass Percent Nitrogen or Phosphorus in Chemical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-172
Table A.9.3 - Water Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-173
Rev. 0 ix
June, 2010
This page has been
Facility
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 4.1 - ZeeWeed UF System Overview Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Figure 4.2 - ZeeWeed UF Train Overview Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Figure 4.3 - ZeeWeed UF Mode Control Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Figure 4.4 - Alarm Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Figure 4.5 - Alarm Summary Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
Figure 4.6 - Alarm History Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
Figure 4.7 - Valve Device Control Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8
Figure 4.8 - Process Pump Device Control Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
Figure 4.9 - Chemical Skid Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Figure A.2.1 - ZeeWeed 500D Cassettes in a Treatment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-5
Figure A.2.2 - ZeeWeed 500D Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-6
Figure A.2.3 - ZeeWeed 500D Cassette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-8
Figure A.2.4 - Filtration Spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
Figure A.3.1 - Harness and Lanyard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
Figure A.3.2 - Shipping Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
Figure A.3.3 - Top of Crate Removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-28
Figure A.3.4 - Cassette Sealed in Plastic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-28
Figure A.3.5 - Bag Sealing the Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-29
Figure A.3.6 - Removing the Cassette Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-30
Figure A.3.7 - Cassette Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-32
Figure A.3.8 - Aerators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-32
Figure A.3.9 - Union Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-33
Figure A.3.10 - Hoist Ring Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-35
Figure A.3.11 - Hoist Ring Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-36
Figure A.3.12 - Lifting a Cassette Without a Four-Point Lift Frame and Spreader Bar. . A-37
Figure A.3.13 - Uprighting a Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39
Figure A.3.14 - Cassette Arms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-40
Figure A.3.15 - Installed Cassette Arms with Lifting Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-40
Figure A.3.16 - Cutting the Wrapper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-41
Figure A.3.17 - Removing the Protective Foam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-42
Figure A.3.18 - Tighten Expander Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-43
Figure A.3.19 - Aeration Piping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-44
Figure A.3.20 - Lifting Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-46
Figure A.3.21 - Permeate and Air Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-47
Figure A.3.22 - Cassette Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-48
Figure A.3.23 - Air Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-50
Figure A.3.24 - Bubble Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-55
Figure A.4.1 - Solids Accumulation Between Fibers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-69
Figure A.4.2 - Correct Slack for ZeeWeed 500D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-73
Figure A.4.3 - Incorrect Slack for ZeeWeed 500D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-73
Figure A.4.4 - Water Pressure Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-75
Figure A.4.5 - Center Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-77
Figure A.4.6 - Loosen Support Expanders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-78
Figure A.4.7 - Locked and Unlocked Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-78
Rev. 0 xi
June, 2010
Facility
Figure A.4.8 - Remove the Aeration Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-79

Figure A.4.9 - Module Slid Out of Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-80
Figure A.4.10 - Modules Removed From These Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-81
Figure A.4.11 - Removing the Bolts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-81
Figure A.4.12 - Front Adjustable Bottom Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-82
Figure A.4.13 - Adjusting the Front Adjustable Bottom Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-83
Figure A.4.14 - Align the Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-83
Figure A.4.15 - Slide the Modules to the Stop Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-84
Figure A.4.16 - Tighten the Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-85
Figure A.4.17 - Remove the Slack Adjustment Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-85
Figure A.4.18 - Insert Jacking Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-86
Figure A.4.19 - Drill Out Saddle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-87
Figure A.4.20 - Flush Away Debris. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-87
Figure A.4.21 - Remove Center Beam Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-88
Figure A.4.22 - Adjust the Center Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-88
Figure A.4.23 - Align the Middle Bolt Hole. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-89
Figure A.4.24 - Torque the Bolts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-90
Figure A.4.25 - Tighten Support Expanders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-91
Figure A.4.26 - Module Removal Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-92
Figure A.4.27 - Pin Removal From The Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-93
Figure A.4.28 - Pin Removal From The Bottom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-93
Figure A.4.29 - Faceplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-94
Figure A.4.30 - Standard and Repaired Header (Repair Adapter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-94
Figure A.4.31 - Installation Assistance From The Top. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-95
Figure A.4.32 - Installation Assistance From The Bottom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-95
Figure A.4.33 - Prohibited Removal Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-96
Figure A.4.34 - Attach the Removal Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-97
Figure A.4.35 - Module Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-97
Figure A.4.36 - Turn Rotating Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-98
Figure A.4.37 - Module Removal Handle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-99
Figure A.4.38 - ZeeWeed 500D Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-100
Figure A.4.39 - Correct Position of the O-rings on the Permeate Spigot . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-102
Figure A.4.40 - Module Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-103
Figure A.4.41 - Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-103
Figure A.4.42 - Handling the Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-104
Figure A.4.43 - Aligning the Rail on the Module with the Cassette Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . A-105
Figure A.4.44 - Turning the Bottom Header Sideways During Installation . . . . . . . . . . . A-106
Figure A.4.45 - Inserting the Bottom Header. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-107
Figure A.4.46 - Locating Nipples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-107
Figure A.4.47 - Lock Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-108
Figure A.4.48 - Tightening Expanders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-109
Figure A.4.49 - Membrane Cut Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-111
Figure A.4.50 - Axial Silicone Injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-112
Figure A.4.51 - Subjacent Silicone Injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-114
Figure A.5.1 - Correct Aeration Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-123
Figure A.5.2 - Water Pressure Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-125
xii Rev. 0
June, 2010
Facility
Figure A.5.3 - Typical Levelling Pin Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-125

Figure A.5.4 - Solids Accumulation (OK). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-126
Figure A.5.5 - High Solids Accumulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-127
Figure A.5.6 - Shells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-127
Figure A.5.7 - Bottom Permeate Collection Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-128
Figure A.5.8 - Top Permeate Saddle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-128
Figure A.5.9 - Location of Collection Port and Saddle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-129
Figure A.5.10 - Aerator Caps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-129
Figure A.5.11 - MIS Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-130
Figure A.5.12 - Locking Key Locked Position (Vertical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-131
Figure A.5.13 - Locking Key Unlocked Position (Horizontal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-131
Figure A.5.14 - Locking Pin Locked Position (Vertical). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-132
Figure A.5.15 - Locking Pin Unlocked Position (Diagonal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-132
Figure A.5.16 - Module Header, Showing Wear Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-133
Figure A.1 - Train Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-142
Figure A.2 - Train Setpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-143
Figure A.3 - Mode of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-144
Figure A.4 - Maintenance Clean Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-145
Figure A.6.1 - Maintenance Clean Setpoints Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-146
Figure A.9.1 - Dosing Calculation Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-171
Rev. 0 xiii
June, 2010
This page has been
Facility
PREFACE
This manual provides installation, operation, maintenance, and
ownership information for the SCLA Industrial Wastewater Treatment
Facility ZeeWeed MBR-Ultrafiltration System, and should be read and
internalized in its entirety by all system operators.
Failure to adhere to the instructions provided in this manual may

result in severe injury or damage to property, and will render the
warranty null and void.
USING THIS MANUAL

Sections 1 - 10 of this manual provide a high-level description of overall
system design and functionality, while information specific to individual
subsystems can be found in the accompanying appendices. Refer to
Volume I - Vendor Data Manual for information regarding individual
pieces of equipment, such as pumps and valves.
TYPOGRAPHICAL CONVENTIONS
Typographical conventions used within this manual are defined as
follows:
Bold - indicates a control with which the reader is required to interact.
Bold italics - indicates important information.
Rev. 0 xv
June, 2010
Facility
Warns against an unsafe situation or practice that, if not avoided,

could result in property damage.

could result in minor or moderate injury.

could result in severe injury or death.
Warns against an unsafe situation or practice that, if not avoided, will

result in severe injury or death.
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

When updating this document, insert new pages and dispose of
outdated versions before recording all changes using the tables below.
Record the date of each change in the following table:
Change Date Change Date Change Date

0 (original) 4 8
1 5 9
2 6 10
3 7 11
xvi Rev. 0
June, 2010
SECTION 1
GENERAL SAFETY
This page has been
Facility
1.1 INTRODUCTION
This section provides general personal and environmental safety
information for all system operators. Material Safety Data Sheets
(MSDSs) for chemicals provided by GE W&PT can be found in Section 8 -
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs for chemicals provided by other
manufacturers may be inserted here as well), while safety information
for specific equipment can be found in Volume I - Vendor Data Manual.
Failure by facility management or system operators to adhere to the

information provided in this section may put personnel at significant
risk of injury.
1.2 PERSONAL SAFETY

The following sections provide general guidelines regarding personal
safety and cleanliness. Refer to local codes and regulations for more
detailed information.
1.2.1 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

The following equipment list constitutes the minimum scope of
protective gear that should be available to all system operators. Local
codes and regulations may require the use of additional equipment
beyond that mentioned below.
1.2.1.1 HEAD AND FACIAL PROTECTION

• At all times while in the plant operating area, wear a hard hat and
safety glasses with side shields.
• When handling chemicals or working near pressurized lines, (air

and liquid), wear a full face shield.
Rev. 0 General Safety

June, 2010 1-1
Facility
• When exposed to noise levels that exceed 85 dB, wear adequate

hearing protection.
1.2.1.2 LIMB PROTECTION

• When working near pinch or thermal hazards, wear protective
gloves. When handling chemicals, wear chemical-resistant
gloves.
• At all times while in the plant operating area, wear safety boots
with steel toe and shank inserts.
1.2.1.3 FALL PROTECTION

• When working in a position where the possibility of falling a
significant distance (approximately 10 ft) is present, wear an
approved safety harness in accordance with local safety
requirements. The harness safety line should not allow the
person to fall more than 5 ft before arresting the fall.
1.2.2 CLEANLINESS
A water treatment plant poses a number of potential health hazards that
make consistent personal and site cleanliness practices essential.
Immunization protects against infection, but common sense and care
are required at all times when in the plant operating area.
Do not expose cuts or open sores to feedwater, and ensure that hands
are washed with an antibacterial soap on a regular basis, especially
prior to eating, drinking, or smoking.
1.3 SAFETY ON SITE

The following sections provide information regarding general site safety
and proper conduct during various procedures, and are not intended to
replace or override local codes and regulations.
General Safety Rev. 0

1-2 June, 2010
Facility
1.3.1 GENERAL PRECAUTIONS

The following list provides general recommendations intended to ensure
the safety of personnel working in and around the plant operating area:
• Ensure that all personnel have been made familiar with the
proper operating procedures described in this manual and the
accompanying Volume I - Vendor Data Manual. In particular,
procedures related to the handling of acidic or caustic chemicals
and the maintenance of pressurized lines or equipment with
rotating components should be emphasized.
• Ensure that safety shower and eye wash stations are operational
and in close proximity to areas where chemicals will be used.
Consider installing an alarm (visible and audible throughout the
plant operating area) that will activate if an emergency shower
or eye wash station is used.
• Install flange guards on all chemical lines.
• Install spray curtains or Plexiglas shields around all chemical

skids and ensure that dilution stations are available nearby in
case of a chemical spray or leak.
• Ensure that chemical-resistant protective clothing is worn by all

personnel working near acidic or caustic substances or
equipment that may contain such substances.
• When preparing to perform maintenance on pipes or tubing,

ensure that all connected lines are either isolated or emptied.
• Ensure that all personnel working with hazardous chemicals are

properly trained and familiar with both government and plant-
specific safety requirements.
• Ensure that areas where chemicals will be handled are well lit
and that access is not restricted.
• Personnel engaged in a procedure that involves obvious risk of

injury (example: entering a confined space) should work under
the supervision of a colleague prepared to provide assistance if
required.

June, 2010 1-3
Facility
• Personnel engaged in a procedure for which they do not feel

properly trained must cease action immediately and seek advice
from a supervisor.
1.3.2 SAFETY CHECKLIST

Prior to initial system startup, review the following list and ensure that all
items are confirmed by both the plant supervisor and an appointed GE
W&PT representative.
Table 1.1.1 - Safety Checklist

Task Plant GE W&PT
Test all safety showers and eye wash stations [ ] [ ]
Ensure that all chemical flange guards are fitted properly [ ] [ ]
Post contact information for emergency services in a highly [ ] [ ]
visible location
Ensure that all operators are familiar with applicable safe [ ] [ ]
workplace practices and regulations
Confirm all pump shutoff and emergency kill-switch locations [ ] [ ]
Confirm that all equipment is properly tagged [ ] [ ]
Ensure adequate space and lighting around all equipment [ ] [ ]
Supply all required acid/caustic protective gear, including full- [ ] [ ]
face shields, rubber suits, and gloves; and store near chemical
skids
Ensure all equipment is clean and undamaged [ ] [ ]
Provide adequate ventilation to all plant locations [ ] [ ]
Ensure that a system for maintaining up-to-date operating [ ] [ ]
records is in place
Ensure that guidelines are in place to prevent operating [ ] [ ]
temperatures from exceeding maximum limits

1-4 June, 2010
Facility
1.3.3 ELECTRICAL AND THERMAL HAZARDS
Only qualified personnel should perform installation and

maintenance procedures for electrical equipment.
SERVICING ENERGIZED EQUIPMENT: Even with the power switch in the OFF
position, certain components inside a control panel or other electrical
device will remain energized. Servicing must not begin unless the power
supply to the device is first disconnected.
HEATED SURFACES: Areas on certain pieces of equipment, such as pumps,

can become heated to the point where contact with skin will inflict
severe burns. Ensure that all safety guards and other protective
measures are in place and familiarize personnel working with or around
such equipment with the relevant documentation in Volume I - Vendor
Data Manual.
1.3.4 MECHANICAL AND CHEMICAL HAZARDS

MSDSS: For ease of reference, add MSDSs for chemicals purchased from
suppliers other than GE W&PT to Section 8 - Material Safety Data Sheets.
PUMPS: When working with or around pumps, take the following

precautions:
• Before performing maintenance, isolate and drain all piping

connected to a pump.
• Before performing maintenance, turn off power to a pump and

complete all lockout procedures required by government and
plant-specific regulations, as well as any included in Volume I -
Vendor Data Manual. Refer to 1.4.1 Locking Out Equipment for
more information.
• After completing maintenance, replace any guards or other

safety components removed during the procedure.

June, 2010 1-5
Facility
• Personnel working on pumps used to transfer chemicals must be

familiar with the safe-handling procedures associated with the
chemical(s) involved.
• When working with diaphragm pumps used to transfer

chemicals, be aware that some media may remain within the
pump’s diaphragm chamber even after the pump has been
drained.
1.3.5 PINCH AND FALLING HAZARDS
Exposed rotating parts can catch clothing, fingers, or tools and cause
severe personal injury or death.
ROTATING EQUIPMENT: Before operating equipment with rotating

components or other possible pinch hazards, ensure that all shields,
guards, and emergency kill-switches are in place.
FALLING HAZARDS: Falling hazards include any situation where the

possibility of either personnel or equipment falling from a significant
height (approximately 10 ft) is present. Ensure that personnel exposed to
this risk are secured using a harness as described in 1.2.1 Personal
Protective Equipment, and that all equipment involved is stored and
handled in a way that prevents it from falling.
1.3.6 NOISE AND VISION HAZARDS

HEARING PROTECTION: Extended exposure to noise levels greater than 85
dB can be harmful to human hearing. When the possibility of exposure
to such noise levels is present, use adequate hearing protection at all
times.
Exposure to UV lamps can cause severe burns to skin and eyes.

1-6 June, 2010
Facility
ULTRAVIOLET (UV) LAMPS: Do not look directly at blue UV lamps or operate

UV lamps outside of the UV disinfection chamber.
1.3.7 PRESSURE AND RUPTURE HAZARDS

Some pumps and compressors are capable of pressurizing lines to 30 -
1,000 psi, and the danger of an explosion due to overpressurization may
arise if proper operating procedures are not observed. In particular,
pressure relief valves should be checked regularly, and tubing used to
convey pressurized air, such as actuated valve air lines (typically
operated at 80 psi), should be regularly inspected for cracks.
1.3.8 BACTERIAL HAZARDS

Personnel should take every measure to avoid contact with or ingestion
of feedwater. If brought into contact with feedwater, eyes should be
immediately rinsed at an eye wash station and exposed skin should be
cleaned thoroughly with soap and warm water, particularly before
eating, drinking or smoking. If feedwater is ingested, notify a supervisor
immediately.
GE W&PT recommends that all employees working in a water treatment

plant should be vaccinated for tetanus and Hepatitis A and B.
Any concerns about possible infection should be brought to the

attention of a medical physician immediately.
1.4 HIGH-RISK PROCEDURES
The procedures described in this section pose a significant risk to

personnel involved. The possibility of severe injury or death will be
significant if the instructions provided below, as well as all relevant
plant and local regulatory practices, are not followed.

June, 2010 1-7
Facility
1.4.1 LOCKING OUT EQUIPMENT

When preparing to lock out a device for service, replacement, or repair,
ensure the following:
• All relevant local guidelines and procedures must be observed.
• Only system operators qualified to work with the device should

perform a lockout procedure.
• Lockout tags should be applied before performing the lockout

procedure and should be removed only after work has been
completed and by the person who applied them.
1.4.2 ENTERING CONFINED SPACES

Any area characterized by 1 or more of the following features should be
considered a confined space:
• The accumulation of hazardous gases, vapors, dust, fumes,

biological contaminants, or the creation of an oxygen-deficient
atmosphere may occur.
• A space not intended for frequent or extended human

occupancy.
• Access is gained through a restricted entry as a result of design,

orientation, or location.
GE W&PT strongly recommends that any personnel required to enter a

confined space first complete an official confined space entry training
program.
Prior to entering a confined space, ensure that the following equipment

is available and functional:
• Gas detector.
• Tripod.
• Body harness and safety line.

1-8 June, 2010
Facility
• Charged cellular phone and list of emergency numbers.
• Portable ventilator and generator.
• Suitable breathing apparatus.
• Protective clothing (if exposure to harmful substances is

possible).
• Ladder (where required).
• Flashlight and alarm horn (where required).
• Manhole opener (where required).
• Traffic control equipment (where required).
The above list of required equipment may vary according to local

regulations. Any item that does not pass inspection or which cannot be
calibrated properly must be replaced or repaired before work may
begin.

June, 2010 1-9
This page has been
SECTION 2
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
This page has been
Facility
2.1 INTRODUCTION
This section provides a high-level description of the SCLA Industrial
Wastewater Treatment Facility ZeeWeed MBR-Ultrafiltration System,
including performance specifications, structure, and production
process. Detailed information about the design and operation of specific
subsystems can be found in the accompanying appendices, while
technical illustrations are provided in Volume III - Drawings Binder.
2.2 SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS

The SCLA Industrial Wastewater Treatment Facility ZeeWeed MBR-
Ultrafiltration System is designed with an average treated water
(permeate) flowrate of 2.23 MGD.
Table 2.1.1 - Membrane System Design

Parameter Value
Membrane Model ZeeWeed 500D
Module Surface Area 340 ft2
Number of Trains 4
Number of Cassettes per Train 6
Number of Modules per Cassette 48 per Cassette for 5 Trains
28 per Cassette for 1 Train
Minimum Temperature 18
Maximum Temperature 35
2.3 PRIMARY SUBSYSTEMS

The following sections provide brief descriptions of the primary
subsystems that compose the SCLA Industrial Wastewater Treatment
Facility ZeeWeed MBR-Ultrafiltration System, and describe the order of
subsystems that feed water moves through as it is processed.
Rev. 0 System Overview

June, 2010 2-1
Facility
Information regarding specific equipment used in the subsystems

described below has been created and supplied by the third-party
vendors who manufactured the equipment, and is provided in Volume I
- Vendor Data Manual.
GE W&PT has not independently verified information provided by

vendors and offers no representations or warranties of any kind, express
or implied, as to its quality, suitability, accuracy, timeliness, or
completeness. GE W&PT does not accept liability for the consequences
of any action or inaction taken on the basis of information provided by
third-party vendors.
2.3.1 PRETREATMENT
Water in the pretreatment stage has yet to be introduced into the SCLA
Industrial Wastewater Treatment Facility ZeeWeed MBR-Ultrafiltration
System supplied by GE W&PT. Equipment and procedures used to
control water in the pretreatment stage have been provided by others
and cannot be accurately documented within this manual.
Mixed liquor from the bioreactor flows into the membrane tanks.
2.3.2 ZEEWEED ULTRAFILTRATION MEMBRANES

ZeeWeed membranes are grouped into 4 process trains with associated
equipment dedicated to each train.
2.3.2.1 ZEEWEED TRAINS AND MEMBRANES

A ZeeWeed train is composed of series of cassettes, each containing
several ZeeWeed modules and connected together by a common
permeate collection header. Each of the 4 trains has 6 cassettes of 48
modules per cassette for 5 cassette and 28 module per cassette for 1
cassette. The surface area of each membrane module is 340 ft2.
System Overview Rev. 0

2-2 June, 2010
Facility
The membranes, which consist of bundles of hollow fibers, are

suspended in the feed water. The membranes operate under a slight
negative pressure created within the hollow membrane fibers by the
process pump (20-P-301-1/2/3/4). This negative pressure draws
permeate through the membranes, leaving contaminants behind in the
membrane tanks. The process pump (20-P-301-1/2/3/4) moves
permeate to a common permeate header and then to a storage tank.
2.3.2.2 AERATION SYSTEM

Membrane blowers introduce air into the membrane tanks near the
bottom of the membranes to create turbulence within the feed water.
This aeration scours the outside of the membrane fibers and also
oxidizes iron and organic compounds.
Aeration enhances the functionality of the membrane system and must

be performed whenever the system is operating. If the system is shut
down, blowers must be manually activated for a minimum of one 30-
minute span every 24 hours.
Refer to the Control Documentation for more information on membrane

blower operation.
2.3.2.3 AIR EXTRACTION

A vacuum ejector (20-E-801-1/2/3/4) is used to intermittently remove air
from the permeate header. This process, known as “priming,” prevents
large pockets of air from being drawn into the process pump (20-P-301-
1/2/3/4).
The vacuum ejector uses compressed air flowing through an orifice to

create a vacuum (the Venturi effect). Water (liquid or vapor) entering the
ejector is discharged to drain along with the ejected air. The line to the
ejector forms a tee in the permeate header, creating turbulence that
helps break up any larger bubbles formed in the permeate header.
Rev. 0 System Overview

June, 2010 2-3
Facility
2.3.2.4 RECIRCULATION/DRAIN PUMP

The recirculation/drain pump (16-P-801-1/2/3/4) draws the thickened
waste activated sludge from the membrane tanks and delivers it to the
sludge holding tank. This pump also pumps return activated sludge from
the membrane tank to mix tank and also drains the membrane tank
after the maintenance and recovery cleans.
2.3.2.5 CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEM

The chemical feed system consists of a citric acid tank (by others), two
citric acid pumps (23-P-310/320), a sodium hypochlorite tank (by others)
and two sodium hypochlorite pumps (23-P-110/120).
This system pumps citric acid and sodium hypochlorite to recirc/

neutralization pump’s (P-9700A/B) during maintenance clean and
recovery clean. Refer to the control documentation for more
information.
2.3.2.6 AIR COMPRESSORS AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT

The compressed air receiver tanks (90-TK-001-1/2), receive compressed
air from the air compressors (90-AC-001-1/2). This compressed air acts
as the instrument air for this water treatment plant. The refrigerated air
drier (90-DR-001-1/2) removes any moisture from the compressed air.
2.3.2.7 TURBIDIMETERS AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT

The integrity of each train is monitored by on-line turbidimeters (20-AE/
AIT-320-1/2/3/4). Refer to the control documentation for more
information.
System Overview Rev. 0

2-4 June, 2010
SECTION 3
PRE-INSTALLATION & INITIAL
STARTUP
This page has been
Facility
3.1 INTRODUCTION
TIP: Refer to Volume I This section provides general information about system pre-installation
- Vendor Data Manual. and initial startup procedures. Refer to the accompanying appendices
for installation
information regarding for information about specific subsystems, and to Volume I - Vendor
GE W&PT system Data Manual for specific equipment.
components not
manufactured by GE
W&PT. The pre-installation process includes all procedures in this section up to
and including those described in 3.4.4 Completing Pre-Installation, and
must be completed before a GE W&PT Field Service Representative (FSR)
will be sent to the site.
3.2 PREPARING THE SITE

The following sections describe site requirements that must be fulfilled
prior to the arrival of system components.
3.2.1 FOUNDATIONS
The foundation for a piece of equipment must be designed to support
the full operating weight of the unit as defined in the applicable
drawing(s) provided in Volume III - Drawings Binder.
3.2.2 DRAINS
Drains must be designed to accommodate a minimum flowrate equal to
the maximum flowrate (service or regeneration) of one process line. This
is normally the maximum flow encountered, but higher rates may occur
during initial startup or other abnormal processes.
Rev. 0 Pre-installation & Initial Startup

June, 2010 3-1
Facility
3.3 RECEIVING EQUIPMENT

All components should be examined immediately upon arrival. Compare
all received components with items listed in the shipping manifest and
report any damage or discrepancy to GE W&PT immediately upon
discovery.
Information in the sections below must be followed in order to avoid

causing damage when receiving, handling, or storing particular types
of equipment. Refer to Volume I - Vendor Data Manual for detailed
information about a particular piece of equipment.
3.3.1 PIPING
Do not bump, weld, or heat piping or fittings, as doing so may seriously
compromise the integrity of the lining.
Protect piping from exposure to sudden extreme temperature changes.
Do not handle roughly, and exercise extreme caution when handling

PVC piping.
Do not stack carbon steel piping with stainless steel piping.
3.3.2 VESSEL INTERNALS

Vessel internals are installed and inspected prior to shipment. However,
damage or loosening can occur during shipping and installation. All
vessel internals must be carefully inspected after shipment and again
immediately following vessel installation.
Pre-installation & Initial Startup Rev. 0

3-2 June, 2010
Facility
3.3.3 INSTRUMENTATION & VALVES

Protect all valves and instrumentation from exposure to the elements or
contamination by dirt and moisture, and store indoors in a temperature-
controlled location.
3.3.4 PUMPS & BLOWERS

Inspect immediately upon receiving for missing or damaged
components.
Store indoors if possible. If equipment must be stored outdoors, protect

from exposure to the elements and extreme temperatures.
Rotate motor shafts monthly by hand. Refer to Volume I - Vendor Data

Manual for lubrication and maintenance schedules.
3.3.5 CONTROL PANELS

To prevent exposure to dirt and moisture, keep cabinet doors closed.
To protect PLC memory, connect panels to a power supply as soon as

possible.
If necessary, build temporary shelter(s) to protect panels from the

elements during field wiring.
Store panels indoors in a temperature-controlled location and away

from large transistors, transformers, fuse boxes, strong magnets, and
any other sources of electromagnetic radiation.

June, 2010 3-3
Facility
3.4 PRE-INSTALLATION
The following sections provide information regarding the installation
and alignment of common system components, such as piping, tanks,
and pumps. This equipment must be installed and tested prior to the
installation of subsystem-specific equipment, such as UF membranes.
The procedures outlined in these sections are intended to provide a

general indication of the order in which common equipment is installed.
Refer to Volume I - Vendor Data Manual for detailed installation
information regarding specific components.
3.4.1 FASTENING & CONNECTING EQUIPMENT

Review the following information before attempting to bolt, fasten, or
connect components during the procedures outlined in the upcoming
sections.
Metal washers should be used to prevent all bolt-heads and nuts from
coming into direct contact with a fiberglass surface.
Before tightening bolts or other fasteners, ensure that both connecting

surfaces are properly aligned.
Nut and bolt threads should be lubricated before tightening.
When using bolts to secure fiberglass tanks, take-up torque should be

applied uniformly, alternating 180º and rotating as near to 90º as
possible. A bolt torque pressure of 30 lbf.ft. is normally sufficient to
create a seal.
All joints are to be marked with a torque tag which indicates the date
installed, name of installer, and torque value applied.
Whenever possible, all fasteners should be tightened by hand (that is,

without the use of power tools).

3-4 June, 2010
Facility
3.4.2 INSTALLING MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

This section outlines the general procedure for installing mechanical
system components, such as pumps, valves, or blowers. Refer to Volume
I - Vendor Data Manual for installation information regarding specific
equipment.
After receiving and inspecting all mechanical components, install by

performing the following steps:
1. Position all major components, such as pumps and blowers, as

shown in drawings provided in Volume III - Drawings Binder.
2. Install any valves and piping that were removed from

components prior to shipping.
3. Install all interconnecting piping.
4. Install pipe supports in accordance with ANSI B31.3 or other

recognized standards.
5. Secure all components using the appropriate bolts or other

fasteners.
6. Connect a filter regulator and a pressurized supply of clean, dry,

oil-free air to each solenoid box.
7. After grouting has been completed, align all pumps.
8. Perform initial startup procedures for all pumps as per

manufacturer instructions (refer to Volume I - Vendor Data
Manual).
9. Install flange guards on all chemical lines.
It is highly recommended that, to avoid injury caused by leaks or

ruptures, spray curtains or similar barriers be installed around acid
and caustic regeneration components.

June, 2010 3-5
Facility
3.4.3 INSTALLING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

This section outlines the general procedure for installing electrical
system components, such as control panels and wiring. Refer to Volume
I - Vendor Data Manual for installation information regarding specific
equipment.
After receiving and inspecting all electrical components, install by

1. Install the PLC panel.
2. Install all field-mounted instrumentation.
3. Install all field-run wiring and tubing in accordance with

applicable drawing(s) provided in Volume III - Drawings Binder.
4. Perform a continuity test for all field wiring.
5. Calibrate all instruments.
6. Ensure that all analog and digital signals to and from the PLC are
transmitting properly.
3.4.4 COMPLETING PRE-INSTALLATION

After all common mechanical and electrical components have been
installed, ensure the following:
• All terminal points have been connected to the appropriate

supply source, drain, or storage facility.
• All manual valves are closed.
• All manual overrides on solenoid valves have been released.
• All pumps are set to OFF.
• All step times are preset to 3 minutes.

3-6 June, 2010
Facility
3.5 INITIAL STARTUP

After completing all pre-installation procedures described in the
sections above, notify GE W&PT that the system is prepped for the initial
startup process and provide all necessary reports. An FSR will then be
sent out to the site to assist with the procedures outlined in the following
sections.
3.5.1 PREPARING FOR INITIAL STARTUP

After completing the pre-installation process, initiate a service and
shutdown flush cycle to ensure that the program cycles properly.
Override alarms as required in order to enable the program to advance
through the sequence. This can be performed by an FSR if assistance is
required.
Before beginning the initial startup procedure, ensure the following:
• A supply of feed water is available and at the correct pressure

level.
• Drains, drain system, and neutralization systems are in place and

functional.
• Air supply is connected and operational.
• All rotating equipment has been lubricated, all motor rotations

checked, and all couplings aligned.
• All instruments have been calibrated.
• Safety equipment, such as spray curtains and eye wash stations,

is installed and operational.

June, 2010 3-7
Facility
The following checklist should be used to ensure that all initial startup
requirements have been met:
Table 3.1.1 - Initial Startup Checklist

Activity Completed/NA
Are all facility systems installed and ready for uninterrupted service? [ ]
Is there a PLC interface terminal and communications cable that can be [ ]
dedicated to the GE W&PT control panel during startup?
Have pipe-flushing and hydrotest procedures been completed? [ ]
Has all field wiring been installed and tested? [ ]
Are formal safety procedures in place and has adequate safety [ ]
equipment been provided for all personnel?
Additional Notes
3.5.2 POWERING UP THE SYSTEM

TIP: The Distributed This section describes how to properly power up the system after all pre-
Control System (DCS) installation procedures described above have been completed.
retains settings and
statuses from the last
system power-up for Before beginning the power-up procedure, set valves and pumps
all system
components.
according to the Operations Sequence Chart (OSC) provided in Section 5
- Control Documentation.
To power up your system, perform the following steps:
1. Ensure that the main incoming power connection is connected to

the cabinet.
2. Power up the supply cable at the main breaker.

3-8 June, 2010
Facility
3. On the control panel, set the main power breaker to ON. Several
indicator lights on the control cabinet illuminate and the HMI
displays the startup screen.
4. Press the Control Power Switch. The DCS activates.
5. Ensure that all motor disconnect switches are in the ON position.
The system is now powered up. To obtain access to the control program,
input the user name and password.
3.5.3 DRY TEST

The following checks must be performed before feed water is introduced
into the system:
3.5.3.1 ELECTRICIAN
• All input and output signals to the DCS must be checked by an
electrician with an FSR present for confirmation.
• All motors must be dry "bump" tested to ensure correct motor

rotation.
• All remote valves must be trigger-tested using the DCS.
• Completed Mechanical and Electrical Installation Checklists must

be returned to GE W&PT.
• Completion of all actions listed above must be reported to and

signed off on by a GE W&PT representative.
3.5.3.2 MILLWRIGHT
• All pumps that require alignment must be checked and an
Alignment Report issued to GE W&PT.

June, 2010 3-9
Facility
3.5.3.3 PIPEFITTER
• All piping must be verified according to applicable drawing(s)
provided in Volume III - Drawings Binder, and all hand valves must
be verified with the OSC provided in Section 5 - Control
Documentation.
3.5.3.4 MISCELLANEOUS
The following points must also be verified:
• Pumps and blowers are aligned, oiled, and ready for operation
(provide reports to GE W&PT).
• Air supply for instrumentation is available.
• Adequate feed water is available.
• Water drainage system is functioning.
• Chemicals required for all system operation modes are available

in sufficient quantities.
• Valves are stroked and timed at 3 - 5 seconds travel time for

small valves, and up to 15 seconds for larger pneumatic valves.
The FSR will provide the contractor with a detailed listing of all
system valves.
• Instrumentation is configured and calibrated (provide reports to

GE W&PT).
3.5.4 INTRODUCING MEDIA INTO THE SYSTEM

After completing all procedures outlined in the sections above, introduce
media into the system by performing the following steps:

3-10 June, 2010
Facility
TIP: Prior to loading 1. Hydrotest the entire system with the exception of the
media into vessels, the concentrated chemical systems, which should be
internals should be
inspected by a GE pneumatically tested to 0.69 bar(g) (10 psig) with all connections
W&PT representative being soap-tested for leaks.
to ensure that all
components are
secure and 2. Flush all piping with the exception of concentrated chemical
undamaged. piping.
3. Drain and isolate all vessels, and then inspect vessel internals for
cleanliness.
4. Load media into each individual subsystem in accordance with

media-loading instructions provided in the accompanying
appendices.
3.5.5 WET TEST

An FSR will assist with conducting a wet test during the initial startup
process.
3.5.5.1 PREPARING FOR A WET TEST

In preparation for the wet test and prior to the FSR’s arrival, perform the
following steps:
1. Close all hand valves that connect the ZeeWeed main permeate
header to the individual ZeeWeed membrane permeate headers.
2. Close all hand valves that connect the ZeeWeed air lines to the
individual ZeeWeed membrane air lines.
3. Ensure that the membrane tank is empty and that all debris is
vacuumed out.
4. Flush all piping by opening all necessary hand valves, automatic

valves, and pumps as shown in Volume III - Drawings Binder. This
flushing includes, but is not limited to, feed, blower, permeate,
and chemical piping systems. All debris in piping and tanks
must be removed prior to initiating the wet test.
5. Repair any leaks detected.

June, 2010 3-11
Facility
TIP: Some piping 6. After flushing has been completed, all piping must be pressure
may not be conducive tested to detect leaks. During installation, it is the contractor’s
to pressure testing
due to lack of isolation responsibility to determine the required testing specifications
components. and carry out the pressure testing procedure. The piping must be
flooded and all air removed. Any system components that are
not rated for test pressure must be removed or isolated.
7. Repair any leaks detected during pressure testing and repeat

testing until successful.
8. Fill the membrane tanks to approximately 15 cm (6 in.) below the

top of the overflow with fresh water by opening all hand valves
and the feed flow control valve, as shown in Volume III - Drawings
Binder. Check that the feed system does not leak while filling the
membrane tanks.
9. Completely fill all other tanks and check for deflection, distortion,
or leakage.
10. Complete the Mechanical Installation Checklist and return it to GE

W&PT.
3.5.5.2 CONDUCTING A WET TEST
A Wet test cannot be performed until the procedures outlined in both

3.5.3 Dry Test and 3.5.5.1 Preparing for a Wet Test have been
completed.
A source of potable water at greater than 276 kPa (40 psi) must be
available for wet testing procedures.
After completing the steps listed above and with the assistance of an
FSR, perform the wet test procedure by completing the following steps:
1. With the FSR’s assistance, align the valves for a backpulse. Refer
to the OSC provided in Section 5 - Control Documentation.

3-12 June, 2010
Facility
2. Alternately open each membrane cassette isolation valve until all

piping is flushed. Drain the membrane tanks and remove any
remaining debris.
3. Open the air line isolation valve for a single cassette (the air line
isolation valves for all other cassettes should remain closed), and
then align the blower valve as shown in Volume III - Drawings
Binder.
4. Set the blower to ON to blow any dirt out of the lines. Repeat
steps 4 and 5 for each air line isolation valve, and then remove
any debris that has been blown out of the air lines.
It may be unsafe to test acid and polymer systems with water. To

determine whether water can be used to test these systems, refer to
Volume I - Vendor Data Manual for manufacturer’s instructions.
5. Check the chemical systems, and their respective interlocks by

a. Connect the chemical feed system to a local municipal

pressure line at 138 kPa (20 psi) for initial integrity testing.
b. Repair any leaks detected.
c. Partially fill the chemical feed tanks with potable water, and
then test the chemical feed systems with the pumps
operating at full capacity.
d. Repair any leaks detected.
e. Set the chemical pumps for proper dosing.
f. Drain and refill chemical tanks with the actual chemical(s)

prior to final startup.
g. Verify dosing rates again while purging water from chemical

lines.

June, 2010 3-13
Facility
After the steps listed above have been performed, the wet test is
complete.

3-14 June, 2010
SECTION 4
OPERATING THE SYSTEM
This page has been
Facility
4.1 INTRODUCTION
This section provides general information regarding Standard Operating
Procedures (SOPs) used to start up and operate various subsystems and
equipment. Refer to the accompanying appendices for detailed
information regarding SOPs for specific subsystems, and to Volume I -
Vendor Data Manual for information regarding specific equipment.
4.2 COMMON EQUIPMENT

Before starting up any subsystem-specific equipment, ensure that the
following common equipment is activated and functioning properly:
AIR COMPRESSORS: At the Motor Control Center (MCC), ensure that all air
compressor circuit-breakers are ON and that all air compressor selector
switches are set to Auto.
4.3 ZEEWEED UF SUBSYSTEM

The following sections provide general SOPs required both prior to and
while operating the ZeeWeed UF subsystem.
4.3.1 STARTING UP THE ZEEWEED UF SUBSYSTEM

Use the following SOP to start up the ZeeWeed UF subsystem under
normal operating conditions. If restarting the ZeeWeed UF subsystem
after an alarm shutdown, refer to 4.4 Resuming Operation Following an
Alarm Shutdown.
Rev. 0 Operating the System

June, 2010 4-1
Facility
1. At the ZeeWeed UF MCC, ensure that the circuit-breaker is set to

ON and that the selector switches for all equipment related to the
subsystem are set to Auto. Refer to Volume I - Vendor Data
Manual for information regarding startup procedures for specific
equipment.
TIP: Automatic valves 2. Ensure that pressure within the air compressor tank is at 100 kPa
may not function (14.5 psi) or greater.
properly if air
pressure falls below
this level. 3. Set all manually operated valves in the proper position for normal
operation. Refer to Volume III - Drawings Binder for information
regarding valve positioning, and to Volume I - Vendor Data
Manual for information regarding valve operation.
4. At the PLC control panel(s), ensure that power is ON.
5. At the HMI, ensure that power is ON and that the screen displays
the ZeeWeed UF subsystem control graphics. If power is ON but
the screen remains dark, touch the screen to activate.
6. In the HMI main screen, enter the user name and password, and
then touch (HMI) the OK button. The System Overview screen
appears.
Operating the System Rev. 0

4-2 June, 2010
Facility
7. In the System Overview screen, select the train required for

production. The Train Overview screen for that train appears.
Figure 4.1 - ZeeWeed UF System Overview Screen
8. To set an operating mode for all equipment associated with the

selected train, in the Train Overview screen, touch (HMI) the Mode
Control button. The Mode Control screen appears.
Figure 4.2 - ZeeWeed UF Train Overview Screen

June, 2010 4-3
Facility
TIP: The All Off

button is only
available if the train is
in Off mode.
Figure 4.3 - ZeeWeed UF Mode Control Screen
TIP: The train will first 9. To activate the train, in the Mode Control screen, touch (HMI) the
enter standby mode On button. The train begins operating in automatic mode.
after being activated.
10. Click Exit when finished. The Mode Control screen closes.
If more trains are to be activated, repeat steps 8 - 12 for each additional

train.
4.4 RESUMING OPERATION FOLLOWING AN

ALARM SHUTDOWN
Use the following SOP to acknowledge an alarm, address the cause(s),
and resume system operation:

4-4 June, 2010
Facility
TIP: An alarm banner 1. To deactivate the alarm horn, touch (HMI) the Horn Silence
(Figure 4.4 - Alarm button found in both the Process and Alarm screens.
Banner) will appear on
screen displaying
information that
includes time of
activation and of
acknowledgement.
Figure 4.4 - Alarm Banner

June, 2010 4-5
Facility
2. Based on the information provided in the Alarm Summary and

Alarm History screens, determine what condition(s) caused the
emergency shutdown.
Figure 4.5 - Alarm Summary Screen
Figure 4.6 - Alarm History Screen
3. To acknowledge the alarm, in the Alarm Banner screen, touch

(HMI) the Acknowledge All button.

4-6 June, 2010
Facility
TIP: If an alarm 4. Resolve the alarm condition(s) before proceeding. Refer to the
condition remains accompanying appendices for information regarding issues
when the system
operator attempts to related to specific subsystems, and to Volume I - Vendor Data
resume operation, the Manual for information regarding particular equipment.
alarm will sound
again and this
procedure will need to 5. After all alarm conditions have been resolved, to reset the alarm,
be repeated. in the [Screen Name] screen, touch (HMI) the Alarm Reset button.
6. To resume operation, perform the relevant step(s) from among

those listed below, depending upon the subsystem in question:
For the ZeeWeed UF subsystem, perform steps 8 - 12 under 4.3.1

Starting Up the ZeeWeed UF Subsystem.If an alarm sounds but does not
trigger a shutdown of any subsystem or associated equipment and
deactivates automatically, consult the Alarm History screen for an
explanation. In most cases where this occurs, the condition that
triggered the alarm was resolved automatically. However, system
operators should confirm this in order to rule out the possibility of a
faulty alarm.
4.5 CONTROLLING SPECIFIC EQUIPMENT

MANUALLY
The following sections provide general instructions for controlling
specific equipment, such as valves, pumps, and blowers, from the HMI.
Refer to Volume I - Vendor Data Manual for detailed information

regarding the operating procedures for specific equipment.
4.5.1 ACCESSING DEVICE CONTROLS

To open the Device Control screen for a specific device, in the Process
screen, touch (HMI) the symbol for that device. The Device Control screen
opens.

June, 2010 4-7
Facility
4.5.2 VALVES
Valves can be set in the following modes:
• Auto - the valve is controlled by the PLC.
• Open - the valve is opened manually.
• Close - the valve is closed manually.
Valves in Open or Close mode must be monitored and controlled

manually (that is, the PLC will only control valves in Auto mode).
Figure 4.7 - Valve Device Control Screen

4-8 June, 2010
Facility
4.5.3 PROCESS PUMPS
A subsystem that has been set in Manual mode must not be left
unattended.
Figure 4.8 - Process Pump Device Control Screen
4.5.4 CHEMICAL PUMPS

Chemical pumps can be set in the following modes:
• Auto - the pump is controlled by the PLC.
• Start - the pump is activated manually.
• Stop - the pump is deactivated manually.
Pumps that are in Start or Stop mode must be monitored and controlled
manually (that is, the PLC will only control pumps in Auto mode).

June, 2010 4-9
Facility
Figure 4.9 - Chemical Skid Screen
4.5.5 AIR COMPRESSORS

Before activating an air compressor, set the duty cycle timer to the
required setting. The factory default value is provided in the CLC.
4.5.6 POWER CONTROL HARDWARE

The control panel disconnect switch, PLC stop button, and pilot light are
located on the outside of the control panel(s).
4.5.6.1 CONTROL PANEL DISCONNECT SWITCH

The disconnect switch can be used to cut power to the control panel,
which will in turn de-energize the PLC and any equipment controlled by
the PLC.

4-10 June, 2010
Facility
4.5.6.2 SYSTEM STOP BUTTON

Pressing the System Stop Button immediately places all PLC-controlled
equipment into OFF mode. To resume operation, after the button has
been pulled back out, the operator must follow the startup procedures
outlined in the applicable sections above and in the accompanying
appendices.
TIP: All manually Pressing the System Stop Button immediately places all PLC-controlled
operated equipment equipment into OFF mode. After this button is pulled back out, operation
will retain pre-
shutdown status and will resume automatically in accordance with the startup sequence
equipment in Auto outlined in the CLC provided in Section 5 - Control Documentation. A
mode remain in Auto
mode. power-up status bar will display on the HMI as operation resumes.
4.6 SYSTEM SETPOINTS

The design values for system setpoints are listed in the CLC provided in
Section 5 - Control Documentation. These values can be changed from
the setpoints screen of a particular system component.
Record all setpoint changes. In the event of a complete loss of power,

the system will restart with setpoints taken from the electronically
erasable programmable read only memory (E2PROM) and any recent
changes will be lost.
To change a setpoint, perform the following steps:
1. In the System Overview screen, click the Plant Setpoints button.

The Plant Setpoints screen is displayed.
2. In the Plant Setpoints screen, click the gray box corresponding to

the applicable setpoint.
3. Type the new setpoint value into the box, and then touch (HMI)
the Enter button. The setpoint is changed.

June, 2010 4-11
Facility
4. To close the Plant Setpoints screen, touch (HMI) the Exit button.
The Plant Setpoints screen closes.

4-12 June, 2010
SECTION 5
CONTROL DOCUMENTATION
This page has been
NOTICE
The enclosed materials are considered proprietary property of GE Water & Process Technologies. No
assignments, either implied or expressed, of intellectual property rights, data, know how, trade secrets or
licensees of use thereof are given. All information is provided exclusively to the addressee for the purpose of
evaluation and is not to be reproduced or divulged to other parties, nor used for manufacture or other means,
or authorize any of the above, without the express written consent of GE Water & Process Technologies. The
acceptance of this document will be construed as an acceptance of the foregoing conditions.
SCLA Victorville, CA
CONTROL NARRATIVE
Issued: November 16, 2009
AO# 200326
3239 Dundas Street West,

Oakville, ON
CANADA
Phone: (905) 465-3030
Fax: (905) 465-3050
CN_200236_Victorville_Rdraft@_12Nov09_DC.doc
SCLA Victorville Control
Printed:
AO# 200326 Narrative June 16, 2010
CN_200326_Victorville_R02_28May10_AV.doc
Table of Contents
1 PLANT OVERVIEW .....................................................................................................................................4
2 GENERAL INFORMATION .........................................................................................................................4
3 ZEEWEED® PERMEATE EQUIPMENT OPERATION & CONTROL ..........................................................4

3.1 ZEEWEED® TRAINS ..........................................................................................................................................................4
3.1.1 Membrane Tank Isolation Gate........................................................................................................................5
3.1.2 Influent Flow, Membrane Tanks Level & Permeate Flow Control ....................................................5
3.2 THICKENER TRAIN ............................................................................................................................................................6
3.2.1 Membrane Tank Isolation Gate........................................................................................................................6
3.2.2 Recirculation/Drain Pump...................................................................................................................................6
3.2.3 Process Pump ...........................................................................................................................................................6
3.2.4 Thickener Aeration .................................................................................................................................................7
3.2.5 Thickener Operation ..............................................................................................................................................7
3.2.6 Drain..............................................................................................................................................................................8
4 FLOW CONTROL........................................................................................................................................8
4.1 PRODUCTION TRANSMEMBRANE PRESSURE (TMP)..............................................................................................8
4.2 TRANSMEMBRANE PRESSURE (TMP) CALCULATION ............................................................................................9
4.3 START & STOP TRAIN TRIGGERS ............................................................................................................................... 10
4.4 PUTTING A ZEEWEED® TRAIN TO STANDBY ......................................................................................................10
4.5 PUTTING A THICKENER TRAIN TO STANDBY/PRODUCTION.........................................................................10
4.6 WINTER MODE ENABLED ...........................................................................................................................................11
4.7 TRAIN ROTATION ...........................................................................................................................................................11
5 BACKPULSE EQUIPMENT CONTROL.................................................................................................... 11

5.1 BACKPULSE SEQUENCING .........................................................................................................................................12
5.2 RELAX ...............................................................................................................................................................................12
6 MEMBRANE AERATION CONTROL....................................................................................................... 12

6.1 SEQUENTIAL AERATION ..............................................................................................................................................13
6.2 STANDBY AERATION ...................................................................................................................................................13
6.3 BLOWER LOW AIRFLOW .............................................................................................................................................13
Page 2 of 22
Printed:
7 RECIRCULATION FLOW CONTROL ...................................................................................................... 13

7.1 RECIRCULATION/DRAIN PUMPS ............................................................................................................................... 13
7.2 STANDBY RECIRCULATION .........................................................................................................................................13
8 INTEGRITY MONITORING & CONTROL................................................................................................ 14
9 CLEAN IN PLACE (CIP) CONTROLS ....................................................................................................... 14

9.1 SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE CLEANING EQUIPMENT ..............................................................................................14
9.2 CITRIC ACID CLEANING EQUIPMENT....................................................................................................................... 14
9.3 MAINTENANCE CLEAN .............................................................................................................................................15
9.3.1 Maintenance Clean Sequence.......................................................................................................................15
9.4 RECOVERY CLEAN .........................................................................................................................................................15
10 NEUTRALIZATION CONTROLS.............................................................................................................. 16
11 PRIMING SYSTEM CONTROL................................................................................................................. 16
12 AIR COMPRESSOR CONTROL ............................................................................................................... 17
13 ZEEWEED® MODES OF OPERATION .................................................................................................... 17

13.1 ZEEWEED® TRAIN & THICKENER ON & OFF BUTTONS .....................................................................................18
14 ZEEWEED® TRIGGERS & ALARMS ........................................................................................................ 18

14.1 ALARMS ............................................................................................................................................................................18
15 ZEEWEED® PLANT OPERATING INTERFACE....................................................................................... 20

15.1 PASSWORD ACCESS & PRIVILEGES ......................................................................................................................... 20
15.2 SCREEN COLOR-CODING ...........................................................................................................................................20
16 POWER INTERRUPTION / POWER UP ................................................................................................. 20
17 LOSS OF COMMUNICATION ALARMS.................................................................................................. 21

17.1 LOSS OF COMMUNICATION ALARM WITH PLANT SCADA...............................................................................21
18 SIGNALS FOR COMMUNICATION......................................................................................................... 21

18.1 PLANT PLC TO THE GE W&PT PLC SIGNALS .......................................................................................................21
18.2 GE W&PT PLC TO THE PLANT PLC SIGNALS .......................................................................................................22
Page 3 of 22
Printed:
1 Plant Overview
This document covers a general description of the controls by GE W&PT for the following unit
processes:
• ZeeWeed® Trains, (One of ZeeWeed® Trains can function as a thickener)
• Backpulse Equipment,
• Aeration Equipment,
• Clean-In-Place (CIP) Equipment,
• Compressed Air.
2 General Information
The reader should refer to the Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams (P&ID’s), Operations Sequence
Chart (OSC) and the Control Logic Summary Chart (CLSC) for a complete understanding of the plant
control scheme as described below.
The PLC follows specific steps to automatically control valves, pumps, etc. during the operating states
for the treatment plant. These steps are listed and described in the OSC.
Details of the control logic, setpoints, etc. that are required to operate the plant are given in the CLSC.
In the documentation the Programmable Logic Controller is referred to as the PLC. The PLC provides
automated control of the ZeeWeed® equipment. All the programming for the control of the
ZeeWeed® plant is stored in the PLC.
Setpoints, alarms, and calculated parameters, etc., are assigned tags in the PLC code. When tags are
used in the Control Narrative, they are identified by an alpha-numeric label, for example, 20-P-301,
for a Process pump.
Modes are a series of steps the train follows to perform various operations, such as a cleaning. A
specific mode discussed in this document is shown in capital letters, such as MAINTENANCE CLEAN.
Buttons displayed on the HMI screen that the operator can press to initiate a mode or other operation
are shown with the first letter capitalized. For example, one button that is used to put a train to OFF
mode is the Off button.
3 ZeeWeed® Permeate Equipment Operation & Control
3.1 ZeeWeed® Trains
A ZeeWeed® train is functionally described as a group of ZeeWeed® modules and cassettes

connected by a common permeate collection header. During PRODUCTION the process pump draws
water through the membranes and delivers it to the common permeate header and then the UV
channel.
Page 4 of 22
Printed:
3.1.1 Membrane Tank Isolation Gate
Membrane tank isolation gate is used to isolate the membrane tank from the influent flow during
RECOVERY CLEANS. Consult the OSC for further details on the gate’s position.
3.1.2 Influent Flow, Membrane Tanks Level & Permeate Flow Control
The influent flow signal is used in the calculation of the plant flow demand, which controls the speed
of the process pump. As the influent flow increases the plant flow demand increases, causing the
process pump(s) to speed up. To prevent standby and overflow conditions, the average level in the
membrane tanks is used to trim the plant flow demand. Level control is accomplished with
Proportional control. The PLC performs these calculations. The plant flow demand is the net
permeate flowrate required from the trains and does not include additional permeate the trains
produce for non-production operations, such as BACKPULSE.
The trim flowrate, which is a calculated flow, is added to or subtracted from the influent flowrate
according to the average level in the membrane tanks and the difference from the level setpoint. As
the level increases above the setpoint in the membrane tanks, the trim increases causing the overall
plant flow demand to increase. When the plant flow demand increases, the process pumps for the
trains in operation are ramped up to increase the plant permeate production which brings the level
down in the membrane tanks. Conversely, if the membrane tanks are below the setpoint, the
calculated trim flowrate is a negative flow and the overall plant flow demand decreases. The process
pumps are ramped down, decreasing permeate production, and the membrane tanks level increases
as a result of the decreased permeate production.
The flow setpoints for trains with a manual flow setpoint are added together and subtracted from the
plant flow demand which includes the level trim. This revised plant flow demand is then divided
equally to the trains in operation without a manually entered flow setpoint. This value becomes the
net production flow setpoint for a train. A correction factor is calculated to account for the time
when the train is not producing water (i.e. Relax or Backpulse) and to produce additional water
required for backpulsing the train, when trains are being backpulsed. The net production flow
setpoint multiplied by the correction factor is then used to calculate the instantaneous flow setpoint
for the train. This value controls the process pump speed through the flow PID loop.
A flow setpoint may also be entered for each train manually. The supervisor can do this by setting
the production flowrate for some or all of the trains on the HMI. The PLC will maintain the entered
production flowrate or PLC calculated production flowrate up to a maximum TransMembrane
Pressure (TMP) or a minimum membrane tank level.
Page 5 of 22
Printed:
Figure 1: Influent Flow, Level Control & Permeate Flow Control Chart
Total of all
Measured Level
supervisory
entered train Actual train
Level flow from
flows
Setpoint transmitter
Trim
Subtract supervisory
Add Flow Revised Divide net control output Convert the production Process
Influent entered train flows
and Trim Plant Flow by the number of units in flow setpoint per train Pump
Flow from plant flow
Plant Demand a production cycle without to the instantaneous Speed
demand
Flow a supervisory setpoint production setpoint
Demand
Indicates Control Loop
3.2 Thickener Train
The operator is required to waste sludge from the membrane tanks in order to maintain good
membrane performance. The operator should analyze the sludge to ensure a mixed liquor
concentration of less than 10,000 mg/L, for example, to maximize membrane performance for a
ZeeWeed® train.
The operator can select at the HMI to operate train 4 as either a ZeeWeed® train or as a thickener.
3.2.1 Membrane Tank Isolation Gate
Membrane tank isolation gate is used to isolate the membrane tank from the influent flow during
DRAIN. Consult the OSC for further details on the gate’s position.
3.2.2 Recirculation/Drain Pump
When operating as a thickener, the recirculation/drain pump does not run during PRODUCTION and
BACKPULSE. It is used to drain the membrane tank to the sludge holding tank during DRAIN.
3.2.3 Process Pump
The process pump draws permeate through the membranes which increases the concentration of
the mixed liquor suspended solids in the membrane tank from less than 1% to 3%.
In PRODUCTION, a permeate flow setpoint controls the speed of the process pump until the
concentration of mixed liquor increases above a concentration setpoint. As the concentration of
solids increases above this concentration setpoint, the flow setpoint decreases with increasing
concentration of solids.
Page 6 of 22
Printed:
3.2.4 Thickener Aeration
The membranes are aerated in 10/10 aeration in STANDBY, PRIME, PRODUCTION, and BACKPULSE.
The membrane tank is not aerated while the membrane tank is being drained.
3.2.5 Thickener Operation
To operate the train 4 as a thickener, the operator selects the Thickener button at the HMI. The
following setpoints are entered at the HMI.
• The concentration of the mixed liquor solids in the membrane tank distribution
channel;
• Setpoint for the Mixed Liquor Suspended Solids Concentration to drain the thickener
A typical waste activated sludge thickening cycle is as follows:
1) In Off, the operator selects the enable thickener button. The thickener goes to PRODUCTION.
The process pump draws permeate through the membranes while leaving the thickened
activated sludge in the membrane tank [20-TK-201-4]. The permeate volume is totalized by
the PLC.
Using the permeate volume, volume of the membrane tank, and the mixed liquor solids
concentration is measured in the membrane tank distribution channel, the PLC calculates the
mixed liquor suspended solids concentration in the membrane tank.
2) Whenever the mixed liquor solids concentration in the membrane tank is greater than the
Mixed Liquor Suspended Solids Concentration to drain the thickener, the thickener goes to
STANDBY and the HMI displays a banner “Drain the thickener”. In STANDBY, aeration
continues.
The operator selects the Drain button.
3) The recirculation/drain pump [20-P-801-4] draws the thickened waste activated sludge from
the membrane tank and delivers it to sludge holding tank through valve [16-FV-821]. The
recirculation/drain pump operates until the membrane tank level reaches an operator
adjustable low level setpoint (as close to empty as possible).
4) The membrane tank gate [20-FV-110-4] opens and refills the membrane tank to the
operating level. (The membrane gate opens for set duration and stops opening for a duration.
This prevents damage to the membranes.)
5) The membrane tank is aerated for fifteen to thirty minutes.
6) The thickener status switches back to train status.
3.2.5.1 The Mixed Liquor Suspended Solids Concentration to Drain the Thickener
The Mixed Liquor Suspended Solids Concentration to drain the thickener is an operator adjustable
setpoint on the HMI with a maximum value of 3%. The operator enters at the HMI the concentration
of mix liquor suspended solids feeding the thickener. The PLC totalizes the permeate flow from the
thickener. The percent mixed liquor solids concentration in a thickener is calculated as follows:
Page 7 of 22
Printed:
Percent MLSS in the thickener = Total net permeate volume divided by the membrane thickener tank
volume multiplied by percent solids in the thickener feed.
= (Totalized permeate volume minus the totalized backpulse volume in
the backpulse) divided by the level in the thickener multiplied by the
thickener tank area multiplied by percent Mixed Liquor Suspended
Solids in the feed.
3.2.6 Drain
The operator selects the Drain button at the HMI to start Drain mode.
The steps for DRAIN are:
1. The valves [20-FV-501-4 and 16-FV-821] open;
2. The recirculation/drain pump [20-P-801-4] draws the thickened waste activated sludge from
the membrane tank and delivers it to sludge holding tank through valve [16-FV-821]. The
membranes are backpulsed every fifteen minutes.
3. The valves [20-FV-501-4 and 16-FV-821] close;
4. Refill the membrane tank to the cleaning level from the membrane tank distribution channel.
The membrane tank gate’s position is controlled based on timers to prevent damage to the
membrane and sending the other trains to STANDBY on low level.
5. The membrane tank is aerated for fifteen to thirty minutes.
6. Proceeds to OFF.
Consult the OSC and CLSC for setpoints and additional operation information.
4 Flow Control
The production cycle for a train is PRODUCTION followed by either BACKPULSE or RELAX. The
production cycle for a thickener is PRODUCTION followed by BACKPULSE. The thickener and train
used the same timer to control the production cycle. The default value for this timer is twelve
minutes.
4.1 Production TransMembrane Pressure (TMP)
The PLC continuously calculates the TMP value while in PRODUCTION. If the TMP is too low, (i.e., too
negative) the TMP low trigger is active and the flow control PID loop output is captured. This value
becomes the maximum value for the flow control PID loop output.
When the TMP low trigger becomes active, the PLC gradually reduces the maximum for the flow PID
loop output until the TMP low trigger is not active, (i.e., TMP is less negative). At the moment when the
TMP low trigger becomes inactive, the maximum value is then gradually increased until the TMP low
trigger is active again, or continues to increase until the maximum value for the flow control PID loop
Page 8 of 22
Printed:
output equals 100%. This control strategy allows the PLC to vary the pump speed to maximize flow
while avoiding excessive TMP across the membranes.
4.2 TransMembrane Pressure (TMP) Calculation
TMP is calculated by using the equation below. During PRODUCTION the value is negative, for
backpulses and CIP, it is positive. The transmembrane pressure calculation is the same for the
ZeeWeed® trains and the thickener.
TMP = Header Pressure + C x (A + B - Membrane Tank Level)
Where:
A is the height of the pressure transmitter above the top of the membranes.
B is the height to the top of membranes in the membrane tank.
C is a conversion factor (water depth to pressure); consult the CLSC for the value.
In PRODUCTION, an increased TMP value means a larger pressure differential because the pressure
inside the membranes is lower than outside the membranes. This corresponds to a lower number as
expressed in engineering units. Therefore a high production TMP is actually expressed as a Pressure
Differential Alarm Low.
Page 9 of 22
Printed:
Figure 2 TMP Chart
4.3 Start & Stop Train Triggers
The number of trains in operation at any given time will vary depending on the plant flow demand.
As this demand increases, the number of trains in PRODUCTION increases. Start and stop train
triggers determine when another train is to start or when a train in PRODUCTION is switched to
STANDBY respectively. These triggers are defined in the CLSC.
4.4 Putting a ZeeWeed® Train to STANDBY
Several triggers may cause a train to go to STANDBY rather than shutting it down. These triggers
include a low membrane tank level, low plant flow demand, or a loss of compressed air. If a low
membrane tank level occurs, the train will immediately proceed to STANDBY. If the STANDBY triggers
no longer exist and a Start trigger is active, the train proceeds into PRODUCTION.
4.5 Putting a Thickener Train to STANDBY/PRODUCTION
Several triggers may cause the thickener to go to STANDBY rather than shutting it down. These
triggers include a low membrane tank level, a loss of compressed air; the Calculated MLSS
Page 10 of 22
Printed:
Concentration in the Thickener is greater than The Mixed Liquor Suspended Solids Concentration to
drain the thickener.
If the Calculated MLSS Concentration in the Thickener is less than the Mixed Liquor Suspended Solids
Concentration to drain the thickener; and the membrane tank level is above the low level trigger then
the thickener proceeds to PRODUCTION.
4.6 Winter Mode Enabled
Winter mode operation is for plants that can freeze. Winter mode only works as long as there is
demand for at least one train to be in the Production cycle. It is not applicable to the thickener
operation.
The PLC is programmed to force a train, which is in Standby more than 30 minutes to go to
Production (this train stays in the Production cycle for at least 200 seconds) another trains in the
Production cycle will be pushed (by logic) into Standby because of high production time.
After 200 seconds, the PLC check again all the Standby trains and select the train which has more
than 30 minutes standby time and the highest standby time to repeat the same process again, one
train at the time. The timers are operator adjustable at the HMI. The number of trains in the
Production cycle is still controlled by the start/stop triggers. There are selector switches on the HMI to
select either Enable Winter or Disable Winter Mode.
During this switching time the request for the number of running blowers is held constant.
4.7 Train Rotation
When there are long periods of low plant flow demand, the same trains in a plant run most of the
time. The operator can select the Train Rotation button at the HMI. When the plant is operating with
Train Rotation, a timer starts. The timer specifies the running time for the next train to go to STANDBY.
This train goes to STANDBY after the timer times out and the train has completed either a Backpulse
or a Relax. The timer is reset to zero. This rotation only occurs when there is at least one train in
STANDBY and at least one train is in the Production cycle. The number of trains in the Production
cycle is controlled by the start/stop triggers. The blower operation does not change during this
rotation. Winter Mode and Train Rotation cannot be selected at the same time. When train 4 is
functioning as a thickener, it is not included in Train Rotation.
5 Backpulse Equipment Control
The membranes are backpulsed using process pump. Treated water is periodically reversed back
through the membranes to maintain stable transmembrane pressures.
The PLC controls the pump speed to backpulse the trains at a set flow rate per train up to a
maximum TMP. A transmitter on the membrane header is used to calculate the BACKPULSE TMP.
This provides membrane protection against over-pressurization. If the TMP is too high, the TMP high
trigger is active and the flow control PID loop output is captured. This value becomes the maximum
value for the output of the flow control PID loop.
Page 11 of 22
Printed:
When the TMP high trigger becomes active, the PLC gradually reduces the maximum for the flow PID
loop output until the TMP high trigger is not active, (i.e., TMP is less positive). At the moment when the
TMP high trigger becomes inactive, the maximum value is then gradually increased until the TMP high
trigger is active again, or continues to increase until the maximum value for the flow control PID loop
output equals 100%. This control strategy allows the PLC to vary the pump speed to maximize flow
while avoiding excessive TMP across the membranes.
The backpulse duration, production cycle duration, TMP setpoint and flow setpoint for all ZeeWeed®
trains can be set through the HMI. All ZeeWeed® trains in the plant share the same backpulse
duration and production cycle duration.
5.1 Backpulse Sequencing
The PLC staggers the backpulses of the trains and thickener throughout each cycle to distribute the
backpulses evenly when all trains/thickener are in the Production cycle. Each train/thickener is given
a fixed scheduled time in the master Production cycle timer to begin either a BACKPULSE or RELAX.
Train 1 is assigned the first time slot, train 2 is assigned the second time slot, and so on for all
trains/thickener in the system. Regardless of the number of trains/thickener in the Production cycle,
each train/thickener is always backpulsed at the same time slot of the master Production cycle timer.
For example, when there are four trains (three trains and one thickener) in the system and the
Production cycle time is 12 minutes, the first time slot is at time 0 min. and the second time slot, to
backpulse Train 2, is at 3 minutes of the master Production cycle timer.
The master Production cycle timer starts when there are no trains/thickener in Production and one
train/thickener is requested to start PRODUCTION. The timer restarts every time it times out.
The operator can initiate a BACKPULSE from the HMI for any ZeeWeed® train by pressing the
Backpulse button. This button is disabled if any other train is in BACKPULSE.
5.2 Relax
RELAX control is an alternative to backpulsing. If a backpulse failure occurs and no pump is available,
the PLC will place the trains into RELAX mode.
In RELAX mode, the PLC will stop permeating and the membranes sits for an operator entered
duration before continuing PRODUCTION. During this time solids that have concentrated around the
membrane will be distributed away from the membrane surface by the aeration.
6 Membrane Aeration Control
There are four membrane blowers, 20-P-201. The PLC determines the number of blowers required to
run and the flow setpoint for these blowers. Blower duty is alternated according to an operator
entered run time. The blowers supply low pressure air into a common air header. This common air
header then divides into multiple air headers to the membrane tanks.
For further details on blower operation, refer to the OSC and CLSC for the occurrence and number of
blowers to be running at any given time. The blowers operate at a constant speed. The PLC starts
and stops membrane blowers as necessary based on the aeration demand.
Page 12 of 22
Printed:
6.1 Sequential Aeration
Each train/thickener operates under sequential aeration, which is accomplished by aerating a given
membrane module for 10 seconds, then not aerating it for 10 seconds. The cyclic aeration valves will
cycle air within a train/thickener, reducing both the air required to run the system and the operating
costs.
6.2 STANDBY Aeration
In STANDBY, the train are aerated intermittently based on timers. The PLC aerates trains sequentially
to limit the number of starts and stops on the membrane aeration blowers. The trains are aerated
starting with the first train followed by the second train, then the third train, without stopping the
blower. Trains are aerated in the order of their train number. If, for example, train 2, and 3 are in
Standby, train 2 is aerated first, and then train 3. Sequential aeration involves an overlap of aeration
to allow the membrane aeration blower to continue to operate as one train completes its aeration
and another train begins its aeration.
In STANDBY, the thickener is aerated continuously in 10/10 aeration.
6.3 Blower Low Airflow
A low air flow switch is located on the discharge of each blower, for blower protection. If the switch is
active, an alarm occurs and the PLC changes the lead to the next available blower. If there is no
other blower available, a different alarm occurs and the PLC shuts down trains until there is sufficient
aeration capacity. If all blowers are faulted, then all the trains are shut down.
7 Recirculation Flow Control
The recirculation/drain pumps circulate RAS at an operator adjustable ratio based on the required
plant flow demand. As the plant flow demand increases the recirculation flow demand increases,
causing the recirculation/drain pump(s) to speed up. The PLC performs these calculations.
7.1 Recirculation/Drain Pumps
Each membrane tank has a dedicated recirculation/drain pump. Recirculation/drain pumps will
operate during all modes of operation for a ZeeWeed® train excluding MAINTENANCE CLEAN and
NEUTRALIZATION. In RECOVERY CLEAN, the recirculation/drain pump drains the membrane tank.
When a train is functioning as a thickener, the recirculation/drain pump does not operate in
PRODUCTION, RELAX, and BACKPULSE. In DRAIN, the recirculation/drain pump drains the membrane
tank.
7.2 Standby Recirculation
In the event all of the trains are in STANDBY, a RAS pump will remain running on one train.
When a train in STANDBY is aerated, the recirculation/drain pump will operate for the Standby
aeration duration.
Page 13 of 22
Printed:
8 Integrity Monitoring & Control
Integrity of each train/thickener is monitored with on-line turbidimeters.

There are three turbidity alarms used to assist the operator in running the system. One alarm is used
to detect a problem that is not a spike and will immediately shutdown the train/thickener in
PRODUCTION. For example, a train/thickener will be shutdown when the turbidity is above the
setpoint, 0.5 NTU, for 60 seconds.
A second alarm is used to detect a spike in turbidity and will set all trains that are in BACKPULSE
mode to RELAX mode. For example, the alarm is active when the turbidity is above the setpoint, 5
NTU, for 10 seconds. The alarm will also skip all scheduled MAINTENANCE CLEANS until the turbidity
alarm condition no longer exists. From this time on, MAINTENANCE CLEANS will again be completed
as scheduled.
The third alarm also detects turbidity spikes but at a lower setpoint and is used to notify the operator
of a potential problem which needs to be addressed. For example, the alarm is active when the
turbidity is above the setpoint, 0.2 NTU for 60 seconds.
The turbidity alarm setpoints and the time delays, before the alarms become active, are adjustable at
the HMI. For further details consult the CLSC.
9 Clean In Place (CIP) Controls
The membranes require cleaning to maintain peak performance. There are two types of cleaning
methods; Maintenance Cleans and Recovery Cleans. The cleaning chemical is either citric acid or
sodium hypochlorite for Maintenance Cleans and Recovery Cleans.
RECOVERY CLEANS are operator initiated from OFF and should have the operator present during the
majority of this clean.
When train 4 is operating as a thickener then Maintenance Clean and Recovery Clean are not
available.
9.1 Sodium Hypochlorite Cleaning Equipment
Sodium hypochlorite is used to remove organic contaminants from the membranes. The sodium
hypochlorite pumps 23-P-110/23-P-120 are an air diaphragm pumps. The GE W&PT PLC requests a
sodium hypochlorite valve, 23-FV-101 for MAINTENANCE CLEANS or 23-FV-102 for RECOVERY
CLEANS, to open to run the pump in specific steps during the cleaning procedure. Consult the OSC for
these steps.
9.2 Citric Acid Cleaning Equipment
Citric acid is periodically used to remove inorganic contaminants from the membranes such as
calcium carbonate, manganese and iron compounds. The citric acid pumps 23-P-310/23-P-320 are
an air diaphragm pumps. The GE W&PT PLC requests a citric acid valve, 23-FV-301 for MAINTENANCE
CLEANS or 23-FV-302 for RECOVERY CLEANS, to open to run the pump in specific steps during the
cleaning procedure. Consult the OSC for these steps.
Page 14 of 22
Printed:
9.3 MAINTENANCE CLEAN
Maintenance Cleans are scheduled through the HMI and are automatically initiated by the PLC based
on a 24 hour clock. The operator is able to schedule one Maintenance Clean per train per day. He/She
enters the starting time and selects the cleaning chemical for the clean.
When it is time to carry out a Maintenance Clean, the PLC compares the current plant flow demand
with the available capacity of the plant if one train is not in service. If the plant flow demand exceeds
this capacity, then the scheduled MAINTENANCE CLEAN is skipped but the request remains active and
will be started when demand is lower. When a Maintenance Clean is skipped or aborted, an alarm
occurs to inform the operator.
If the plant flow demand does not exceed this capacity, when it is time to carry out a Maintenance
Clean, the train will complete its current production cycle before starting the cleaning procedure. If a
train is in STANDBY it will go directly to MAINTENANCE CLEAN.
9.3.1 Maintenance Clean Sequence
The steps for Maintenance Clean are:

1) Aerates the membrane tank;
2) Initial chemically enhanced pulse for all cassettes;
3) Relaxation period for all cassettes;
4) Chemically enhanced pulse for all cassettes;
5) Relaxation period for all cassettes;
6) Steps 4 and 5 are repeated for a number of iterations;
7) Non-chemically enhanced pulse for all cassettes;
8) Aerates the membrane tank;
9) Proceeds to STANDBY.
9.4 Recovery Clean
Recovery Cleans can only be carried out for a train if it is in RECOVERY CLEAN. The cleaning chemical
is either citric acid or sodium hypochlorite. The operator turns the train OFF and then selects either
the R. Clean with Citric Acid button or R. Clean with Sodium Hypochlorite button for the cleaning to
begin. During a Recovery Clean there are several prompts which the operator must address. Consult
the OSC and CLSC for further details. As a result it is suggested to have the operator present during
the Recovery Clean so that these prompts can be responded to in a timely manner.
The steps for Recovery Clean are:
1. Aerates the membrane tank;
2. Drains the membrane tank with the recirculation/drain pump;
3. Manual drain and flush step. The PLC will proceed to the next step after a defined duration.
Page 15 of 22
Printed:
4. Steps 5 to 8 are repeated for a number of iterations and then proceed to step 9.
5. Backpulses the membrane tank for a defined duration then proceeds to next step or until the
membrane tank is at a defined level then proceeds to step 7;
6. Relaxation period for all cassettes for a defined duration and then proceed to step 5.
7. Aerates the membrane tank for a defined duration;
8. Drains the membrane tank with the recirculation/drain pump;
9. Chemically enhanced pulse to all the cassettes for a defined duration then proceeds to next step
or until the tank is at a defined level then proceeds to step 11;
10. Relaxation period for all cassettes for a defined duration and then proceeds to step 9;
11. Final, extended relaxation period with intermittent aeration;
12. The operator selects the Neutralization button to proceed to NEUTRALIZATION mode.
The Neutralization button is available in OFF and in the last step of RECOVERY CLEAN. The steps for
Neutralization are:
1. Fills the membrane tank to defined level from the membrane distribution channel;
2. Aerates the membrane tank;
3. Relaxation period for all cassettes for a defined duration and then either proceed to next step if
the clean was with sodium hypochlorite or proceed to step 5 if the clean was with citric acid.
4. The operator manually checks the residual chlorine concentration. The operator selects the
Confirm Neutralization button to proceed to next step when the residual chlorine concentration is
less than 10 ppm. The operator selects the Resume Neutralization button when the residual
chlorine concentration is greater than 10 ppm. The PLC will proceed to step 3.
5. Non-chemically enhanced pulse to all the cassettes;
6. Proceeds to OFF.
Consult the OSC and CLSC for specific details on the steps and setpoints used in this mode.
10 Neutralization Controls
The NEUTRALIZATION is initiated by the operator after the extended chemical soak step in Recovery
Clean. The operator is then responsible for confirming the neutralization if the clean was with sodium
hypochlorite.
11 Priming System Control
Each train is provided with an ejector, 20-E-801, which uses compressed air to operate and primes
the process pump during PRIME, at the beginning of BACKPULSE/RELAX and intermittently the trains
in STANDBY and PRODUCTION.
Page 16 of 22
Printed:
When the operator selects the On button, the train goes to PRIME. The train’s ejector compressed air
valve opens which also opens the permeate header isolation valve. During this time, air in the
permeate header is pulled up and out through the ejector, which also pulls water into the
membranes and process pump suction. Any water that is drawn into the ejector drains out by gravity.
After the priming duration, the train proceeds to STANDBY.
The PLC staggers the priming of the trains throughout the Master Ejector cycle to distribute the
priming when trains are in Production and Standby. Each train is given a fixed scheduled time in the
Master Ejector Cycle Timer to begin priming. Train 1 is assigned the first time slot, train 2 is assigned
the second time slot, and so on for all trains in the system. Regardless of the number of trains, each
train is always primed at the same time slot of the Master Ejector Cycle Timer. The Master Ejector
Cycle Timer starts once any train is in STANDBY and continues while there is at least one train in
STANDBY, PRODUCTION, BACKPULSE, & RELAX.
When train 4 is functioning as a thickener, its ejector runs according to the Master Ejector cycle in
Standby for Thickener and Production for Thickener.
The operator can manually initiate the priming sequence in STANDBY by pressing the Prime button at
the HMI.
12 Air Compressor Control
Local control panels, supplied by the Vendor, control the compressors. Refer to Vendor supplied
information for more details.
There is a low pressure switch on the common discharge piping which is used to alarm and callout.
When this alarm is active, all trains/thickener in PRODUCTION, RELAX, and BACKPULSE switch to
STANDBY.
13 ZeeWeed® Modes of Operation
Each ZeeWeed® train has separate mode buttons. There are several modes for each train, these
modes are: OFF, SHUTDOWN, POWER OFF, STANDBY for train, PRIME, BACKPULSE for train, RELAX,
PRODUCTION for train, MAINTENANCE CLEAN, RECOVERY CLEAN and NEUTRALIZATION. Using the
ZeeWeed® train mode buttons on the HMI, the operator can put each ZeeWeed® train into a different
mode. There are some interlocks present to prevent the user from proceeding to one mode from
another. These interlocks are for membrane protection. Not all modes are selectable. Consult the
CLSC and OSC for further details on the modes.
A train/thickener is in POWER OFF because a loss of power alarm is active or the system stop button
is selected. A train/thickener is in SHUTDOWN because a shutdown alarm is active. A train/thickener
is in STANDBY because a stop trigger or a standby trigger is active.
The thickener’s modes are OFF, SHUTDOWN, POWER OFF, STANDBY for thickener, PRIME, BACKPULSE
for thickener, and PRODUCTION for thickener.
Page 17 of 22
Printed:
13.1 ZeeWeed® Train & Thickener On & Off Buttons
For the train to operate automatically the operator needs to have all devices set to auto and On
button for the train selected. The On button is only active for a train if it is in either OFF or
SHUTDOWN. Pressing the On button places the train into PRIME and then into STANDBY mode.
When a start trigger is active, the train proceeds to PRODUCTION and then either BACKPULSE or
RELAX modes. The train will continue in the production cycle, alternating between PRODUCTION and
either BACKPULSE or RELAX modes, until the plant flow demand to treat wastewater decreases
placing the train to STANDBY. A scheduled MAINTENANCE CLEAN will automatically interrupt the
production cycle. An alarm may also place a train to STANDBY or SHUTDOWN.
The operator may interrupt the production cycle by pressing either the Maintenance Clean or
Backpulse button. The train will proceed to the selected mode once the resources are available.
There are interlocks preventing more than one train from entering the same mode at the same time.
Consult the CLSC and the OSC for details on the interlocks.
The operator may turn a train/thickener OFF at any time. Pressing the Off button places the
train/thickener into OFF mode. It is the responsibility of the operator to ensure that if the Off button is
pressed when a train is in the MAINTENANCE CLEAN or RECOVERY CLEAN modes the membrane
tank’s contents are suitable for a train to proceed to another mode. Neutralization may be required,
or the membrane tank may need to be drained.
For the thickener to operate automatically the operator needs to have all devices set to auto and On
button for the thickener selected. The On button is only active for a thickener if it is in either OFF or
SHUTDOWN. Pressing the On button places the thickener into PRIME and then into STANDBY for
thickener mode. When a start trigger is active, the thickener proceeds to PRODUCTION and then
BACKPULSE mode. The thickener will continue in the production cycle, alternating between
PRODUCTION and BACKPULSE modes, until the Calculated MLSS Concentration in the Thickener is
greater than the Mixed Liquor Suspended Solids Concentration to drain the thickener placing the
thickener to STANDBY. An alarm may also place a thickener to STANDBY or SHUTDOWN.
14 ZEEWEED® Triggers & Alarms
A trigger is a normal event that can clear an alarm or be one of several points in a sequence of
events.
14.1 Alarms
Alarms are used to identify a problem with the system. Depending on the nature of the problem the
alarm may either shutdown the train(s), place a train to STANDBY, and initiate a callout to notify the
operator that there is a problem. It is understood that the operator will acknowledge the alarm and
address the situation. If the problem is not corrected, production quality and quantity will drop off
quickly.
An alarm that is activated by an instrument, pressure transmitter, flow transmitters, or level
instrumentation, typically requires a pump or certain device to be on to generate the required flow or
pressure. Otherwise, the alarm will be ignored if the device to be protected is off.
Page 18 of 22
Printed:
All alarms are indicated with a message on the screen. The operator cannot reset the alarm without
the correct password. All alarms and the time they occurred are recorded on the alarm history
screen.
Some alarms can shutdown a ZeeWeed® train or all the trains and the thickener. These alarms close
appropriate valves and stop the pumps. The shutdown alarm puts the train to SHUTDOWN mode.
Restarting after a shutdown will require the alarm to be reset. The shutdown alarm puts the thickener
to SHUTDOWN mode. Restarting after a shutdown will require the alarm to be reset.
Devices which are being controlled remotely cannot have their status changed by the PLC.
Consult the CLSC for details on specific alarms, the corresponding actions and reset procedures.
Typical alarms that shutdown a train and alarms that put a train/thickener to STANDBY are listed in
the following tables.
Table 1: Train Shutdown Alarms
Alarm Description Possible Causes for Alarm

High Flow Alarm - permeate Suction hose disconnecting from fittings.
Low Flow Alarm - permeate Loss of prime of process pump
Pressure High-High Alarm – permeate
Suction hose disconnecting from fittings.
(measured by pressure Transmitter)
Transmembrane Pressure Low, Low Fouled UF membranes
Process pump Fault VFD Fault
Compressed Air – Low pressure and train is in Insufficient Compressed Air Supply to operate
Recovery Clean pneumatically actuated valves
Table 2: Train Standby Alarms
Alarm Description Possible Causes for Alarm

Permeate flowrate is higher than the Feed
Low Level Alarm – membrane tank
flowrate
Power Failure Tripped breaker inside panel
Decreased Feed
Low Flow Demand Standby Trigger
– train is not required for Production
Compressed Air – Low pressure and train is in
Insufficient Compressed Air Supply to operate
Production, Backpulse, or Relax, or Maintenance
pneumatically actuated valves
Clean.
Page 19 of 22
Printed:
15 ZeeWeed® PLANT OPERATING Interface
To accommodate the above operational requirements and all other control, display, and monitoring
requirements, this plant employs a Human Machine Interface (HMI) for access to plant controls. The
HMI communicates with the Programmable Logic Controller (PLC (referred to as “PLC” in the
documentation)), which in turn controls the plant.
15.1 Password Access & Privileges
The entire plant is controlled from the PLC through a HMI. The ability to silence the horn and
acknowledge alarms does not require a password, but alarms can not be reset.
To gain access to make changes on the HMI, the operator is required to enter the correct password.
A screensaver blanks the screen after a set amount of time of inactivity. The screen is reactivated by
a single touch. Reactivation cannot select a device or operating mode.
In order to access the control screens, the individual must enter a correct password then press Enter.
There are three levels of password protection; Operator, Supervisor, & GE W&PT. The operator
password is factory set; consult the CLSC for the operator password. The supervisor password can
be modified from the HMI. There is no limit to the number of times another password can be
attempted. The password must be re-entered after a set amount of time of inactivity. For details of
password privileges consult the CLSC.
15.2 Screen Color-Coding
The color-coded status indicates whether the device is either running automatically, shutdown, in
STANDBY, off, manually overridden, etc.
The HMI uses the color-coding shown below.
Table 3: HMI Color Code Devices Chart
Color Valve Pump
Green Open On
Red Fault Fault
Grey Close Off
16 Power Interruption / Power Up
When a loss of power occurs, the affected trains/thickener will immediately proceed to POWER OFF
mode. After power returns, the plant powers up common equipment and then the trains/thickener
will start-up automatically in the order of the membrane tank number. The CLSC lists the order in
which the common equipment and trains will power up; it also specifies the mode that a
train/thickener will proceed to from POWER OFF mode.
Page 20 of 22
Printed:
17 Loss of Communication Alarms
During operation of the GE W&PT system, there are “heartbeat signals generated by each PLC. Each
“heartbeat” signal is a counter that increases by one unit each second. When the communication
with a PLC is lost, the PLC that is monitoring the “heartbeat” counter detects that the value of the
counter has not changed for a preset time, for example after 5 seconds, and alarms. When the
counter reaches 10,000 it restarts counting from zero.
Discussions of the alarms and the changes that occur to the control systems are given in the
following sections.
17.1 Loss of Communication Alarm with Plant SCADA
When there is a loss of communication with the plant SCADA, the trains proceed to SHUTDOWN.
18 Signals for Communication
For the GE W&PT membrane system to maintain optimal performance, information must be
communicated between the plant SCADA and the GE W&PT PLC.
Operating parameters of the GE W&PT system such as flowrates, pressures, train modes, etc. are
available for communication, if necessary, when the plant SCADA is required to only monitor these
parameters. A list showing this information, however, is not provided in this document due to the
large number of parameters available.
The MBR system operates in a continuous automatic mode controlled by GE W&PT PLC, which shall
interface with the plant SCADA system.
18.1 Plant PLC to the GE W&PT PLC Signals
The list given below shows the signals that are communicated from the plant SCADA over the
network to the GE W&PT PLC to operate the membrane system.
1. Feed Flowrate
2. Permissive to run the trains and thickener (the UV is ready)
3. Running signal for blower 20-B-201-1
7. Running signal for process pump 20-P-301-1
11. Running signal for recirculation drain pump 16-P-801-1
Page 21 of 22
Printed:

18.2 GE W&PT PLC to the Plant PLC Signals
The list given below shows the signals that are communicated from the GE W&PT PLC over the
network to the plant PLC to assist in the operation of the membrane system.
1. Required flow for blower 20-B-201-1
5. Required flow for process pump 20-P-301-1
9. Required flow for recirculation drain pump 16-P-801-1
Page 22 of 22
Operations Sequence Chart for Train Sequenced Equipment
Legend
This column is for the GE W&PT Tags
T - Indicates that the valve is throttling in Auto.
io n
ain
O - Indicates that the valve/motor is open/on in Auto.
lat
i o n N6
/Dr
air
X - Indicates that the valve/motor is closed/OFF in Auto.
Iso
n
io n
it e
it e
on
tio
sed
lo r
rite
C - Indicates that valve cycles though an open/close sequence.
lat
lat
lo r
d
p
lat
o la
an
io n
m
n 6
ch
res
Iso
Iso
ch
tio N
rcu
o
-x - Indicates that there are multiple trains associated with this tag number.
t Is
Pu
em
l
po
lat
ch
po
mp
ing
nk
eci
en
r to
Hy
LS - Indicates that the valve/pump will retain the last state it had (open/closed, on/OFF) to avoid damaging equipment.
nD
po
Iso
Hy
l
Operating Mode
id
tia
o la
Ta
cid
co
old
um
-R
Ac
Hy
ain
de
ium
tio
en
cid
m
k Is
ne
cA
tor
H
str
ge
ric
ea
diu
/Dr
m
era
qu
ic A
bra
od
ge
jec
i
an
r
- In
d
diu
Cit
-H
C it
Se
So
io n
eA
S
lud
ix T
em
-E
r
l
C it
dS
So
N-
N-
Step Description Step #
y
TE
TE
-
N-
N-
la t
ran
ela
-S
IR
UM
-M
oM
ate
EA
EA
N-
N-
EA
EA
s
EA
EA
cu
A
ces
pD
AIN
mb
RM
RM
CU
CL
CL
M.
St
ED
EA
EA
c ir
tiv
CL
CL
p
Pro
Ste
Ste
Me
ME
DR
RA
VA
Re
CL
CL
Ac
PE
PE
FE
M.
M.
R.
R.
Tag Numbers Valves Pumps & Blowers
For 20-E-801-
20-FV-210-x
20-FV-211-x
20-FV-110-x
20-FV-320-x
23-FV-131-x
23-FV-331-x
20-FV-501-x
20-FV-802-x
20-B-201-x
16-P-801-x
20-P-301-x
20-FV-301
16-FV-820
16-FV-821
23-FV-301
23-FV-101
23-FV-302
23-FV-102
The Operations Sequence Chart (OSC), Control Logic Summary Chart (CLSC) and the Control Narrative (CN) should all be read to assist in the understanding of plant operations.
x
Comments & Sequencing Logic
OFF 1
Stops all rotating equipment, and leaves valves as they were.
Step 1 LS LS LS LS LS LS LS LS LS X X X X X X X X 6 1
Waits for step delay, then proceeds to the next step.
Train/thickener remains OFF until the operator changes it to another operational mode.
If the ON button is pressed proceeds to PRIME - step 1.
For a train, if the BACKPULSE button is pressed proceeds to BACKPULSE - step 1 for a train.
For the thickener, if the BACKPULSE button is pressed proceeds to BACKPULSE - step 1 for thickener.
When the train 4 is operating as a thickener the Drain button is available. If the Drain button is pressed proceeds to DRAIN - step 1.
Step 2 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 2
If the NEUTRALIZATION button is pressed proceeds to NEUTRALIZATION - step 1. (This button is not available for the thickener.)
If the MAINTENANCE CLEAN button is pressed proceeds to MAINTENANCE CLEAN - step 1. (This button is not available for the thickener.)
If the RECOVERY CLEAN button is pressed proceeds to RECOVERY CLEAN - step 1. (This button is not available for the thickener.)
If PRIME pushbutton is pressed proceeds to PRIME - step 1.
Only proceeds to the step indicated if the resources are available and the interlocks preventing the action are not present.
SHUTDOWN 2
Shutdown Step 1 LS LS LS LS LS LS LS LS LS X X X X X X X X 6 1
When 20-LS-201Q-x is active, then open the gate for 20-KQS-110C seconds gate stop opening the gate for 20-KQS-110D seconds. Repeat opening the gate with the frequency and duration timers.
Tank Fill Step 2 X O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 2 When 20-LS-201Q-x is not active, then request to open the gate continously and ignore the timers.
When 20-LS-201E-x is active, proceeds to the next step.
Train/thickener remains in this mode until the operator changes the train/thickener to ON or OFF mode.
Shutdown Step 3 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 3 If the ON button is pressed proceeds to PRIME - step 1.
If the OFF button is pressed proceeds to OFF - step 1.
POWER OFF 3 3
Train remains in this step until it is enabled by the start-up sequence steps.
Step 1 1
All Devices OFF Consult the CLSC for specific details.
5
STANDBY for Train 5
Step 1 LS O LS LS LS LS LS LS LS X X X X X X X X 6 1
Tank Fill Step 2 X O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 2 When 20-LS-201E-x is active, proceeds to the next step.
Aerates for 20-KQS-201C seconds every 20-KQS-201D seconds.
Runs the ejector intermittently according to Master Ejector Cycle Timer.
The train remains in this step indefinitely until one of the following occurs:
If a start train trigger is active, defined in the CLSC, the train proceeds to the PRODUCTION - step 1 for a train.
If the BACKPULSE button is pressed proceeds to BACKPULSE - step 1 for a train.
STANDBY Step 3 CN1 O X X X X O O X X X X X ON4 ON3,5 ON1 X 3
If the RELAX button is pressed proceeds to RELAX - step 1.
If the MAINTENANCE CLEAN button is pressed proceeds to MAINTENANCE CLEAN - step 1.
If the PRIME TRAIN button is pressed proceeds to PRIME - step 1.
5
STANDBY for Thickener 5
Step 1 C O LS LS LS LS LS LS LS X X X X X X LS X 6 1
Tank Fill Step 2 C O X X X X X X X X X X X X X O X 2 When 20-LS-201E-4 is active, proceeds to the next step.
Runs the ejector intermittently according to Master Ejector Cycle Timer.
The thickener remains in this step indefinitely until one of the following occurs:
If the Drain the Thickener Trigger is not active, defined in the CLSC, the thickener proceeds to PRODUCTION - step 1 for thickener.
STANDBY Step 3 C O X X X X X X X X X X X ON4 X O X 3 If the PRIME button is pressed proceeds to PRIME - step 1.
If the BACKPULSE button is pressed proceeds to BACKPULSE - step 1 for the thickener.
If the Drain button is pressed proceeds to DRAIN - step 1.
PRIME 8 8 Only one train/thickener can be in PRIME mode at a time but more than one train/thickener can be in a priming step (when an ejector is running).
Holds this step for step duration
IF PRIME was initiated from STANDBY then for a train proceeds to STANDBY - step 1 for a train.
Priming Train Step 1 X O X X X X X X X X X X X O X X X 20-KQS-801 1 IF PRIME was initiated from STANDBY then for a thickener proceeds to STANDBY - step 1 for thickener.
If the On button was pressed in Off or Shutdown, then for a train proceeds to STANDBY - step 1 for a train.
If the On button was pressed in Off or Shutdown, then for a thickener proceeds to STANDBY - step 1 for a thickener.
PRODUCTION for Train 14 14
Step 1 C O O O X X O O X X X X X X LS LS X 6 1 Waits for step delay, then proceeds to the next step.
Permeates until the end of the current Production cycle, then:

Permeate Step 2 C O O O X X O O X X X X X ON4 O O O 2 If there is a demand for the train to run and there are no mode requests noted below, proceeds to either BACKPULSE for a train - step 1 or RELAX - step 1.
If a MAINTENANCE CLEAN request is active proceeds to MAINTENANCE CLEAN - step 1.
PRODUCTION for Thickener 19 19 Only train 4 can function as a thickener.

Valve Alignment Step 1 C O O O X X X X X X X X X X X O X 6 1 Waits for step delay, then proceeds to the next step.
Permeates until the end of the current Production cycle, then:
Permeate Step 2 C O O O X X X X X X X X X ON4 X O O 2 If the Drain the Thickener Trigger is not active, the thickener proceeds to BACKPULSE - step 1 for thickener.
If the Drain the Thickener Trigger is active, the thickener proceeds to STANDBY - step 1 for thickener.
Page 1 of 4
Issued: Nov 16, 2009
Process Controls: D. Courtney The enclosed materials are considered proprietary property of GE Water & Process Technologies. OSC_200326_Victorville_R02_11May10_MdK2.xls
Legend
io n
ain
lat
i o n N6
/Dr
air
Iso
n
io n
it e
it e
on
tio
sed
lo r
rite
lat
lat
lo r
d
p
lat
o la
an
io n
m
n 6
ch
res
Iso
Iso
ch
tio N
rcu
o
t Is
Pu
em
l
po
lat
ch
po
mp
ing
nk
eci
en
r to
Hy
nD
po
Iso
Hy
l
Operating Mode
id
tia
o la
Ta
cid
co
old
um
-R
Ac
Hy
ain
de
ium
tio
en
cid
m
k Is
ne
cA
tor
H
str
ge
ric
ea
diu
/Dr
m
era
qu
ic A
bra
od
ge
jec
i
an
r
- In
d
diu
Cit
-H
C it
Se
So
io n
eA
S
lud
ix T
em
-E
r
l
C it
dS
So
N-
N-
y
TE
TE
-
N-
N-
la t
ran
ela
-S
IR
UM
-M
oM
ate
EA
EA
N-
N-
EA
EA
s
EA
EA
cu
A
ces
pD
AIN
mb
RM
RM
CU
CL
CL
M.
St
ED
EA
EA
c ir
tiv
CL
CL
p
Pro
Ste
Ste
Me
ME
DR
RA
VA
Re
CL
CL
Ac
PE
PE
FE
M.
M.
R.
R.
For 20-E-801-
20-FV-210-x
20-FV-211-x
20-FV-110-x
20-FV-320-x
23-FV-131-x
23-FV-331-x
20-FV-501-x
20-FV-802-x
20-B-201-x
16-P-801-x
20-P-301-x
20-FV-301
16-FV-820
16-FV-821
23-FV-301
23-FV-101
23-FV-302
23-FV-102
x
DRAIN for Thickener 99 99 Only train 4 can function as a thickener.

Valve Alignment Step 1 X X X X X X O X O X X X X X X X X 6 1 Waits for step delay, and then proceeds to the next step.
Drain Membrane Tank Step 2 X X ON7 X X X O X O X X X X X O X ON7 2 When 20-LS-201S-4 is active, then proceeds to the next step.
Valve Alignment Step 3 X X X X X X O X O X X X X X X X X 6 3 Waits for step delay, and then proceeds to the next step.
When 20-LS-201Q-4 is active, then open the gate for 20-KQS-110C seconds gate stop opening the gate for 20-KQS-110D seconds. Repeat opening the gate with the frequency and duration timers.
Refill Membrane Tank Step 4 X O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 4 When 20-LS-201Q-4 is not active, then open the gate.
When 20-LS-201C-4 is active, proceeds to the next step.
Valve Alignment Step 5 C X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 6 5 Waits for step delay, and then proceeds to the next step.
Aeration Step 6 C X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O X 20-KQS-201N 6 Waits for step delay, default time 15 to 30 minutes and then proceeds to the next step.
Valve Alignment Step 7 C X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O X 6 7 Proceeds to OFF - step 1. The thickener is enabled as a train. The thickener flag is cleared.
BACKPULSE for Thickener 20 20 Only one train/thickener can be in BACKPULSE at a time.
Permeating Stops Step 1 C O O LS X X X X X X X X X O X LS X 6 1 Waits for step delay, and then proceeds to the next step.
Step 2 C O O X X X X X X X X X X O X O X 6 2 Waits for step delay, and then proceeds to the next step.
Backpulses the membrane train.
B.P. Starts Step 3 C O O X X X X X X X X X X X X O ON9 20-KQS-301B 3
Holds this step for step delay then proceeds to the next step .
Step 4 C O O X X X X X X X X X X X X O X 6 4 Waits for step delay, for flow to stop, then proceeds to the next step.
If the Drain the Thickener Trigger is not active, proceeds to PRODUCTION - step 1 for thickener.
If the Drain the Thickener Trigger is active, the thickener proceeds to STANDBY - step 1 for thickener.
B.P. Stops Step 5 C O O X X X X X X X X X X X X O X 5
If the BACKPULSE was initiated from OFF, proceeds to OFF - step 1.
If the BACKPULSE was initiated from STANDBY, proceeds to STANDBY - step 1.
Only one train/thickener can be in BACKPULSE at a time.
BACKPULSE for Train 20 20
Only one train can be in BACKPULSE or RELAX at a time.
Permeating Stops Step 1 C O O LS X X O O X X X X X O LS LS X 6 1 Waits for step delay, and then proceeds to the next step.
Step 2 C O O X X X O O X X X X X O O O X 6 2 Waits for step delay, and then proceeds to the next step.
B.P. Starts Step 3 C O O X X X O O X X X X X X O O ON9 20-KQS-301B 3
Holds this step for step delay then proceeds to the next step .
Step 4 C O O X X X O O X X X X X X O O X 6 4 Waits for step delay, for flow to stop, then proceeds to the next step.
If there is a demand for the train to run, proceeds to PRODUCTION - step 1.
If there is no demand for the train to run, proceeds to STANDBY - step 1.
B.P. Stops Step 5 C O O X X X O O X X X X X X O O X 5
If the BACKPULSE was initiated from OFF, proceeds to OFF - step 1.
If the BACKPULSE was initiated from STANDBY, proceeds to STANDBY - step 1.
RELAX 25 25 Only one train can be in RELAX and BACKPULSE at a time.
Permeating Stops Step 1 C O X O X X O O X X X X X O O O X 12 1 Waits for step delay then proceeds to the next step.
Step 2 C O X X X X O O X X X X X X O O X 20-KQS-301B 2 Holds this step for step delay then proceeds to the next step .
If there is a demand for the train to run, proceeds to PRODUCTION - step 1.
Relax Stops Step 3 C O X X X X O O X X X X X X O O X 3
If there is no demand for the train to run, proceeds to STANDBY - step 1.
Only one train can be in MAINTENANCE CLEAN, RECOVERY CLEAN, NEUTRALIZATION at a time.
MAINTENANCE CLEAN 53 53
Note Train 4 can only perform a maintenance clean when it is enabled as a train.
Permeating Stops Step 1 C OX X X X X LS X X X X X X O X LS X 12 1 Waits 12 seconds, for valve alignment, then proceeds to the next step.
Aerates the membrane train.
Tank Aeration Step 2 C OX X X X X X X X X X X X X X O X 20-KQS-201A 2
Holds this step for step delay, then proceeds to the next step.
Waits for step delay, for valve alignment, then proceeds to the next step.
Initial B.P. Step 3 C OX O X ON8 ON8 X X X X X X X X X X X 6 3
Only the selected chemical valve opens.
B.P. Train Step 4 X OX O X ON8 ON8 X X X ON8 ON8 X X X X X O 20-KQS-301D 4 Holds this step for step delay then proceeds to the next step.
Only the selected chemical pump/valve run/open.
Holds this step for step delay then proceeds to the next step.
Train Soak Step 5 X OX O X ON8 ON8 X X X X X X X X X X X 20-KQS-301E 5
Only the selected chemical valve opens.
Repeated B.P. Step 6 X OX O X ON8 ON8 X X X X X X X X X X X 6 6 Waits for step delay, for valve alignment, then proceeds to the next step.
B.P. Train Step 7 X OX O X ON8 ON8 X X X ON8 ON8 X X X X X O 20-KQS-301C 7
Holds for step delay then proceeds to the next step.
Holds this step for step delay then:
Train Soak Step 8 X OX O X ON8 ON8 X X X X X X X X X X X 20-KQS-301E 8 Repeats MAINTENANCE CLEAN - steps 6 to 8 for 20-KQS-301F iterations.
After the last iteration proceeds to the next step.
Water B.P. Step 9 X OX O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 6 9 Waits for step delay, for valve alignment, then proceeds to the next step.
B.P. Train Step 10 C OX O X X X X X X X X X X X X X O 20-KQS-301D 10
Mem. Tk. Aeration Step 11 C OX O X X X X X X X X X X X X O X 20-KQS-201A 11
Holds this step for step delay, typically 300 seconds, then proceeds to the next step.
M. Clean Complete Step 12 C OX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 6 12 Waits for step delay, for valve alignment, then proceeds to STANDBY - step 1.
NEUTRALIZATION 71 71
Note Train 4 can only perform Neutralization when it is enabled as a train.
When 20-LS-201Q-x is active, then open the gate for 20-KQS-110C seconds gate stop opening the gate for 20-KQS-110D seconds. Repeat opening the gate with the frequency and duration timers.
Tk. Fill Step 1 X O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 1
When 20-LS-201Q-x is not active, then open the gate until 20-LS-201C-x is active then proceeds to next step.
Step 2 C OX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 6 2 Waits for step delay, for valve alignment, then proceeds to the next step.
Page 2 of 4
Legend
io n
ain
lat
i o n N6
/Dr
air
Iso
n
io n
it e
it e
on
tio
sed
lo r
rite
lat
lat
lo r
d
p
lat
o la
an
io n
m
n 6
ch
res
Iso
Iso
ch
tio N
rcu
o
t Is
Pu
em
l
po
lat
ch
po
mp
ing
nk
eci
en
r to
Hy
nD
po
Iso
Hy
l
Operating Mode
id
tia
o la
Ta
cid
co
old
um
-R
Ac
Hy
ain
de
ium
tio
en
cid
m
k Is
ne
cA
tor
H
str
ge
ric
ea
diu
/Dr
m
era
qu
ic A
bra
od
ge
jec
i
an
r
- In
d
diu
Cit
-H
C it
Se
So
io n
eA
S
lud
ix T
em
-E
r
l
C it
dS
So
N-
N-
y
TE
TE
-
N-
N-
la t
ran
ela
-S
IR
UM
-M
oM
ate
EA
EA
N-
N-
EA
EA
s
EA
EA
cu
A
ces
pD
AIN
mb
RM
RM
CU
CL
CL
M.
St
ED
EA
EA
c ir
tiv
CL
CL
p
Pro
Ste
Ste
Me
ME
DR
RA
VA
Re
CL
CL
Ac
PE
PE
FE
M.
M.
R.
R.
For 20-E-801-
20-FV-210-x
20-FV-211-x
20-FV-110-x
20-FV-320-x
23-FV-131-x
23-FV-331-x
20-FV-501-x
20-FV-802-x
20-B-201-x
16-P-801-x
20-P-301-x
20-FV-301
16-FV-820
16-FV-821
23-FV-301
23-FV-101
23-FV-302
23-FV-102
x

Tk. Aeration Step 3 C OX X X X X X X X X X X X X X O X 20-KQS-201J 3
Holds this step for step delay, typically 60 seconds, then proceeds to the next step.
Step 4 C OX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 6 4 Waits for step delay, for valve alignment, then proceeds to the next step.
Tk. Soak Step 5 X OX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 20-KQS-301U 5 Train soaks without aeration for step delay, typically 900 seconds, then either proceeds to the next step if clean was with sodium hypochlorite or proceed to step 7 if clean was with citric acid.
Prompts operator.
"Check the chlorine concentration in the membrane tank.
Operator prompt Step 6 X OX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 6 Solution is neutralized if chlorine concentration is below 10 mg/L."
Operator presses CONFIRM NEUTRALIZATION to proceed to next step, or presses RESUME NEUTRALIZATION to return to NEUTRALIZATION step 5.
Step 7 X OX O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 6 7 Waits for step delay, for valve alignment, then proceeds to the next step.
Flush Permeate Header Step 8 X OX O X X X X X X X X X X X X X O 20-KQS-301M 8
NEUTRALIZATION complete Step 9 X OX O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 6 9 Waits for step delay, for valve alignment, then proceeds to OFF - step 1.
RECOVERY CLEAN 82 82
Note Train 4 can only perform a recovery clean when it is enabled as a train.
Step 1 C X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 6 1 Waits for step delay, for valve alignment, then proceeds to the next step.
Tk. Aeration Step 2 C X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O X 20-KQS-201B 2
Step 3 C X X X X X O O X X X X X X X X X 6 3 Waits for step delay, for valve alignment, then proceeds to the next step.
Drains the membrane tank.
Tk. Drain Step 4 X X X X X X O O X X X X X X O X X 4
When 20-LS-201S-x is active then go to the next step.
Step 5 X X X X X X O O X X X X X X X X X 6 5 Waits for step delay, for valve alignment, then proceeds to the next step.
Manual Flush Step 6 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 20-KQS-301T 6 Holds this step for step delay (0 seconds adjustable from 0-1800 seconds) then proceeds to the next step.
RECOVERY CLEAN - steps 8 to 15 are executed for 20-KQS-301V iterations (1 Iteration, adjustable from 0 - 3).
After the last iteration proceeds to Step 16.
Tk Flush (Auto) Step 7 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 6 7
IF 20-KQS-301V is 0, proceeds to Step 16.
Waits for step delay, for valve alignment, then proceeds to the next step.
Step 8 X X O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 6 8 Waits for step delay, for valve alignment, then proceeds to the next step.
Repeat B.P with Permeate Step 9 X X O X X X X X X X X X X X X X O 20-KQS-301M 9 Holds this step for step delay or until 20-LAL-303 is active then proceeds to the next step.
When in this step and the membrane tank level is at or above 20-LS-601B 20-LS-201E-x (Cleaning level trigger) setpoint then proceeds to RECOVERY CLEAN step 11.
Holds this step for step delay and/or 20-LSL-302 is not active then:
Train Soak (Pause Tank Fill) Step 10 X X O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 20-KQS-301N 10
Repeats RECOVERY CLEAN - steps 8 to 10.
Step 11 C X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 6 11 Waits for step delay, for valve alignment, then proceeds to the next step.
Tk. Aeration Step 12 C X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O X 20-KQS-201B 12
Step 13 C X X X X X O O X X X X X X X X X 6 13 Waits for step delay, for valve alignment, then proceeds to the next step.
Drains the membrane tank.
Tk. Drain Step 14 X X X X X X O O X X X X X X O X X 14
When 20-LS-201S-x is active then go to the next step.
Step 15 X X X X X X O O X X X X X X X X X 6 15 Waits for step delay, for valve alignment, then proceeds to the next step or step 8.
Step 16 X X O X ON8 ON8 X X X X X X X X X X X 6 16 Waits for step delay, for valve alignment, then proceeds to the next step.
Repeat B.P. with Chemical Step 17 X X O X ON8 ON8 X X X X X ON8 ON8 X X X O 20-KQS-301M 17 Holds this step for step delay or until 20-LAL-303 is active then proceeds to the next step.
When in this step and the membrane tank level is at or above (90% x 20-LS-201E-x setpoint) then proceeds to RECOVERY CLEAN step 19.
Train Soak Step 18 X X O X ON8 ON8 X X X X X X X X X X X 20-KQS-301N 18
Tk Fill with Permeate Step 19 X X O X X X X X X X X X X X X X O 20-KQS-301M 19 Holds this step for step delay or until 20-LAL-303 is active then proceeds to the next step.
When in this step and the membrane tank level is at or above (20-LS-201E-x setpoint) then proceeds to step 21.
Step 20 X X O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 20-KQS-301N 20
Step 21 X X O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 6 21 Waits for step delay, for valve alignment, then proceeds to the next step.
Aerates the membrane tank, if enabled, for 20-KQS-301Q seconds every 20-KQS-301R seconds in this step.
Mem. Tk. Chemical Soak Step 22 CN2 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X ON2 X 20-KQS-301P 22
RECOVERY CLEAN COMPLETE Step 23 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 23 Prompts operator to press button and "Proceed to NEUTRALIZATION". When button is pressed, proceeds to NEUTRALIZATION step 1.
DEVICE SPECIFIC NOTES:
(Intermittent aeration in Standby) Aeration valves open every 20-KQS-201D seconds. The blower starts 6 seconds (if necessary) after the first train to be aerated valve is requested open and the train is aerated for 20-KQS-201C seconds. If more than one train is being aerated the next train's valve opens and after six second the previous train's valve closes. When the last train is aerated, the aeration
N1
valves close 6 seconds after the blower stops (if necessary).
N2 (Intermittent aeration in Recovery Clean) Aeration valves open every 20-KQS-301R seconds. The blower starts 6 seconds (if necessary) after the valve is requested open and the train is aerated for 20-KQS-301Q. Aeration valves close 6 seconds after blower stops (if necessary).
(Intermittent Recirculation in Standby) When duration timer for standby aeration is active and the value of the iterations counter 16-KQS-801 equals the value of its setpoint the recirculation/drain pumps for the trains in Standby run. When the standby duration timer 20-KQS-201C times out for the LAST train in the standby aeration cycle and the value of the counter equals the setpoint value then the
N3
recirculation/drain pumps stop.
N4 (intermittent priming in Standby step 3 and Production step 2) Master Ejector Cycle Timer operates train ejectors to maintain prime on all trains that are in STANDBY step 3 and PRODUCTION step 2.
N5 When none of the trains are in the production cycle, then for the train with the highest Starting priority the recirculation/drain valve open and after 6 seconds the recirculation/drain pump runs. There should not be a time without at least one recirculation/drain pump running unless all the trains are in OFF.
N6 These valves are located only on the recirculation line for train 4. They only open and close according to train 4 OSC.
N7 Every 20-KQS-301H second and when 20-LSL-302 is not active then the valve opens and after six seconds the process pump backpulses the membranes for 20-KQS-301B. The process pump stops and then after six seconds the valve closes.
N8 Depending on the chemical requested for the clean. The sodium hypochlorite and citric acid cannot be selected for the same clean.
N9 If 20-LAL-303 is active, the process pump does not run.
GENERAL NOTES:
1 For operator protection, sodium hypochlorite pumps are interlocked at the PLC with the citric acid pumps to prevent them from running at the same time Mixing sodium hypochlorite and citric acid generates chlorine gas. Chlorine gas is toxic at levels greater than 1 ppm. Refer to CLSC for further information.
2 Devices will follow the start-up sequence in the CLSC when powering up from the E2PROM.
Page 3 of 4
Legend
io n
ain
lat
i o n N6
/Dr
air
Iso
n
io n
it e
it e
on
tio
sed
lo r
rite
lat
lat
lo r
d
p
lat
o la
an
io n
m
n 6
ch
res
Iso
Iso
ch
tio N
rcu
o
t Is
Pu
em
l
po
lat
ch
po
mp
ing
nk
eci
en
r to
Hy
nD
po
Iso
Hy
l
Operating Mode
id
tia
o la
Ta
cid
co
old
um
-R
Ac
Hy
ain
de
ium
tio
en
cid
m
k Is
ne
cA
tor
H
str
ge
ric
ea
diu
/Dr
m
era
qu
ic A
bra
od
ge
jec
i
an
r
- In
d
diu
Cit
-H
C it
Se
So
io n
eA
S
lud
ix T
em
-E
r
l
C it
dS
So
N-
N-
y
TE
TE
-
N-
N-
la t
ran
ela
-S
IR
UM
-M
oM
ate
EA
EA
N-
N-
EA
EA
s
EA
EA
cu
A
ces
pD
AIN
mb
RM
RM
CU
CL
CL
M.
St
ED
EA
EA
c ir
tiv
CL
CL
p
Pro
Ste
Ste
Me
ME
DR
RA
VA
Re
CL
CL
Ac
PE
PE
FE
M.
M.
R.
R.
For 20-E-801-
20-FV-210-x
20-FV-211-x
20-FV-110-x
20-FV-320-x
23-FV-131-x
23-FV-331-x
20-FV-501-x
20-FV-802-x
20-B-201-x
16-P-801-x
20-P-301-x
20-FV-301
16-FV-820
16-FV-821
23-FV-301
23-FV-101
23-FV-302
23-FV-102
x
3 B.P. is short for BACKPULSE in the step descriptions.
Page 4 of 4
Controls Logic Summary Chart
Notification
ZenoTrac®
Shutdown
Range Range
Callout
SORTING GE W&PT Type Description Component Equipment Setpoint Units Set Action or Derivation Reset
Min Max
1 Plant Information and Control Panel Devices

A. Info ZeeWeed® Trains Plant All There are 4 similar, ZeeWeed® trains. Tags with a suffix of "-x" represent 4
tags, one for each train. The "-x" represents a -1, through to -4 for each of
1
the trains. Only the fourth train can function as a thickener.
A. Info Controls Documents Plant All The OSC, CLSC and Control Narrative with the P&ID's should be reviewed
1 in their entirety to assist in the understanding of plant operations.
A. Info Returning a Train to Run Plant All Any action, i.e. an alarm, which causes a train to shutdown will require the
1
operator to put the train back to ON from SHUTDOWN.
A. Info Returning a Device to Auto Plant All Any device which is placed into manual, i.e. due to an alarm, will need to be
1
placed back into Auto by the operator.
A. Info Setpoints Plant All All setpoints to be verified in the field. Changes may be required for field
1
conditions & requirements.
A. Info Device Display Colors, Line Display Plant All The following color scheme is used for device status:
Colors & Status (HMI & SCADA)
Green - indicates a pump/blower is on and a valve is open.
Red - indicates a pump/blower is faulted and a valve is failed.
Grey - indicates a pump/blower is off or valve is closed.
1
A device placed in MCC control will have MCC displayed over or beside the
device.
A device placed in MANUAL control will have MAN displayed over or

beside the device.
A. Info Displays/Alarms, Setpoints & Selections Plant All All active alarms are displayed on the screen. Alarms are tracked on the
(HMI & SCADA) alarm summary screen.
1
All setpoints and selections, for example "Auto/Start/Stop", are displayed on
the screen.
A. Info Display Instrumentation Values (HMI & Plant All The following items are to be displayed:
SCADA)
1) All analog instrumentation signals wired directly to the GE W&PT PLC.
1 (e.g., Flow, Pressure, Turbidity)
2) All analog instrumentation signals communicated to the GE W&PT PLC
by another PLC. (e.g., Flow, Pressure, Turbidity)
3) Transmembrane Pressure (TMP)
A. Info Trending Analog Values Plant All On plants which incorporate a SCADA system the items below are to be
trended.
1) All analog instrumentation signals wired directly to the GE W&PT PLC.

(e.g., Flow, Pressure, Turbidity)
1
2) All analog instrumentation signals communicated to the GE W&PT PLC
by another PLC. (e.g., Flow, Pressure, Turbidity)
3) Transmembrane Pressure (TMP)
Update time is 5 sec. for all items. Minimum storage time is 2 months.
A. Info Trending PID Loops Plant All All PID loop parameters are trended.
1
HMI screen graphically displays Setpoint (SP), Process Variable (PV), and
Control Variable (CV).
A. Info PLC Address(es) Ethernet Control I/P Address:
1 Sub Net Mask:
Gateway (LAN Modem assigned address):
A. Info HMI Address(es) Ethernet Control I/P Address:
1
Sub Net Mask:
A. Info Date & Time Synchronization (HMI & Plant All Every day when the time is 2:22 am, The PLC date and time are synchronized to the HMI/SCADA Date & Time .
SCADA) OR
1 When the operator presses the "Synchronize PLC Date & Time shown on the HMI/SCADA screens are the PLC date and
Clock Now" button. time.
PLC_TIME.SYNC_ALM Alarm Clock Synchronization Failed Settings All IN ALL MODES: IN ALL MODES: Y
1 When there is a clock synchronization request for When synchronization occurs.
10 seconds.
A. Info Heartbeat Settings Control A "heartbeat" is required between the GE W&PT PLC and the client's PLC
to ensure there is communication.
Each PLC will maintains a independent "heartbeat", which increments every

1
second.
The PLC's will look at the other PLC's "heartbeat" to see if it is changing.
Page 1 of 23
Issued: Nov. 16, 2009
Process Controls: D. Courtney The enclosed materials are considered proprietary property of GE Water & Process Technologies. 200326_Victorville_CLSC_R02_25May10_MdK.xls
Range
SORTING GE W&PT Type Description Component Equipment
Min
GLB_CTRL.UA_0030_ALM Alarm All Devices Not In Auto Settings Control IN ALL MODES: IN ALL MODES: IN ALL MODES: Y
1 When there is at least one device, wired to the GE - all steps, displays on HMI screen "All Devices Not In Auto." When all devices are in Auto.
PLC, that is not in Auto.
HEARTBEAT_LOST Alarm Loss of Heartbeat Settings Control IN ALL MODES: IN ALL MODES: IN ALL MODES: Y Y Y
(GLB_CMN.COMM_FAILED When the "heartbeat" in the clients PLC is not - all steps, displays on alarm banner "Communication with other PLC has When the "heartbeat" in the client's PLC is
1 ) incremented in 5 seconds. been lost." incremented.
- all trains and thickener proceed to SHUTDOWN - step 1.
IONET_SLAVE_FAIL_ALM Alarm "IO Network" Slave Communication Settings Control IN ALL MODES: IN ALL MODES: IN ALL MODES: Y Y
Module Failure. When the communication module status register - all steps, if communication module failure is on a train IO rack, the When the communication module
IO Network may refer to ControlNet, indicates a communication failure for 5 train/thickener proceeds to POWER OFF- step 1. communication failure condition is no
Ethernet, etc. or a combination thereof. seconds. - all steps, if communication module failure is on a common equipment IO longer present.
Alarm shall be generated for each slave rack , disables common equipment wired to that rack. ZeeWeed® trains that were in STANDBY,
module. PRODUCTION, or BACKPULSE/RELAX, prior
to POWER OFF, proceed to STANDBY for train -
step 1.
Thickener that was in STANDBY,
PRODUCTION, or BACKPULSE, prior to
POWER OFF, proceed to STANDBY for
thickener - step 1
ZeeWeed® trains that were in MAINTENANCE
CLEAN, prior to POWER OFF, proceed to
SHUTDOWN STBY- step 1. Displays on alarm
1 banner "Maintenance Clean Aborted."
ZeeWeed® trains that were in RECOVERY
SHUTDOWN - step 1 . Displays on alarm
banner "Recovery Clean Aborted."
ZeeWeed® trains that were in
NEUTRALIZATION, prior to POWER OFF,
proceed to SHUTDOWN - step 1. Displays on
alarm banner "Neutralization Aborted."
Thickener that was in DRAIN prior to POWER
OFF, proceed to SHUTDOWN - step 1.
Displays on alarm banner "Drain Aborted."
CP_SURGE_SUPPRESSO Alarm Control Panel 'Y' Surge Suppressor Surge Control IN ALL MODES: When the control panel surge suppressor Y
1 R-y Needs Replacing Suppressor - all steps, when the control panel surge contact no longer indicates a failure
suppressor contact indicates a failure
PLC_LOW_BAT Alarm PLC 'Y' Battery Low Control Control IN ALL MODES: When the PLC battery is normal. Y
1
- all steps, when the PLC Battery is low
1 LOG_OFF Button Log Off Security Control When the button is pressed. Returns Security Level to Viewer.
GENERAL_CALLOUT Alarm General Callout Interface Control IN ALL MODES: When the conditions requiring the callout are Y
1 - all steps, when any condition requiring a callout cleared.
is activated.
1 CLEAR_NOTIFICATION Button Clear Notification Interface Control When the button is pressed. Clears the notification signal.
ALRM_NOTIFICATION Digital Out Alarm Notification Interface Control When an alarm is initiated. Provides signal for device to notify the operator an alarm has occurred. When the Clear Alarm Notification or 10 minutes
Conditions requiring notification are identified by the "NOTIFICATION" have passed since the signal was activated.
1 column on the right side of the CLSC.
Device may be a horn, light or other means of notification.

A. Info ADMIN Password Access Security Control When the proper Username and Password are Starts 4 hour timer. When ADMIN logs out or after timer times out.
entered. Provides the following:
• Access to view all screens.
User name: ADMIN • Access to view and make adjustments of Setpoints.
Password: (available only to GE W&PT • Access to view and make adjustments of all train operational modes.
1 Personnel) • Access to view and selection of train ON/OFF buttons.
• Resetting of all Alarms.
• Manual & Auto view Operation of all Pumps and Valves.
• Access to view and make adjustments of all set points, including PID
tuning parameters.
• Manual control of PID's.
A. Info HMI Supervisor Password Access Security Control When the proper Username and Password are Starts 4 hour timer. When the Supervisor logs out or after timer
entered. Provides the following: times out.
User name: SUPER • Access to view and make adjustments of Setpoints.
Password: (available only to Supervisor) • Access to view and make adjustments of all train operational modes.
1 • Access to view and selection of train ON/OFF button views.
• Manual & Auto view Operation of all Pumps and Valves.
• Manual control of PID's.
• Access to view PID control setpoints & graphics, but can not adjust PID
tuning parameters.
Page 2 of 23
Notification
ZenoTrac®
Shutdown
Range Range
Callout
Min Max
A. Info HMI Operator Password Access Security Control When the proper Username and Password are Starts 4 hour timer. When the Operator logs out or after timer times
entered. Provides the following: out.
User name: OPER • Access only to view Setpoints.
Password: GE W&PT six digit AO number • Access to view and make adjustments of all train operational modes,
1
excluding manual.
• Access to view and selection of train ON/OFF button views.
• Auto view Operation of all Pumps and Valves, not Manual.
• Access only to view PID control setpoints & graphics.
A. Info HMI Default Password Access Security Control Access to major screens.
1 Silence horn and acknowledge alarms.
No access to alarm reset.
A. Info HMI Screen Blanking Security Control Automatically turns off screen after 30 minutes of continuous idle time. When the screen is touched in any location.
1
Configured in Control Panel - Displays Properties.
00-HA-005 Alarm System Stop button Mode Control ALWAYS: The trains and thickener are placed to POWER OFF When the System Stop button is no longer Y
- when System Stop Button is pressed. pressed
ZeeWeed® trains that were in STANDBY,
PRODUCTION, or BACKPULSE/RELAX, prior
to POWER OFF, proceed to STANDBY for train -
step 1.
Thickener that was in STANDBY,
PRODUCTION, or BACKPULSE, prior to
POWER OFF, proceed to STANDBY for
thickener - step 1
ZeeWeed® trains that were in MAINTENANCE
SHUTDOWN stby - step 1. Displays on alarm
banner "Maintenance Clean Aborted."
ZeeWeed® trains that were in RECOVERY
SHUTDOWN - step 1 . Displays on alarm
banner "Recovery Clean Aborted."
ZeeWeed® trains that were in
NEUTRALIZATION, prior to POWER OFF,
proceed to SHUTDOWN - step 1. Displays on
alarm banner "Neutralization Aborted."
Thickener that was in DRAIN prior to POWER
OFF, proceed to SHUTDOWN - step 1.
Displays on alarm banner "Drain Aborted."
A. Info Winter Mode Mode Control Winter mode operation for plants that can freeze are programmed to force a
train which is in standby more than 30 minutes (typically) to go to service
(this train will stay in service for at least 200 sec (typically)) other service
trains will be pushed (by logic) into Standby because of high production
time.
1 There are selector switches on the HMI to enable/disable Winter Mode.
During this switching time the request for the number of running blowers is
the same as before.
When train 4 is operating as a thickener, it is not part of the winter mode
rotation.
Button Winter Mode Enabled Mode Control When the Button is Pressed Enable Winter Mode: Trains will Proceed to Production according to the
Starting Priority, Start Triggers and 20-KQS-201K-x
1
Disable Train Rotation
Button Winter Mode Disabled Mode Control When the Button is Pressed Disable Winter mode: Trains Proceed to Production according to Starting
Priority and Start Trigger only
1
Enable train rotation.
20-US-201-x Trigger Winter Mode - Force Train to Sequence ZeeWeed® IN STANDBY for train: IN STANDBY for train: IN PRODUCTION for train:
PRODUCTION from STANDBY Trigger - all steps, when Winter Mode is Enabled - the train proceeds to PRODUCTION as per the OSC. - after timer for 20-KQS-201L-x is started.
AND
20-KQS-201K-x is active,
1 AND
the Train has the highest Starting Priority
AND
20-KQS-201L has timed out for any train in
PRODUCTION.
Page 3 of 23
Notification
ZenoTrac®
Shutdown
Range Range
Callout
Min Max
20-KQS-201K-x Setpoint Winter Mode STANDBY duration Sequence ZeeWeed® 600 3600 1800 sec. IN STANDBY & WINTER MODE IS ENABLED: Trigger is used in the SET conditions for 20-US-201-x.
- all steps, the train is in STANDBY for the
1 setpoint duration or longer.
20-KQS-201L-x Setpoint Winter Mode Train Minimum time in Sequence ZeeWeed® 100 500 200 sec. IN PRODUCTION: IN PRODUCTION: When not in PRODUCTION, BACKPULSE,
PRODUCTION - step 1, when 20-US-201-x is active. - step 1, starts timer. RELAX, timer resets.
OR
1 IN PRODUCTION & TRAIN HAS HIGHEST Trains proceed to PRODUCTION from STANDBY when 20-US-201-x is
PRIORITY FOR STANDBY: active for the train, or a train start trigger, 20-FSYH-601A/B/C is active.
- when the "Enable Winter Mode" button is
pressed.
TR_ROT_TIME Setpoint Train Rotation Time Trains Control 1 72 4 hr. WHEN WINTER MODE IS DISABLED When timer times out, at the setpoint; When timer times out and there is at least one
IN PRODUCTION: train in STANDBY, timer resets and resumes
- as soon as there is at least one train in System triggers a Standby request, if there is a train in STANDBY step 3 timing,
PRODUCTION, timer starts. with no Standby alarms and is available to start. OR
- the thickener is not included in train rotation. when the train with the highest priority to stop is
1 If there are no trains in STANDBY step 3 available to start, when timer not in the Production cycle, timer resets and
times out, Standby request is ignored and maintained. resumes timing,
The number of operating blowers does not change during while one train OR
goes to Standby and another train goes to Production. when there are no trains in PRODUCTION,
BACKPULSE, or RELAX, timer resets and
stops.
5 Feed System
16-FI-401 Comm Plant Feed Flow Flow Feed 0 5000 gpm Displays value with engineering units on screen.
5
Actual instrument is 16-FE/FIT-401.
16-FXI-401 Derived Moving Average Plant Feed Flow Flow Feed 0 5000 gpm The moving average is for 15 minutes and the sample time is once every 1
minute.
5
These times can be adjusted if required. Unless process provides the
information use the default values.
16-FQI2-401 Derived Today's Plant Feed Volume Volume Feed 0 1000000000 gal Totalize feed flow. At midnight after current value is put into 16-
5 FQI3-401.
At midnight this value is stored at 16-FQI3-401.
5 16-FQI3-401 Derived Yesterday's Plant Feed Volume Volume Feed 0 1000000000 gal At midnight. Set valve to 16-FQI2-401 at midnight. Y
15 ZeeWeed Process Information
A. Info Display of Operational Mode and step Mode Control The current operating mode and the step number is displayed on the
number. screen.
15
Time remaining for some steps is displayed.
A. Info Mode Selection through ON Mode Control IN OFF & SHUTDOWN: Y
- as required in OSC steps of each mode, if the ON button is pressed the
15 train proceeds to PRIME - step 1 and then to STANDBY for a train - step 1
will cycle through modes automatically as required provided all necessary
equipment is in auto and available.
Interlock Number of trains permitted in a given Mode Control Consult the OSC for details.
15
mode
20-HMS-201A-x Button ON Button for Train Mode Control When the button is pressed. For train 4, the train IN OFF & SHUTDOWN: Y
must be enabled for a train for this button to be - steps as per OSC, proceeds to PRIME - step 1 and then to STANDBY for
available. a Train.
15
Consult interlocks in CLSC and OSC for more information.
20-HMS-201B-x Button OFF Button for Train and Thickener Mode Control When the button is pressed. IN ALL MODES :
- steps as per OSC, proceeds to OFF - step 1.

15
NOTE:
User is responsible for the use of this button to ensure that a cleaning
solution will be handled as required before proceeding to production.
20-HMS-201C-x Button PRIME Button for Train and Thickener Mode Control When the button is pressed. IN OFF & STANDBY:
- steps as per OSC, proceeds to PRIME - step 1.
15
20-HMS-201D-x Button BACKPULSE Button for Train Mode Control When the button is pressed. IN OFF, STANDBY for train & PRODUCTION:
- steps as per OSC, proceeds to BACKPULSE for train - step 1.
15
20-HMS-201E-x Button RELAX Button for Train Mode Control When the button is pressed. IN STANDBY for train & PRODUCTION:
- steps as per OSC, proceeds to RELAX - step 1.
15
Page 4 of 23
Notification
ZenoTrac®
Shutdown
Range Range
Callout
Min Max
20-HMS-201F-x Button M. CLEAN Hypochlorite Button for Train Mode Control When the button is pressed. IN OFF, STANDBY & PRODUCTION:
Train 4 must be enabled as a train. - steps as per OSC, proceeds to MAINTENANCE CLEAN - step 1.
15
20-HMS-201G-x Button M. CLEAN Citric Acid Button for Train Mode Control When the button is pressed. IN OFF, STANDBY & PRODUCTION:
Train 4 must be enabled as a train. - steps as per OSC, proceeds to MAINTENANCE CLEAN - step 1.
15
20-HMS-201I-x Button R. CLEAN WITH CITRIC ACID Button for Mode Control When the button is pressed. IN OFF:
Train Train 4 must be enabled as a train. - steps as per OSC, proceeds to RECOVERY CLEAN - step 1.
15
Initiates a recovery clean with citric acid.
20-HMS-201J-x Button R. CLEAN WITH SODIUM Mode Control When the button is pressed. IN OFF:
HYPOCHLORITE Button for Train Train 4 must be enabled as a train. - steps as per OSC, proceeds to RECOVERY CLEAN - step 1.
15
Initiates a recovery clean with sodium hypochlorite.
20-HMS-201K-x Button NEUTRALIZATION Button for Train Mode Control When the button is pressed. IN OFF & RECOVERY CLEAN:
- steps as per OSC, proceeds to NEUTRALIZATION - step 1.
15
A. Info Standby Priority Demand ZeeWeed® A train that has been in PRODUCTION the longest time has the highest
priority to proceed to STANDBY from PRODUCTION.
15
A train in demand override, has the lowest priority to proceed to STANDBY.
A. Info Starting Priority Demand ZeeWeed® A train that has been in STANDBY the longest time has the highest priority
15
to proceed to PRODUCTION from STANDBY.
NUM_TR_PROD Derived Number of Trains Cycling through Trains ZeeWeed® This is the number of trains in PRODUCTION for train, BACKPULSE for
15
Production train, RELAX, PRIME.
NUM_TR_PROD_SUP Derived Number of Trains Cycling through Trains ZeeWeed® This is the number of trains in PRODUCTION for train, BACKPULSE for
15 Production with supervisory Flow Setpoint train, RELAX or PRIME, with a supervisory flow setpoint.
20-KQS-801 Setpoint Priming Duration Sequence ZeeWeed® 30 300 60 sec. IN PRIME: IN PRIME: When the timer times out.
15 - step 1. - starts timer, action when the timer times out proceeds as per the OSC.
20-KQY-301 Setpoint Production Cycle Timer - total time to Sequence ZeeWeed® 8 15 12 min. When a train/thickener enters the production cycle Value entered at the HMI, in minutes. When the full production duration has expired.
complete one Production sequence plus for the first time and no other train/thickener is in
one Backpulse sequence. the production cycle. Time remaining in the production cycle for each train/thickener, 20-KI-301-x,
is displayed, in seconds.
15 The timer keeps running through all of the valve alignment steps and
through backpulse.
If all trains/thickener are in OFF or POWER OFF the time is retained.

When trains enter the production cycle the timer resumes.
15 Thickener Process Information

A. Info Thickener Mode Control Only train 4 can function as a thickener. The following buttons are only
available for train 4 when enabled as a thickener.
A. Info Display of Operational Mode and step Mode Control The current operating mode and the step number is displayed on the
number. screen.
15
Time remaining for some steps is displayed.
A. Info Mode Selection through ON Mode Control IN OFF & SHUTDOWN: Y
- as required in OSC steps of each mode, if the ON button is pressed the
15 thickener proceeds to PRIME - step 1 and then to STANDBY for thickener -
step 1 will cycle through modes automatically as required provided all
necessary equipment is in auto and available.
20-HMS-201A-x Button ON Button for Thickner Mode Control When the button is pressed. Train 4 must be IN OFF & SHUTDOWN: Y
enabled as a thickener for this button to be - steps as per OSC, proceeds to PRIME - step 1 and then to STANDBY for
available. thickener.
15
20-HMS-201D-x Button BACKPULSE Button Mode Control When the button is pressed. IN OFF, STANDBY for thickener & PRODUCTION for thickener:
- steps as per OSC, proceeds to BACKPULSE - step 1 for a thickener.
15
16-HMS-801B-4 Button DRAIN Button Mode Control When the button is pressed. IN OFF, STANDBY for thickener:
- steps as per OSC, proceeds to DRAIN - step 1.
15
20 Membrane Aeration System
Page 5 of 23
Notification
ZenoTrac®
Shutdown
Range Range
Callout
Min Max
20-KX-201 Derived Standby Aeration Order Sequence Membrane IN STANDBY:

Aeration - step 3, trains are aerated for 20-KQS-201C seconds one at a time,
immediately one after another until the last train in STANDBY is aerated.
Trains are aerated in order according to the train number.

20 For example, if trains 1, and 2 are in STANDBY, train 1 is aerated first,
followed by train 2.
The aeration order is repeated for the trains in STANDBY every 20-KQS-
201D seconds.
20-UA-201A Alarm Insufficient Number of Membrane Blowers Blower Membrane IN STANDBY for train & thickener, PRODUCTION Shutdown trains/thickener in the following order until there are sufficient When there are sufficient blowers Y Y Y
Available Aeration for train & thickener, BACKPULSE for train & blowers
thickener, MAINTENANCE CLEAN, RECOVERY IN STANDBY for trains & thickener & DRAIN:
CLEAN & NEUTRALIZATION & DRAIN: - close the cyclic aeration valves and do not run a blower for this aeration
- all steps, when the number of blowers required demand.
to run is not sufficient for the number of aeration -delay six seconds and if there is still insufficient number of blowers
demands. IN MAINTENANCE CLEAN, RECOVERY CLEAN & NEUTRALIZATION:
- all steps, continues steps without blower and close the cyclic aeration
valves.
20
-delay six seconds and if there is still insufficient number of blowers
IN PRODUCTION for trains & thickener, RELAX, & BACKPULSE for trains
& thickener:
- the train with the highest standby priority goes to SHUTDOWN step 1.
-delay six seconds and if there is still insufficient number of blowers, repeat
this process until the available blowers can meet the aeration demand or all
the trains/thickener are Shutdown.
20-UA-201B Alarm No Membrane Blowers Available Blower Membrane IN STANDBY for train & thickener, PRODUCTION IN STANDBY for trains & thickener, PRODUCTION for trains & thickener, When a blower is available. Y Y Y
Aeration for train & thickener, BACKPULSE for train & RELAX, BACKPULSE for trains & thickener:
thickener, MAINTENANCE CLEAN, RECOVERY - all steps, proceeds to SHUTDOWN - step 1.
20 CLEAN & NEUTRALIZATION & DRAIN: IN MAINTENANCE CLEAN, RECOVERY CLEAN & NEUTRALIZATION &
- all steps, when there are no blowers available. DRAIN:
- all steps, continues steps without blower and close the cyclic aeration
valves.
20-FV-210-x Valve Cyclic Valve, Mem. Tk. Valve Membrane AUTO: When the valve called to open then the PLC energizes discrete output to
20-FV-211-x Aeration - per OSC. open valve.
20
MANUAL:
- only available with HMI Security Level equal to
Supervisor.
20-ZAO-210-x Alarm Cyclic Valve, Mem. Tk. Failed to Open Valve Membrane IN ALL MODES: IN PRODUCTION for trains & thickener, BACKPULSE for trains & thickener When the ON button is pressed. Y Y Y
20-ZAO-211-x Aeration - all steps, when the open limit switch is not & RELAX
activated for 60 seconds when the valve is asked - all steps, proceeds to SHUTDOWN - step 1.
to open. (The 60 seconds time delay means the
20
PLC tried to open the valve six times.) IN MAINTENANCE CLEAN & RECOVERY CLEAN:
- all steps, continues Maintenance Clean or Recovery Clean without
aeration. Once steps are complete, proceeds to SHUTDOWN - step 1.
20-ZAC-210-x Alarm Cyclic Valve, Mem. Tk. Failed to Close Valve Membrane IN ALL MODES: IN PRODUCTION for trains & thickener & BACKPULSE for trains & When the close limit switch is activated. Y Y
20-ZAC-211-x Aeration - all steps, when the close limit switch is not thickener, RELAX:
activated for 60 seconds when the valve is asked - all steps, continues to cycle valve. Displays on alarm banner "Train has a
to close. (The 60 seconds time delay means the Cyclic Valve Failure, Inadequate Membrane Aeration may be Occurring".
PLC tried to close the valve six times.) Train does not proceed to Standby due to an active Plant Permeate
Demand Standby Trigger, (i.e., 20-FSYL-201 has no effect for this train).
Maintenance Cleans and Recovery Cleans are prevented.
IN MAINTENANCE CLEAN:
20
- all steps, proceeds to SHUTDOWN - step 1. Displays on alarm banner
"Maintenance Clean Aborted."
IN RECOVERY CLEAN:
- all steps, proceeds to SHUTDOWN - step 1. Displays on alarm banner
"Recovery Clean Aborted."
IN NEUTRALIZATION:
- continues steps.
20-KQS-210 Setpoint Mem. Tk. Cyclic Valve Cycle Time Valve Membrane 10 sec. Valves will alternate between open and close positions every 10 seconds.
20
Aeration One valve will be open and another will be closed.
Page 6 of 23
Notification
ZenoTrac®
Shutdown
Range Range
Callout
Min Max
A. Info Membrane Blowers Alternating Lead Blower Membrane IN ALL MODES: IN ALL MODES: When lead is switched.
Aeration - all steps, when the accumulated run time is - all steps, changes the lead of the blowers.
equal to or greater than 20-KQS-201F, the lead Lead is not switched if other blower is not available.
blower is not running,
20
OR
- all steps, when the lead blower is not available,
(Blower is available if in Auto at HMI and is in
Remote at the MCC).
20-KQS-201F Setpoint Membrane Blowers Lead Alternating Blower Membrane 12 72 24 hr. IN ALL MODES: This is the actual accumulated run time of the equipment. When lead is switched.
Time Aeration - all steps, when the blower is running.
20 This is not displayed.
One setpoint with multiple equipment run times.
20-KQS-201C Setpoint Train in Standby Aeration Duration Sequence Membrane 120 600 300 sec. IN STANDBY for train: IN STANDBY: When train is not in Standby - step 3.
20 Aeration - step 3. - step 3, aerates the membrane tank for 20-KQS-201C seconds every 20-
KQS-201D seconds. Starts step with no mixing.
20-KQS-201D Setpoint Train in Standby Aeration Frequency Sequence Membrane 1800 sec. IN STANDBY for train: IN STANDBY: When the timer times out.
20 Aeration - step 3. - step 3, aerates the membrane tank for 20-KQS-201C seconds every 20-
This setpoint is not adjustable. KQS-201D seconds. Starts step with no mixing.
A. Info Number of Blowers per Membrane Blower Membrane One aeration demand requires one blower to operate; two aeration
Aeration Demand Aeration demands require two blowers to operate; three or four aeration demands
20
require three blowers to operate. The number of aeration demands refers to
trains and thickener.
20-PAL-201-x Alarm Inlet Low Pressure for Membrane Blower Blower Membrane IN ALL MODES: IN PRODUCTION for trains & thickener, BACKPULSE for trains & When the switch is not active
Aeration - all steps, when the blower is running and the thickener, RELAX, MAINTENANCE CLEAN, RECOVERY CLEAN,
switch is active for 5 seconds NEUTRALIZATION & DRAIN:
- all steps, places blower into manual-stop.
20-PAH-201-x Alarm Outlet High Pressure for Membrane Blower Membrane IN ALL MODES: IN PRODUCTION for trains & thickener, BACKPULSE for trains & When the switch is not active
Blower Aeration - all steps, when the blower is running and the thickener, RELAX, MAINTENANCE CLEAN, RECOVERY CLEAN,
20-TAH-201-x Alarm Outlet High Temperature for Membrane Blower Membrane IN ALL MODES: IN PRODUCTION for trains & thickener, BACKPULSE for trains & When the switch is not active
Blower Aeration - all steps, when the blower is running and the thickener, RELAX, MAINTENANCE CLEAN, RECOVERY CLEAN,
20-FC-201 Derived Mem. Tk. Membrane Aeration Air Flow Flow Membrane 1487 1572 1500 SCFM Use 1500 when the temperature is approx. 18C Membrane Aeration Requirement Per Train = the value of the setpoint
Requirement Per Train Aeration Use 1487 when the temperature is approx. 35C
20
20-FC-201 equals the value of the setpoint. This is a plant setpoint.
20-MK-201-x Comm Membrane Aeration Required Air Flow Flow Membrane When there are zero aeration demand 20-MK-201-x =zero and no blowers
Per Blower Aeration operate
When there is one aeration demand 20-MK-201-x =20-FC-201. One blower
operates
When there are two aeration demands 20-MK-201-x =20-FC-201. Two
blowers operate
20 When there are three aeration demands 20-MK-201-x =20-FC-201. Three
blowers operate.
When there are four aeration demands 20-MK-201-x =(20-FC-201
multiplied by 4 and divided by 3). Three blowers operate. (The four refers to
the number of aeration demands. The three refers to the number of
operating blowers.)
Communicate this value to the client's PLC.
A. Info Membrane Blowers Blower Membrane The controls for the membrane blowers are through the Ethernet
Aeration
20-YA-201-x Alarm/com Membrane Aeration Blower Fail Blower Membrane IN ALL MODES: IN PRODUCTION for trains & thickener, BACKPULSE for trains & When the Blower Auto button is pressed. Y Y
m.. Aeration - all steps, when the blower is requested to run. thickener, RELAX, MAINTENANCE CLEAN, RECOVERY CLEAN,
20
When the MCC running confirmation is missing for NEUTRALIZATION & DRAIN:
5 seconds. - all steps, places blower into fault.
20-KQI-201-x Derived Membrane Aeration Blower Blower Membrane 0 30000 hours IN ALL MODES: IN ALL MODES: When the Reset Run Time button is pressed,
20
Accumulated Run Time Aeration When the blower is operating. Displays accumulated run time for the blower on the screen. run time resets to 0 hours.
20-B-201-x Comm Membrane Aeration Blower Run Blower Membrane MANUAL: When the blower is called to run, energizes the PLC discrete output to
Command Aeration - only available with SUPER password operate motor.
If VFD called to start, the flow command is set at the setpoint.
AUTO: Otherwise set to zero
20 - according to the OSC
DISABLED (in AUTO or MANUAL):
- when any of the following are true:
blower Fail 20-YA-201-x
System Stop Activated 00-HA-005
20-FAL-201-x Alarm Membrane Aeration Blower Air Flow Low Flow Membrane IN ALL MODES: IN ALL MODES: When the Blower Auto button is pressed. Y Y
Aeration - all steps, when a blower -1/2/3/4 has been - all steps, places blower into fault.
20 requested to run and its switch, 20-FAL-201-1, 20-
FAL-201-2, 20-FAL-201-3, 20-FAL-201-3, is
active for 10 seconds.
25 Membrane Tank
A. Info Design Basis Design is N+1, N is = 3.
Page 7 of 23
Notification
ZenoTrac®
Shutdown
Range Range
Callout
Min Max
20-LI-201A-x Analog In Mem. Tk Level Level ZeeWeed ® 0 160 in. Displays value with engineering units on screen. Y
25
Actual instrument is 20-LE/LIT-201A-x.
20-LXI-201 Derived Average Mem. Tk Level Level ZeeWeed
® 0 160 in. The average is calculated for all trains/thickener in Standby, Prime,
25
Production, Backpulse, Relax.
20-LAT-201A-x Alarm Mem. Tk Level Transmitter Out of Range Level ZeeWeed ® 0 160 in. IN ALL MODES: IN PRODUCTION for trains & thickener, BACKPULSE for trains & IN PRODUCTION for trains & thickener, Y Y Y
When the transmitter is out of range by 1% of the thickener, RELAX, MAINTENANCE CLEAN, RECOVERY CLEAN except BACKPULSE for trains & thickener, RELAX,
calibrated range for 2 seconds. steps 22 and 23, NEUTRALIZATION: MAINTENANCE CLEAN, RECOVERY CLEAN
(i.e. calibrated range = range max. - range min.) - all steps, proceeds to SHUTDOWN - step 1. except steps 22 and 23,
NEUTRALIZATION:When the ON or OFF
IN MAINTENANCE CLEAN: button is pressed.
- Displays on alarm banner "Maintenance Clean Aborted." IN DRAIN:
When the pumps are put back into auto and
IN RECOVERY CLEAN steps 1 to 21: Fault Timer clears then align valves as per OSC
- Displays on alarm banner "Recovery Clean Aborted." step after a six second delay resume step, as
IN RECOVERY CLEAN step 22 and 23: shown in the OSC.
25 - continue with sequence.
IN NEUTRALIZATION:
- Displays on alarm banner "Neutralization Aborted."
IN DRAIN:
- holds step
- all steps, places all operating pumps into man off and after a delay of six
seconds close the valves.
- 20-KQS-301W starts
Displays, "Thickener will be Shutdown due to active alarm" .
20-LAHH-201-x Alarm Mem. Tk Level High High Level ZeeWeed

® IN ALL MODES: When the level Alarm high is no longer active. Y Y
25 When the level Alarm high has been active for
more than 90 seconds.
20-LAH-201A-x Alarm Mem. Tk Level High Level ZeeWeed
® 0 160 140 in. IN ALL MODES: IN ALL MODES: When 20-LS-201A-x is active. Y
When the level is at or above this level for 8 - all steps, sets the plant flow demand equal to the peak flow for the plant.
seconds. The peak flow equals 3098 gpm
25 - all steps, alarm only.
IN RECOVERY CLEAN, NEUTRALIZATION, DRAIN:

- all steps, alarm only.
20-LS-201A-x Trigger Mem. Tk Level to Enable Membrane Tank Level ZeeWeed

® 0 160 108 in. IN ALL MODES: Resets 20-LAH-201A-x
25 Feed When the level is at or below this level for 8
seconds.
20-LS-201C-x Trigger Mem. Tk Level 3 for Fill and Aerate Level ZeeWeed
® 0 160 127 in. IN NEUTRALIZATION & DRAIN: IN NEUTRALIZATION & DRAIN:
- step 4, when the level is at or above the setpoint - proceeds to the next step.
for 8 seconds.
25
This level should be close to the operating level Target setpoint is a level about 24 inches above the 20-LS-201E-x setpoint
of the trains to prevent stealing the air from the but prevents the high level alarm from becoming active.
other trains.
20-LS-201E-x Trigger Mem. Tk Level Above Membranes Level ZeeWeed
® 0 160 103.2 in. IN ALL MODES: Resets 20-LAL-201A-x.
When the level is at or above this level for 8
seconds. The train will come out of standby and resume production if there is a
25
demand to produce water.
The thickener will come out of standby and resume production if the Drain
the Thickener Trigger is not active.
20-LAL-201A-x Alarm Mem. Tk Level Low Level ZeeWeed
® 0 160 102 in. IN ALL MODES except RECOVERY CLEAN & IN PRODUCTION: When 20-LS-201E-x is active. Y Y
DRAIN: - all steps, proceeds to STANDBY - step 1.
25
When the level is at or below this level for 8
seconds. This level is just above the membrane fibers in the cassette.
20-LALL-201A-x Alarm Mem. Tk Level Low Low Level ZeeWeed
® 20-LAL-201A in. IN ALL MODES: IN ALL MODES: When the level is above the setpoint. Y Y
When the level is at or below the setpoint for more - all steps, displays on alarm banner "Membrane Tank 'X' Possible
25
than 3600 seconds. Membrane Exposure."
20-LS-201Q-x Trigger Fill Membrane Tk with Inlet Gate Timers Level ZeeWeed
® 0 160 100 in. IN SHUTDOWN & NEUTRALIZATION & DRAIN: IN SHUTDOWN & NEUTRALIZATION & DRAIN: When the level is at or above this setpoint.
When the level is at or below this setpoint for 2 - use the frequency and duration timers to open the membrane tank
seconds in the steps as indicated in the OSC. isolation gate.
Consult the OSC, shutdown & neutralization & drain steps, for details.
20-LS-201S-x Trigger Mem. Tk Empty Tank Level ZeeWeed
® 0 160 10 in. IN RECOVERY CLEAN & DRAIN: IN RECOVERY CLEAN & DRAIN: When the level is at or above this setpoint for 5
25 When the level is at or below this setpoint for 2 - steps as indicated in the OSC, proceeds to next step. seconds
seconds in the steps as indicated in the OSC.
20-LCH-201A Setpoint Mem. Tk Level Setpoint High Level ZeeWeed
® 0 160 150 in. This is a plant setpoint. This is the maximum membrane level setpoint where flow demand is at the
peak flow value. Used to calculate trim flow/plant flow demand 20-FCY-
25
201B.
Operator entered value.
20-LC-201A Setpoint Mem. Tk Level Setpoint Level ZeeWeed
® 0 160 118 in. This is a plant setpoint. Operator entered level setpoint.
This level is used to calculate the trim plant flow demand. It is in the middle
25
of the maximum and minimum levels for the trim volume
Page 8 of 23
Notification
ZenoTrac®
Shutdown
Range Range
Callout
Min Max
20-FCY-201B Pcontroller Mem. Tk Level Proportional Integral Level ZeeWeed ® Plant Flow Demand = proportional to average tank level, as shown below.
Derivative Controller
20-FCY-201B =
[Max. Peak Flow x (20-LXI-201A - 20-LC-201A) / (20-LCH-201A - 20-LC-
201A))]
Where:
25
Maximum control level is 20-LCH-201A where plant flow demand must
equal the maximum peak flow for the entire plant.
Control level is 20-LC-201A is in the middle of the maximum and minimum
levels for the trim volume.
This is the plant permeate trim flow used to calculate the net permeate flow
for each train in PRODUCTION, 20-FCY-301A-x.
20-LAL-201B-x Alarm Mem. Tk Level Low Level ZeeWeed

® IN PRODUCTION for trains and thickeners: IN PRODUCTION for trains and thickeners: When the switch is no longer active. Y Y
- all steps, when switch is active for more than 5 - all steps, proceeds to STANDBY - step 1.
25
seconds.
This level is just above the membrane fibers in the cassette.
20-LALL-201C-x Alarm Mem. Tk Level Low Low Level ZeeWeed
® IN ALL MODES: IN ALL MODES: When the switch is no longer active. Y Y
- all steps, when switch is active for 3600 - all steps, displays on alarm banner "Membrane Tank 'X' Possible
25
seconds. Membrane Exposure."
20-ZAC-110-x Alarm Mem. Tk. Feed Gate Failed to Close Valve ZeeWeed
® IN STANDBY for train & thickener, PRODUCTION When the close limit switch is activated. Y
for train & thickener, BACKPULSE for train &
thickener, RELAX, DRAIN, MAINTENANCE
CLEAN, RECOVERY CLEAN.
25
NEUTRALIZATION:
- all steps, when the close limit switch is not
activated for 300 seconds when the valve is asked
to close.
20-ZAO-110-x Alarm Mem. Tk. Feed Gate Failed to Open Valve ZeeWeed
® IN STANDBY for train & thickener, PRODUCTION When the valve open limit switch is activated. Y
for train & thickener, BACKPULSE for train &
thickener, RELAX, DRAIN, MAINTENANCE
CLEAN, RECOVERY CLEAN.
25
NEUTRALIZATION:
- all steps, when the open limit switch is not
activated for 300 seconds when the valve is asked
to open.
20-FV-110-x Valve Mem. Tk. Feed Gate Valve ZeeWeed
® AUTO: When the valve called to open then the PLC energizes discrete output to
- per OSC. open valve.
When the valve called to close then the PLC energizes discrete output to
25
MANUAL: close valve.
Supervisor.
20-FV-501-x Valve Mem. Tk. Drain Valve Valve ZeeWeed
® AUTO: When the valve called to open then the PLC energizes discrete output to
25
MANUAL:
Supervisor.
30 Permeate System for the Trains
20-FAH-301A-x Alarm Instantaneous Permeate Flow, Flow High Flow Permeate 800 1750 1374 gpm IN PRODUCTION: IN PRODUCTION: When the ON button is pressed. Y Y Y
- all steps when the flow is at or above the - all steps, proceeds to SHUTDOWN - step 1.
35 setpoint for 10 seconds.
This is a common setpoint with multiple Alarms.
20-FCH-301A Setpoint Instantaneous Permeate Flow Maximum Flow Permeate 800 1300 1249 gpm This is the upper limit for 20-FC-301A-x
35
Flow Setpoint
20-FCYH-301A Setpoint Net Permeate Flow Maximum Setpoint 1 Flow Permeate 800 1300 1032 gpm When all trains are available. This is the upper limit for 20-FCY-301A-x and 20-FCY-301B-x.
All trains are available when there are no trains in
35
OFF, SHUTDOWN, MAINTENANCE CLEAN or
RECOVERY CLEAN/NEUTRALIZATION.
20-FCYH-301B Setpoint Net Permeate Flow Maximum Setpoint 2 Flow Permeate 800 1300 774 gpm When there is one train, or more than one train, This is the upper limit for 20-FCY-301A-x and 20-FCY-301B-x.
not in service. When train 4 is enabled as a
thickener, it doesn't count as not in service. (It is
35 an N=3 design.)
A train is not in service when it is in OFF,
SHUTDOWN, MAINTENANCE CLEAN or
RECOVERY CLEAN/NEUTRALIZATION.
Trigger Plant Permeate Demand Start Trigger for Demand Permeate 210 338 212 gpm When the plant flow demand is at or above this Puts one train to production that has the highest starting priority.
35
20-FSYH-201A One Train Running setpoint for 10 seconds
Trigger Plant Permeate Demand Standby Trigger -Demand Permeate 81 209 209 gpm When the plant flow demand is at or below this Puts one train to standby that has the highest standby priority. Y
35
20-FSYL-201A One to No Trains Running setpoint for 10 seconds
35
20-FSYH-201B Two Trains Running setpoint for 10 seconds
35
20-FSYL-201B Two to One Train Running setpoint for 10 seconds
Page 9 of 23
Notification
ZenoTrac®
Shutdown
Range Range
Callout
Min Max
35
20-FSYH-201C Three Trains Running setpoint for 10 seconds
35
20-FSYL-201C Three to Two Trains Running setpoint for 10 seconds
35
20-FSYH-201D Four Trains Running setpoint for 10 seconds
35
20-FSYL-201D Four to Three Trains Running setpoint for 10 seconds
20-FCL-301A Setpoint Instantaneous Permeate Flow Minimum Flow Permeate 100 150 140 gpm This is the lower limit for 20-FC-301A-x
35
Flow Setpoint
20-FAL-301A-x Alarm Instantaneous Permeate Flow, Flow Low Flow Permeate 100 140 126 gpm IN PRODUCTION: IN PRODUCTION: When the ON button is pressed. Y Y Y
- all steps, when the pump is running and the flow - all steps, proceeds to SHUTDOWN - step 1.
35 is at or below the setpoint for 10 seconds.
This is a common setpoint with multiple Alarms.
20-FAT-301-x Alarm Permeate Flow Transmitter Out of Range Flow Permeate 0 2000 gpm IN ALL MODES: IN PRODUCTION for train & thickener, BACKPULSE for train & thickener, When the ON button is pressed. Y Y Y
When the transmitter is out of range by 1% of the MAINTENANCE CLEAN, RECOVERY CLEAN & NEUTRALIZATION:
calibrated range for 2 seconds. - all steps, proceeds to SHUTDOWN - step 1.
35 (i.e. calibrated range = range max. - range min.) IN DRAIN:
- place the process pump in fault, continue steps without the backpulses.
20-FI-301A-x Analog In Instantaneous Permeate Flow for Train Flow Permeate 0 2000 gpm Displays value with engineering units on screen.
35 and Thickener
Actual instrument is 20-FE/FIT-301-x.
20-FQIY-301A-x Derived Last Production Cycle's Net Permeate Volume Permeate -10000 1000000000 gal Totalize the net permeate flow during the last production cycle. Y
Volume for Train Net permeate flow = Totalized Permeate volume during Production - steps 1
35
through to the end of the cycle minus Total Backpulse volume from
Backpulsing pump
20-FQIY-301B-x Derived Today's Permeate Volume for Train Volume Permeate -10000 1000000000 gal Total Train Production Volume for Today = Totalized Permeate volume At midnight after current value is put into 20-
during Production - steps 1 through to the end of the cycle minus Total FQIY-301C-x.
Backpulse volume from Backpulsing pump.
35
At midnight this value is stored at 20-FQIY-301C-x.
20-FQIY-301B-x = Totalized 20-FI-301A-x (In Production) - Totalized 20-FI-

301B-x (During Backpulse)
35 20-FQIY-301C-x Derived Yesterday's Permeate Volume for Train Volume Permeate -10000 1000000000 gal At midnight. Set value to 20-FQIY-301B-x. Y
20-FIR-301A-x Derived Backpulse Analysis Flow Prior to Last Flow Permeate IN PRODUCTION for the train and thickener: Captures and Displays value and engineering units in Backpulse Analysis Y
Backpulse for Train and Thickener When the Pre-Backpulse trigger, BP_TRIG_PRE, Chart:
is active. - prior to last backpulse
35
- during last backpulse
- after last backpulse
- after previous backpulse
20-FIR-301C-x Derived Backpulse Analysis Flow After Last Flow Permeate IN PRODUCTION for the train and thickener: Captures and Displays value and engineering units in Backpulse Analysis Y
Backpulse for Train and Thickener When the Post-backpulse trigger, Chart:
BP_TRIG_POST, is active. - prior to last backpulse
35
20-FIR-301D-x Derived Backpulse Analysis Flow After Previous Flow Permeate IN PRODUCTION for the train and thickener: Move value of 20-FIR-301C-x into 20-FIR-301D-x. Y
Backpulse for Train and Thickener When the Post-backpulse trigger,
BP_TRIG_POST, is active. Displays value and engineering units in Backpulse Analysis Chart:
35 - prior to last backpulse
20-FFY-301A-x Setpoint Net Instantaneous Production Flow Flow Permeate 1.00 1.3 The system recalculates then freezes this value in In Auto
Correction Factor for Train and Thickener Production step 2 when 20-FIC-301A-x is set to 20-FFY-301A-x = (20-KQY-301 + 20-FQI-301B-x/20-FCY-301A-x)/(20-KI-
Auto. 301-x)
In Sup
20-FFY-301A-x = (20-KQY-301 + 20-FQI-301B-x/20-FCY-301B-x)/(20-KI-
35
301-x)
Where:
KI-3500-x is the time remaining to next Backpulse, and,
In Auto SP: 20-FC-301A-x = (20-FCY-301A-x) × 20-FFY-301A-x
In Sup SP: 20-FC-301A-x = (20-FCY-301B-x) × 20-FFY-301A-x
Page 10 of 23
Notification
ZenoTrac®
Shutdown
Range Range
Callout
Min Max
20-FCY-301A-x Derived Target Net Permeate Flow Calculated for Flow Permeate 20-FAL- 20-FCYH- When auto setpoint is selected. This is the value used in the calculation of 20-FC-301A-x.
Train 301A-x 301A
Target Net Permeate Flow = (Plant Flow Demand - ∑ Supervisory Entered
Flows - Thickener flow when in thickener mode) ÷ (Number of Trains In
Production/Backpulse - Number of Trains In Production/Backpulse with a
Supervisory Setpoint)
35
20-FCY-301A-x = (20-FCY-201A - (∑ 20-FCY-301B-x for trains with
supervisory SP)-(20-FCY-301C-4 when train 4 is in thickening mode with an
auto setpoint)-(20-FCY-301D-4 when train 4 is in thickening mode with a
manual setpoint)) ÷ (NUM_TR_PROD - NUM_TR_PROD_SUP).
20-FCY-301B-x Setpoint Target Net Permeate Flow Operator Flow Permeate 20-FAL- 20-FCYH- ### gpm When supervisory setpoint is selected. This is the value used in the calculation of 20-FC-301A-x.
Entered for Train 301A-x 301A
35 Initially:
20-FCY-301B-x = 20-FCY-301A-x when alternating between auto and
supervisory setpoint. This is a bumpless transfer.
20-FIC-301A-x PID/Comm Permeate Instantaneous Flow Flow Permeate IN PRODUCTION for trains & thickener: PV is the permeate flow, 20-FI-301A-x
Proportional Integral Derivative Controller - steps as per the OSC SP = 20-FC-301A-x for Train
for Train and Thickener SP = SP = 20-FC-301F-4 for Thickener
CV is the speed of the process pump.
35 The minimum CV is 25% and the maximum CV is defined by 20-PDSLL-301-
x action.
Deadband=0, Loop Update=0.5 seconds

E=SP-PV
20-FC-301A-x Derived Permeate Flow Instantaneous Flow Flow Permeate 20-FAL- 20-FCH-301A- gpm PV is the permeate flow, 20-FI-301A-x
Setpoint for Train 301A-x x SP = 20-FC-301A-x for Train
35
SP = SP = 20-FC-301F-4 for Thickener
20-HMS-201N-x Button Permeate Flow Auto Setpoint Button for Flow Permeate When the button is pressed. Allows the operator to use the calculated setpoint for the trains net
35
train permeate flow.
20-HMS-201P-x Button Permeate Flow Supervisory Setpoint Flow Permeate When the button is pressed. Allows the operator to use a supervisory setpoint for the trains net permeate
Button for train flow.
35
When pressed the system will use the operator entered setpoint for the
trains net permeate flow until changed by the user.
20-FV-320-x Valve Instrument Isolation Valve Quality Permeate AUTO: When the valve called to open then the PLC energizes discrete output to
MANUAL:
Supervisor.
20-AAT-320-x Alarm Permeate Turbidity Transmitter Out of Quality Permeate 0.0 10.0 NTU IN ALL MODES: When the transmitter is in range. Y Y
Range When the transmitter is out of range by 1% of the
calibrated range for 2 seconds.
35
(i.e. calibrated range = range max. - range min.)
20-AI-320-x Analog In Permeate Turbidity Quality Permeate 0.0 10.0 NTU Displays value with engineering units on screen. Y
35
Actual instrument is 20-AE/AIT-320-x.
20-AAH-320A-x Alarm Permeate Turbidity High 1 Quality Permeate 0.0 10.0 5.0 NTU IN PRODUCTION for trains & thickener: IN ALL MODES: When the turbidity reading is below this setpoint. Y Y
- all steps, when the turbidity reading is at or - all steps, for all trains, changes to Relax mode and prevents scheduled The trains that had Backpulse selected by the
35 above this setpoint for 20-KQS-320A seconds. Maintenance Cleans. operator before the alarm switch back to
backpulse mode.
This is a plant setpoint for all trains
20-AAH-320B-x Alarm Permeate Turbidity High 2 Quality Permeate 0.0 10.0 0.2 NTU IN PRODUCTION for trains & thickener:: When the turbidity reading is below this setpoint. Y
- all steps, when the turbidity reading is at or
35 above this setpoint for 20-KQS-320B seconds.

20-AAH-320C-x Alarm Permeate Turbidity High 3 Quality Permeate 0.0 10.0 0.5 NTU IN PRODUCTION for trains & thickener:: IN PRODUCTION for trains & thickener:: When the ON button is pressed. Y Y Y
- all steps, when the turbidity reading is at or - all steps, proceeds to SHUTDOWN - step 1.
35 above this setpoint for 20-KQS-320C seconds.

20-KQS-320A Setpoint Permeate Turbidity High 1 Timer Quality Permeate 0.0 60.0 10.0 sec. IN PRODUCTION for trains & thickener:: Timer is used to trigger high Alarm. When turbidity reading is below 20-AAH-320A-x
- all steps, when turbidity reading is at or above When timer times out, 20-AAH-320A-x is active. setpoint.
35
20-AAH-320A-x setpoint, timer operates.
20-KQS-320B Setpoint Permeate Turbidity High 2 Timer Quality Permeate 0.0 300.0 60.0 sec. IN PRODUCTION for trains & thickener:: Timer is used to trigger high Alarm. When turbidity reading is below 20-AAH-320B-x
- all steps, when turbidity reading is at or above When timer times out, 20-AAH-320B-x is active. setpoint.
35
20-AAH-320B-x setpoint, timer operates.
Page 11 of 23
Notification
ZenoTrac®
Shutdown
Range Range
Callout
Min Max
20-KQS-320C Setpoint Permeate Turbidity High 3 Timer Quality Permeate 0.0 300.0 120.0 sec. IN PRODUCTION for trains & thickener:: Timer is used to trigger high alarm. When turbidity reading is below 20-AAH-320C-x
- all steps, when turbidity reading is at or above When timer times out, 20-AAH-320C-x is active. setpoint.
35
20-AAH-320C-x setpoint, timer operates.
20-HMS-201Q-x Button Demand Override Enabled Button for train Sequence Permeate When the button is pressed. IN ALL MODES:
35 - all steps, train will not be effected by the low flow demand trigger.
20-HMS-201R-x Button Demand Override Disabled Button for Sequence Permeate When the button is pressed. IN ALL MODES:
35
train - all steps, train will be effected by the low flow demand trigger.
20-YA-301-x Alarm/com Process Pump Fail Pump Permeate IN ALL MODES: IN PRODUCTION for train and thickener & BACKPULSE for train and IN PRODUCTION for train and thickener & Y Y Y
m.. - all steps requiring the pump to run, when the thickener, & NEUTRALIZATION: BACKPULSE for train and thickener, &
MCC running confirmation is missing for 5 - all steps, places pump into man off. The train/thickener proceeds to NEUTRALIZATION, MAINTENANCE CLEAN
seconds. SHUTDOWN - step 1. and DRAIN:
When the pump auto button is pressed.
IN MAINTENANCE CLEAN: IN RECOVERY CLEAN:
-as required in OSC steps, places pump into man off. Proceeds to last step When the pumps are put back into auto and
of MAINTENANCE CLEAN. Train will be shutdown at end of Maintenance Fault Timer clears then align valves as per OSC
Clean. step after a six second delay resume step, as
Displays on alarm banner "Maintenance Clean Aborted." shown in the OSC.
35
IN RECOVERY CLEAN:
- holds step
- all steps, places pump into man off and after a delay of six seconds closes
valve 20-FV-301-x.
- auto-stops chemical pumps (if necessary).
Displays, "Train will be Shutdown due to active alarm" .
IN DRAIN:
- continues step
- all steps, place process pump into fault and after a delay of six seconds
close the valve 20-FV-301-4.
20-KQS-301W Alarm Fault Timer Pump Permeate 120 min IN RECOVERY CLEAN: IN RECOVERY CLEAN & DRAIN: IN RECOVERY CLEAN & DRAIN: Y Y Y
- all steps, when one of the following alarms are - proceeds to SHUTDOWN - step 1. When all hold step alarms clear.
active 20-YA-301-x, 20-FAH-301B-x, 20-FAL-
301B-x, 20-PDAH-301-x, 20-PAHH-601-x, 20-
PAH-301B-x, 20-YA-801-x, 90-PAL-002 for 120
35
continuous minutes.
IN DRAIN:
- all steps, when one of the following alarms are
active 16-YA-801-4, 20-LAT-201A-4, 90-PAL-002
for 120 continuous minutes.
20-SMS-301A-x Setpoint Process Pump Permeating Start Speed Pump Permeate 25 100 60 % IN PRODUCTION: IN PRODUCTION:
35 - all steps where the pump is requested to start. - all steps, this is the pumps starting speed, held for 3 seconds, before
starting PID control.
20-SMS-301B-x Setpoint Process Pump Backpulsing Start Speed Pump Permeate 25 100 50 % IN BACKPULSE & DRAIN: IN BACKPULSE & DRAIN:
35 - all steps where the pump is requested to start. - all steps, this is the pumps starting speed, held for 3 seconds, before
starting PID control.
20-SMS-301C-x Setpoint Process Pump CIP & Neutralization Start Pump Permeate 25 100 50 % IN MAINTENANCE CLEAN, RECOVERY CLEAN IN MAINTENANCE CLEAN, RECOVERY CLEAN & NEUTRALIZATION:
Speed & NEUTRALIZATION: - all steps, this is the pumps starting speed, held for 3 seconds, before
35
- all steps where the pump is requested to start. starting PID control.
20-KQI-301-x Derived Process Pump Pump Permeate 0 30000 hours IN ALL MODES: IN ALL MODES: When the Reset Run Time button is pressed,
35 Accumulated Run Time When the pump is operating. Displays accumulated run time for the pump on the screen. run time resets to 0 hours.
20-P-301-x Comm Process Pump Pump Permeate MANUAL: When the pump is called to run, energizes the PLC discrete output to
- only available with SUPER password operate motor.
If VFD called to start, the speed command is set at the setpoint.
pump Fail 20-YA-301-x
20-MK-301-x Setpoint Process Pump Speed Pump Permeate IN PRODUCTION for train and thickener:
- all steps, this setpoint is overwritten by the CV value from PID loop flow
controller 20-FIC-301A-x to control the pump.
IN BACKPULSE for train and thickener & DRAIN:

35
controller 20-FIC-301B-x to control the pump.
IN MAINTENANCE CLEAN & RECOVERY CLEAN & NEUTRALIZATION:

controller 20-FIC-301B-x to control the pump.
Page 12 of 23
Notification
ZenoTrac®
Shutdown
Range Range
Callout
Min Max
20-PDIR-301A-x Derived Backpulse Analysis TMP Prior to Last TMP Permeate IN PRODUCTION for the train and the thickener: Captures and Displays value and engineering units in Backpulse Analysis Y
Backpulse for train and thickener - when the Pre-Backpulse trigger, BP_TRIG_PRE, Chart:
is active. - prior to last backpulse
35
20-PDIR-301B-x Derived Backpulse Analysis TMP During Last TMP Permeate IN BACKPULSE for the train and the thickener & Captures and Displays value and engineering units in Backpulse Analysis Y
Backpulse/Relax for train and thickener RELAX: Chart:
- when the During Backpulse/Relax trigger, - prior to last backpulse/relax
35
BP_TRIG_DUR, is active. - during last backpulse/relax
- after last backpulse/relax
- after previous backpulse/relax
20-PDIR-301C-x Derived Backpulse Analysis TMP After Last TMP Permeate IN PRODUCTION for the train and the thickener: Captures and Displays value and engineering units in Backpulse Analysis Y
Backpulse - when the Post-backpulse trigger, Chart:
BP_TRIG_POST, is active. - prior to last backpulse
35
20-PDIR-301D-x Derived Backpulse Analysis TMP After Previous TMP Permeate IN PRODUCTION for the train and the thickener: Move value of 20-PDIR-301C-x into 20-PDIR-301D-x. Y
Backpulse for train and thickener - when the Post-backpulse trigger,
BP_TRIG_POST, is active. Displays value and engineering units in Backpulse Analysis Chart:
35 - prior to last backpulse
20-PDALL-301-x Alarm TMP Low Low for train and thickener TMP Permeate -8.0 0.0 -8.0 psig IN PRODUCTION for the train and the thickener: IN PRODUCTION for the train and the thickener: When the ON button is pressed. Y Y Y
- all steps, when the TMP is at or below this - all steps, proceeds to SHUTDOWN - step 1.
35
setpoint for 5 seconds.
20-PDSLL-301-x Trigger TMP Low-Low for train and thickener TMP Permeate -8.0 0.0 -7.0 psig IN PRODUCTION: IN PRODUCTION: IN ALL MODES:
- all steps, when the TMP is at or below this - all steps, captures the initial value for the maximum of the 20-FIC-301A-x -all steps, when the TMP is above the setpoint,
setpoint. CV as: then increases the maximum value for 20-FIC-
301A-x CV by 0.25% every second until it
35 Initial value for the maximum CV = (CV value of 20-FIC-301A-x) - 0.25 reaches 100%.
Then reduces the maximum value for 20-FIC-301A-x CV by 0.25% every

second until it reaches to the its minimum of 25%.
20-PDILL-301-x Indicator TMP Low-Low Display for train and TMP Permeate IN PRODUCTION: IN PRODUCTION: IN PRODUCTION:
thickener - all steps, when maximum value for 20-FIC-301A- -all steps, the maximum value for 20-FIC-301A-x CV is limited to a value - all steps, when the maximum value for 20-FIC-
35
x CV is below 100%. below 100% . 301A-x CV is at 100%.
Displays "TMP at limit!" indication on the screen.
20-PDI-301-x Derived TMP for train and thickener TMP Permeate TMP = Membrane Header Pressure + Conversion Factor x (Height of the
Pressure Transmitter Above the Top of the Membranes + Height from the
Bottom of the Tank to the Top of the Membrane Fibers - Membrane Tank
Level)
Consult Control Narrative for Further Details.

(For WW deep membrane tanks where bottom of cassette is 30 in.)
WHEN LI-3426-x 20-LI-201-x IS ABOVE 30 in.:
35 20-PDI-301-x = 20-PI-301-x + C x (A+B - 20-LI-201-x)
WHEN 20-LI-201-x IS AT OR BELOW 30 in. :

20-PDI-301-x = 20-PI-301-x + C x (A+B - 30)
Var.A = 84 in. or mm (Top of Membranes to Pressure Transmitter)

Var.B = 98 in. or mm (Bottom of Tank to top of the Membrane Fibers)
C = 0.036127 psig/in.
20-PAHH-301A-x Alarm Permeate Membrane Header Pressure Pressure Permeate -3.0 0.0 -0.3 psig IN PRODUCTION for the train and the thickener: IN PRODUCTION for the train and the thickener: When the ON button is pressed. Y Y Y
High High for train and thickener - all steps, when the process pump is running and - all steps, proceeds to SHUTDOWN - step 1.
35 the pressure is at or above this setpoint for 10
seconds.
20-PAT-301-x Alarm Permeate Membrane Header Pressure Pressure Permeate -15.0 15.0 psig IN ALL MODES: IN PRODUCTION, BACKPULSE, MAINTENANCE CLEAN, RECOVERY When the ON button is pressed. Y Y Y
Transmitter Out of Range When the transmitter is out of range by 1% of the CLEAN & NEUTRALIZATION:
35
20-PI-301-x Analog In Permeate Membrane Header Pressure Pressure Permeate -15.0 15.0 psig Displays value with engineering units on screen.
35
Actual instrument is 20-PE/PIT-301-x.
Page 13 of 23
Notification
ZenoTrac®
Shutdown
Range Range
Callout
Min Max
20-FV-301-x Valve Permeate Header to Pump Valve Valve Permeate AUTO: When the valve called to open then the PLC energizes discrete output to
35
MANUAL:
Supervisor.
35 Permeate System for the Thickener
INI_SUS_SOLIDS Setpoint Influent Mixed Liquor Suspended Solids Thickener Concentration 100 12000 8000 mg/L Operator entered value for the influent Mixed Liquor Suspended Solids
35
Concentration concentration.
FIN_SUS_SOLIDS Setpoint Mixed Liquor Suspended Solids Thickener Concentration 100 30000 30000 mg/L Operator entered value for the Mixed Liquor Suspended Solids final
35 Concentration to Drain the thickener concentration in Thickener
Setpoint
CAL_SUS_SOLIDS Derived Calculated MLSS Concentration in the Thickener Concentration 100 40000 mg/L Approximate MLSS in the Thickener = MASS of the solids in the Thickener
Thickener ÷ Thickener Tank Volume
35 CAL_SUS_SOLIDS =( 20-FQIY-301F-4 * INI_SUS_SOLIDS) ÷ (Area of
membrane tank * 20-LI-201A-4)
The area of the membrane tank is 595 ft2
RAMP_SUS_SOLIDS Setpoint Ramp Down Suspended Solids Thickener Concentration 5000 12000 10000 mg/L Operator entered value for the Mixed Liquor Suspended Solids
35
Concentration concentration at which the process pump ramps down.
DRAIN_SUS_SOLIDS Trigger Drain the Thickener Trigger Thickener Concentration When the Calculated MLSS Concentration in the IN PRODUCTION, STANDBY, BACKPULSE: IN DRAIN
Thickener is equal to or greater than the Mixed - the thickener proceeds to STANDBY -when Mem. Tk Empty Tank 20-LS-201S-x is
35
Liquor Suspended Solids Concentration to drain HMI displays a banner “Drain the thickener" active
the thickener Setpoint.
20-FAH-301C-4 Alarm Instantaneous Permeate Flow, Flow High Flow Permeate 400 700 687 gpm IN PRODUCTION: IN PRODUCTION: When the ON button is pressed. Y Y Y
35 - all steps when the flow is at or above the - all steps, proceeds to SHUTDOWN - step 1.
20-FCH-301B Setpoint Instantaneous Permeate Flow Maximum Flow Permeate 400 625 624 gpm This is the upper limit for 20-FC-301F-4
35
Flow Setpoint
20-FC-301E-4 Setpoint Thickener Auto Net Permeate Starting Thickener Flow 100 520 516 gpm When the Calculated MLSS Concentration in the Thickener is less than
Flow Ramp Down Suspended Solids Concentration
35
This value is used in the PID loop 20-FIC-301A-4 to control the speed of the
process pump.
20-FC-301G-4 Setpoint Thickener Auto Net Permeate Ending Thickener Flow 190 380 316 gpm Note: the flow should be 3 to 6 GFD with default This operator enter value is used in the calculation of Permeate Flow
Flow value of 5gfd. Instantaneous Flow Setpoint for Thickener after the calculated mixed liquor
35
solids concentration is greater than the ramp down suspended
concentration.
20-FC-301F-4 Derived Permeate Flow Instantaneous Flow Flow Permeate 20-FCL- 624 20-FCH- gpm Instantaneous Permeate Flow Setpoint = Target Net Permeate Flow × Net
Setpoint for Thickener 301B 301B Instantaneous Production Correction Factor
35
In Auto SP: 20-FC-301F-4 = (20-FCY-301C-4) × 20-FFY-301B-4
In Sup SP: 20-FC-301F-4 = (20-FCY-301D-4) × 20-FFY-301B-4
20-FFY-301B-4 Setpoint Net Instantaneous Production Flow Flow Permeate 1.00 1.3 The system recalculates then freezes this value in In Auto
Correction Factor for Thickener Production step 2 when 20-FIC-301A-4 is set to 20-FFY-301B-4 = (20-KQY-301 + 20-FQI-301B-x/20-FCY-301C-4)/(20-KI-
Auto. 301-x)
In Sup
20-FFY-301B-4 = (20-KQY-301 + 20-FQI-301B-x/20-FCY-301D-4)/(20-KI-
35
301-x)
Where:
KI-3500-x is the time remaining to next Backpulse, and
In Auto SP: 20-FC-301F-4 = (20-FCY-301C-4) × 20-FFY-301B-4
In Sup SP: 20-FC-301F-4 = (20-FCY-301D-4) × 20-FFY-301B-4
20-FCY-301C-4 Derived Target Net Permeate Flow Calculated for Flow Permeate 20-FCL- 20-FC-301E-4 When auto setpoint is selected and the train 4 is This is the value used in the calculation of Permeate Flow Instantaneous
Thickener 301B-x operating as a thickener. Flow Setpoint for Thickener 20-FC-301F-4.
When the Calculated MLSS Concentration in the Thickener is less than

Ramp Down Suspended Solids Concentration
Target Net Permeate Flow Calculated for Thickener equals Thickener Auto
Net Permeate Starting Flow (average day flow for a train 516 gpm)
20-FCY-301C-4 = 20-FC-301E-4
When the Calculated MLSS Concentration in the Thickener is equal to or

greater than Ramp Down Suspended Solids Concentration
The flow setpoint equals the Ending flow plus (Starting flow minus the
35 Ending flow) multiplied by (the Calculated S.S concentration minus the
Thickener Drain S.S. concentration) divided by (Influent Mixed Liquor
Suspended Solids Concentration minus Thickener Drain Setpoint
concentration)
20-FC-301E-4 = 20-FC-301G-4 + (20-FC-301E-4 - 20-FC-301G-4) *
(CAL_SUS_SOLIDS - FIN_SUS_SOLIDS) / (INI_SUS_SOLIDS -
FIN_SUS_SOLIDS)
Note: if Calculated S.S concentration is greater than the Thickener Drain
Setpoint concentration then Permeate Flow Instantaneous Flow Setpoint for
Thickener equals the Thickener Auto Net Permeate Ending Flow
Initially:
20-FCY-301C-4 = 20-FCY-301D-4 when alternating between auto and super
Page 14 of 23
Notification
ZenoTrac®
Shutdown
Range Range
Callout
Min Max
20-FCY-301D-4 Setpoint Target Net Permeate Flow Operator Flow Permeate 20-FCL- 20-FC-301E-5 ### gpm When supervisory setpoint is selected. This is the value used in the calculation of 20-FC-301F-4.
Entered for Train 301B-x
35 Initially:
20-FCY-301C-4 = 20-FCY-301D-4 when alternating between auto and
supervisory setpoint. This is a bumpless transfer.
20-FCL-301B Setpoint Instantaneous Permeate Flow Minimum Flow Permeate 100 140 130 gpm This is the lower limit for 20-FC-301F-4
35
Flow Setpoint for Thickener
20-FAL-301C-x -4 Alarm Instantaneous Permeate Flow, Flow Low Flow Permeate 100 140 117 gpm IN PRODUCTION for thickener: IN PRODUCTION for thickener: When the ON button is pressed. Y Y Y
for Thickener - all steps, when the pump is running and the flow - all steps, proceeds to SHUTDOWN - step 1.
35
is at or below the setpoint for 10 seconds.
This is a common setpoint.
20-HMS-201Y-4 Button Permeate Flow Auto Setpoint Button for Flow Permeate When the button is pressed and train 4 is Allows the operator to use the calculated setpoint for the thickener net
35
thickener operating as a thickener. permeate flow.
20-HMS-201Z-4 Button Permeate Flow Supervisory Setpoint Flow Permeate When the button is pressed and train 4 is Allows the operator to use a supervisory setpoint for the thickener net
Button for thickener operating as a thickener. permeate flow.
35
When pressed the system will use the operator entered setpoint for the
trains net permeate flow until changed by the user.
THICK_FLAG Trigger Thickener Flag Sequence WAS When the Thickener Enabled Button is pressed. Set Thickener flag In the last step of DRAIN, the thickener flag is
35
reset. When the OFF button is pressed.
20-HMS-201G Button Thickener Enabled Button Sequence WAS IN OFF IN ALL MODES:
35 When the button is pressed. The operator is - enables train 4 as a thickener and it operates according to the thickener
required to confirm the selection. OSC when the On button is selected.
20-HMS-201H Button Train Enabled Button Sequence WAS IN OFF IN ALL MODES:
35 When the button is pressed. This button is not - enables train 4 as a train and it operates according to the train OSC
available if the thickener flag is set. immediately.
20-FQIY-301D-4 Derived Today's Thickener Net Permeate Volume Volume WAS 0 1,000,000 gal When train 4 is enabled as a thickener Total Train Production Volume for Today = Totalized Permeate volume At midnight, totalizer is reset to zero.
during Production - steps 1 through to the end of the cycle minus Total
35
At midnight this value is stored at 20-FQIY-301E-x.
20-FQIY-301D-4 = Totalized 20-FI-301A-4 (In Production) - Totalized 20-FI-

301B-4 (During Backpulse)
20-FQIY-301E-4 Derived Yesterday's Thickener Net Permeate Volume WAS 0 1,000,000 gal Set to 20-FQIY-301D-4 at midnight.
35
Volume
20-FQIY-301F-4 Derived Thickener Net Permeate Volume Since Volume WAS When train 4 is enabled as a thickener Total Train Production Volume for Today = Totalized Permeate volume This totalizer is reset when 20-LS-201S-4 is
Last Tank Drain during Production - steps 1 through to the end of the cycle minus Total active.
20-FQIY-301F-4 = Totalized 20-FI-301A-4 (In Production) - Totalized 20-FI-

301B-4 (During Backpulse)
50 Recirculation/RAS System
16-FAH-801-x Alarm Recirculation Flow High Flow Recirculation 0 100 110 90 % IN ALL MODES: Setpoint is a percentage of 16-FC-801A-x. When the flow is below the setpoint. Y
50 - all steps when the flow is at or above the
16-FAL-801-x Alarm Recirculation Flow Low Flow Recirculation 0 100 10 % IN ALL MODES: Setpoint is a percentage of 16-FC-801A-x. When the flow is above the setpoint. Y
50 - all steps, when the pump is running and the flow
is at or below the setpoint for 10 seconds.
16-FI-801-x Analog In Recirculation Flow Flow Recirculation 0 2500 gpm Displays value with engineering units on screen.
50
Actual instrument is 16-FE/FIT-801-x.
16-FAT-801-x Alarm Recirculation Flow Transmitter Out of Flow Recirculation 0 2500 gpm IN ALL MODES: IN STANDBY for train, PRODUCTION for train, BACKPULSE for train, When the transmitter is in range. Y Y Y
Range When the transmitter is out of range by 1% of the RELAX, RECOVERY CLEAN, DRAIN:
50
16-FIC-801-x PID/Comm Recirculation/Drain Pump Flow Flow Recirculation PV is the recirculation flow rate, 16-FI-801-x
Proportional Integral Derivative Controller SP = 16-FC-801A-x
CV is the speed of the Recirculation/Drain Pump the minimum CV is 25%
50
Deadband = 0, Loop Update = 0.5 seconds
E=SP-PV
Page 15 of 23
Notification
ZenoTrac®
Shutdown
Range Range
Callout
Min Max
16-FC-801A Derived Recirculation/Drain Pump Flow Setpoint Flow Recirculation gpm When there is at least one train is in Production, Relax or Backpulse
(Production Cycle):
Recirculation Setpoint = Flow Factor multiplied by the plant flow demand
flow divided by (# of trains in the production cycle)
16-FC-801A-x = (16-FFY-801 * 20-FCY-201A)/(NUM_TR_PROD) Flow
setpoint is updated every 5 minutes.
When there is at least one train in Production, Relax or Backpulse
(Production Cycle) and the duration timer for standby aeration is active and
the value of the iterations counter 16-KQS-801A equals the value of its
setpoint.
Recirculation Setpoint = Flow Factor multiplied by the plant flow demand
flow divided by (# of trains in the production cycle) multiplied by (# of trains
50 in the production cycle plus 1) divided by the # of trains in the production
cycle
16-FC-801A-x = [16-FFY-801 * 20-FCY-201A /(NUM_TR_PROD)] *
[(NUM_TR_PROD + 1)/NUM_TR_PROD] Flow setpoint is updated every 5
minutes.
When none of the trains are in Production, Relax or Backpulse and at least
one train is in Standby Step 3, operate the recirculation/drain pump at 1250
gpm flow setpoint. This operation is not based on the standby aeration timers
IN RECOVERY CLEAN & DRAIN, operate the recirculation/drain pump at 12
16-FFY-801 Setpoint Recirculation/Drain Pumps Recirculation Flow Recirculation 2.0 4.0 3.0 N/A Common setpoint for all trains in PRODUCTION, Flow Factor, 16-FFY-801, is used to calculate the Recirculation/Drain
50
Factor BACKPULSE & RELAX. Pump's flow setpoint, 20-FC-801A.
16-YA-801-x Alarm/com Recirculation/Drain Pump Fail Pump Recirculation IN ALL MODES: IN STANDBY for train, PRODUCTION for train, BACKPULSE for train, When the pump ON START OR AUTO button is Y Y Y
m.. - all steps requiring the pump to run, when the RELAX: pressed.
MCC running confirmation is missing for 5 - all steps, proceeds to SHUTDOWN - step 1. IN RECOVERY CLEAN & DRAIN:
seconds. When the pump (recirculation & process pump)
IN RECOVERY CLEAN: is put back into auto and Fault Timer clears then
- holds step align valves as per OSC step after a six second
- all steps, places pump into man off and after a delay of six seconds closes delay resume step, as shown in the OSC.
20-FV-501-x.
50 - 20-KQS-301W starts
IN DRAIN:
- holds step
- all steps, places pump (recirculation & process pump) into man off and
after a delay of six seconds close the valves.
16-KQI-801-x Derived Recirculation/Drain Pump Pump Recirculation 0 30000 hours IN ALL MODES: IN ALL MODES: When the Reset Run Time button is pressed,
50 Accumulated Run Time When the pump is operating. Displays accumulated run time for the pump on the screen. run time resets to 0 hours.
16-P-801-x Comm Recirculation/Drain Pump Pump Recirculation MANUAL: When the pump is called to run, energizes the PLC discrete output to
- only available with SUPER password operate motor.
If VFD called to start, the speed command is set at the setpoint.
pump Fail 16-YA-801-x
16-SMS-801-x Setpoint Recirculation/Drain Pump Start Speed Pump Recirculation 25 100 60 % IN ALL MODES: IN ALL MODES:
50 - all steps where the pump is requested to start.
- all steps, this is the pumps starting speed, held for 3 seconds, before
starting PID control 16-FIC-801-x.
16-MK-801-x Setpoint Recirculation/Drain Pump Speed Pump Recirculation ALL MODES:
50 - all steps, this setpoint is overwritten by the lower CV value from PID loop
flow controller 16-FIC-801-x to control the pump.
16-KQS-801A Setpoint Standby recirculation/drain pump Pump Recirculation 0 10 1 # of times When the standby frequency timer 20-KQS-201D Increase the iterations counter by one. When the standby duration timer 20-KQS-201C
Operation Iterations times out. When the value of the iterations counter equals the value of the setpoint, times out for the LAST train in the standby
50 run the recirculation drain pumps for all the trains in Standby. aeration cycle and the value of the counter
Note: when the iterations counter equals zero run the recirculation drain equals the setpoint value.
pumps each time the trains in standby are aerated.
16-FV-820 Valve RAS to Mix Tank Isolation Valve Valve Permeate AUTO: When the valve called to open then the PLC energizes discrete output to
35
MANUAL:
Supervisor.
Page 16 of 23
Notification
ZenoTrac®
Shutdown
Range Range
Callout
Min Max
16-FV-821 Valve Sludge Holding Isolation Valve Valve Permeate AUTO: When the valve called to open then the PLC energizes discrete output to
35
MANUAL:
Supervisor.
55 BACKPULSE
20-KQS-301G Derived Staggered Backpulse Order Sequence Backpulse Staggered Backpulsing:
The time slots to do backpulse are evenly distributed throughout one
production cycle. The distribution is based on the maximum number of
trains installed in the plant. The production cycle is 12 minutes and there
are 4 trains. A backpulse is scheduled to occur every 3 minutes. Each train
55
is assigned a time slot to do backpulse according its train number, e.g., train
1 is backpulsed in the first time slot, and train 2 is backpulsed in the second
time slot, etc. Any train that is not in a production cycle will be skipped.
When train 4 is functioning as a thickener, the time slot for the
backpulse/relax remains the same.
20-KQS-301B Setpoint Backpulse/RELAX Duration Sequence Backpulse 5 200 30 sec. IN BACKPULSE train and thickener: IN RELAX & BACKPULSE train and thickener: When timer times out.
- step 3. - starts timer. Proceeds as per OSC when timer times out.
55
IN RELAX:
- step 2.
BP_TRIG_PRE Trigger Pre-Backpulse Snapshot Trigger Info Backpulse IN PRODUCTION: Y
55
- end of in permeate step.
BP_TRIG_DUR Trigger Backpulse/Relax Snapshot Trigger Info Backpulse IN BACKPULSE: Y
- 10 seconds into step 3.
55
IN RELAX:
- 10 seconds into step 2.
BP_TRIG_POST Trigger Post-Backpulse Snapshot Trigger Info Backpulse IN PRODUCTION: Y
55
- 30 seconds into production steps.
20-FC-301B Setpoint Backpulse Flow Setpoint Flow Backpulse 140 1590 1265 gpm Operator entered flow setpoint for backpulsing the entire train.
55
This is a plant setpoint.
20-FIC-301B-x PID/Comm Process Pump - Backpulse, Maintenance Flow Backpulse IN BACKPULSE: IN BACKPULSE & DRAIN:
Clean Recovery Clean and Neutralization - steps as per the OSC PV is the Backpulse flow rate measured at 20-FIT-301-x.
Flow Proportional Integral Derivative IN MAINTENANCE CLEAN: SP = 20-FC-301B for the train and thickener.
Controller - steps as per the OSC CV is the speed of the process pump.
IN RECOVERY CLEAN: The minimum CV is 25% and the maximum CV is defined by 20-PDYH-301-
- steps as per the OSC x action.
IN NEUTRALIZATION:
- steps as per the OSC IN RECOVERY CLEAN and NEUTRALIZATION:
IN DRAIN: PV is the CIP flow rate measured at 20-FIT-301-x.
- steps as per the OSC SP = 20-FC-301C.
55 The minimum CV is 25% and the maximum CV is defined by 20-PDYH-301-
x action.
PV is the CIP flow rate measured at 20-FIT-301-x.
SP = 20-FC-301D
The minimum CV is 25% and the maximum CV is defined by 20-PDYH-301-
x action.
Deadband = 0, LoopUpdate = 0.5 seconds

E=SP-PV
20-FI-301B-x Derived Backpulse Pump Flow Flow Backpulse 0 2000 gpm Displays value with engineering units on screen.
55
Actual instrument is 20-FE/FIT-301.
20-FAH-301B-x Alarm Backpulsing Pump, Flow High Flow Backpulse 140 1750 1392 gpm IN BACKPULSE, MAINTENANCE CLEAN, IN BACKPULSE, MAINTENANCE CLEAN & NEUTRALIZATION: When the ON or OFF button is pressed. Y Y Y
RECOVERY CLEAN, NEUTRALIZATION & - all steps, proceeds to SHUTDOWN - step 1. IN RECOVERY CLEAN:
DRAIN: When the pumps are put back into auto and
- all steps when the backpulse flow is at or above IN RECOVERY CLEAN: Fault Timer clears then align valves as per OSC
the setpoint for 5 seconds. - holds step step after a six second delay resume step, as
- all steps, places pump into man off and after a delay of six seconds closes shown in the OSC.
This is a common setpoint with multiple Alarms. 20-FV-301-x.
55
IN DRAIN:
- continues step
- all steps, place process pump into man off and after a delay of six seconds
Page 17 of 23
Notification
ZenoTrac®
Shutdown
Range Range
Callout
Min Max
20-FAL-301B-x Alarm Backpulse Pump, Flow Low Flow Backpulse 140 1100 1000 gpm IN BACKPULSE, MAINTENANCE CLEAN, IN BACKPULSE, MAINTENANCE CLEAN & NEUTRALIZATION: When the ON or OFF button is pressed. Y Y Y
RECOVERY CLEAN, NEUTRALIZATION & - all steps, proceeds to SHUTDOWN - step 1. IN RECOVERY CLEAN:
- all steps where the pump is running and the IN RECOVERY CLEAN: Fault Timer clears then align valves as per OSC
backpulse flow is at or below the setpoint for 10 - holds step step after a six second delay resume step, as
seconds. - all steps, places pump into man off and after a delay of six seconds closes shown in the OSC.
20-FV-301-x.
55
This is a common setpoint with multiple Alarms. - auto-stops chemical pumps (if necessary).
IN DRAIN:
- continues step
20-FQI-301B-x Derived Backpulse Volume Volume Backpulse 0 10000 gal IN BACKPULSE: IN BACKPULSE: IN BACKPULSE:
55
- beginning of step 2 - all steps, totalizes backpulse flow. - step 1
20-FIR-301B-x Derived Backpulse Analysis Flow During Last Flow Backpulse IN BACKPULSE for train and thickener & RELAX: Captures and Displays value and engineering units in Backpulse Analysis Y
Backpulse/Relax - when the During Backpulse/Relax trigger, Chart:
BP_TRIG_DUR, is active. - prior to last backpulse/relax
55
- during last backpulse/relax
- after last backpulse/relax
- after previous backpulse/relax
55 20-HMS-201S-x Button Enable Backpulse Button Sequence Backpulse When the button is pressed. Train will use backpulse mode and not relax mode.
20-HMS-201T-x Button Enable Relax Button Sequence Backpulse When the button is pressed or with specific Train will use relax mode and not backpulse mode.
alarms, as specified in the CLSC.
55
Relax is not available for train 4 when it is enabled
as a thickener
20-PDAH-301-x Alarm Backpulsing Pump, TMP High TMP Backpulse 0.0 8.0 8.0 psig IN BACKPULSE, MAINTENANCE CLEAN, IN BACKPULSE, MAINTENANCE CLEAN & NEUTRALIZATION: When the ON or OFF button is pressed. Y Y Y
RECOVERY CLEAN, NEUTRALIZATION, - all steps, proceeds to SHUTDOWN - step 1. IN RECOVERY CLEAN:
- all steps, when the TMP is at or above this IN RECOVERY CLEAN: Fault Timer clears then align valves as per OSC
setpoint for 5 seconds during backpulse. - holds step step after a six second delay resume step, as
55
IN DRAIN:
- continues step
20-PDYH-301-x Trigger TMP High TMP Backpulse 5.0 20-PDAH- 7.0 psig IN BACKPULSE for train, BACKPULSE for IN BACKPULSE for train, BACKPULSE for thickener, MAINTENANCE IN ALL MODES:
301B thickener, MAINTENANCE CLEAN, RECOVERY CLEAN, RECOVERY CLEAN, NEUTRALIZATION, DRAIN: -all steps, when the TMP is below the setpoint,
CLEAN, NEUTRALIZATION, DRAIN: - all steps, captures the initial value for the maximum of the 20-FIC-301B-x then increases the maximum value for 20-FIC-
- all steps, when the TMP is at or above this CV as: 301B-x CV by 0.25% every second until it
55 setpoint. reaches 100%.
Initial value for the maximum CV = (CV value of 20-FIC-301B-x) - 0.25
Then reduces the maximum value for 20-FIC-301B-x CV by 0.25% every

second until it reaches to the its minimum of 25%.
20-PDIH-301-x Indicator TMP High Display TMP Backpulse IN BACKPULSE for train, BACKPULSE for IN BACKPULSE for train, BACKPULSE for thickener, MAINTENANCE IN PRODUCTION:
thickener, MAINTENANCE CLEAN, RECOVERY CLEAN, RECOVERY CLEAN, NEUTRALIZATION, DRAIN: - all steps, when the maximum value for 20-FIC-
CLEAN, NEUTRALIZATION, DRAIN: -all steps, the maximum value for 20-FIC-301B-x CV is limited to a value 301A-x CV is at 100%.
55
- all steps, when maximum value for 20-FIC-301B- below 100% .
x CV is below 100%. Displays "TMP at limit!" indication on the screen.
20-PAH-301B-x Alarm Backpulsing, Pressure High Pressure Backpulse 0.0 11.4 9.0 psig IN BACKPULSE, MAINTENANCE CLEAN, IN BACKPULSE, MAINTENANCE CLEAN & NEUTRALIZATION: When the ON or OFF button is pressed. Y Y Y
- all steps, when the backpulse header pressure is IN RECOVERY CLEAN: Fault Timer clears then align valves as per OSC
at or above this setpoint for 6 seconds. - holds step step after a six second delay resume step, as
55
IN DRAIN:
- continues step
20-PAH-601-x Alarm Backpulsing Pump, Switch 20-PSH-601 Pressure Backpulse IN BACKPULSE: IN PRODUCTION: Y
55 Pressure High - all steps, when the switch is active for 5 - step 1.
seconds.
20-PAH-602-x Alarm Backpulsing Pump, Switch 20-PSH-602 Pressure Backpulse IN BACKPULSE: IN PRODUCTION: Y
55 Pressure High - all steps, when the switch is active for 5 - step 1.
seconds.
Page 18 of 23
Notification
ZenoTrac®
Shutdown
Range Range
Callout
Min Max
20-PAHH-601-x Alarm Backpulsing Pump, Pressure High High Pressure Backpulse IN BACKPULSE, MAINTENANCE CLEAN, IN BACKPULSE, MAINTENANCE CLEAN & NEUTRALIZATION: When the ON or OFF button is pressed. Y Y Y
- all steps, when both backpulse pressure high IN RECOVERY CLEAN: Fault Timer clears then align valves as per OSC
switches A & B are active at the same time. - holds step step after a six second delay resume step, as
20-FV-301-x.
55
IN DRAIN:
- continues step
20-LSL-302 Trigger Low Level in the Common Permeate Level Backpulse When the switch is not active for 5 seconds. Resets 20-LAL-303 When the switch is active. Y
55 Header Note to FRS: The switch is to be installed above
20-LAL-303
20-LAL-303 Alarm Low Level in the Common Permeate Level Backpulse When the backpulsing pump is running and the IN BACKPULSE: When the switch 20-LSL-302 is no longer active Y
Header switch is active for 5 seconds. - the process pump does not run if this switch is active. for 20 seconds.
IN MAINTENANCE CLEAN & NEUTRALIZATION:
- all steps, proceeds to SHUTDOWN - step 1.
55
IN RECOVERY CLEAN:
- all steps, proceeds to the next step.
IN DRAIN:
- continues step
60 Clean In Place (CIP) System
20-FC-301C Setpoint CIP Pump Flow Setpoint - Recovery Flow CIP 0 2000 1265 gpm Operator entered CIP flow setpoint for Recovery Clean, and Neutralization.
60 Clean This is a plant setpoint.
20-FC-301D Setpoint CIP Pump Flow Setpoint - Maintenance Flow CIP 0 2000 760 gpm Operator entered CIP flow setpoint for Maintenance Clean.
60
Clean This is a plant setpoint.
61 CIP - Citric Acid Chemical Systems
23-FV-301 Valve M. CLEAN Air to Citric Acid Pump Valve Valve CIP AUTO: When the valve called to open then the PLC energizes discrete output to
61
MANUAL:
Supervisor.
23-FV-302 Valve R. CLEAN Citric Acid Isolation Valve Valve CIP AUTO: When the valve called to open then the PLC energizes discrete output to
61
MANUAL:
Supervisor.
23-FV-331-x Valve Citric Acid Isolation Valve Valve CIP AUTO: When the valve called to open then the PLC energizes discrete output to
61
MANUAL:
Supervisor.
Interlock Prevent Starting of Citric Acid Pumps Pump CIP When a Sodium Hypochlorite Pump is ON. Blocks starting of any Citric Acid Pump, in auto or manual modes.
OR
61 When any train is in Maintenance Clean Chlorine
Clean or Recovery Clean Chlorine Clean.
62 CIP - Sodium Hypochlorite Chemical Systems

23-FV-101 Valve M. CLEAN Air to Sodium Hypochlorite Valve CIP AUTO: When the valve called to open then the PLC energizes discrete output to
Pump Valve - per OSC. open valve.
62
MANUAL:
Supervisor.
23-FV-102 Valve R. CLEAN Air to Sodium Hypochlorite Valve CIP AUTO: When the valve called to open then the PLC energizes discrete output to
Pump Valve - per OSC. open valve.
62
MANUAL:
Supervisor.
23-FV-131-x Valve Sodium Hypochlorite Isolation Valve Valve CIP AUTO: When the valve called to open then the PLC energizes discrete output to
62
MANUAL:
Supervisor.
Page 19 of 23
Notification
ZenoTrac®
Shutdown
Range Range
Callout
Min Max
Interlock Prevent Starting of NaOCl Pumps Pump CIP When a Citric Acid Pump is ON. Blocks starting of any Sodium Hypochlorite Pump, in auto or manual
OR modes.
62
When any train is in Maintenance Clean Acid
Clean or Recovery Clean Acid Clean.
63 CIP - Maintenance Clean
20-KQS-201A Setpoint Maintenance Clean Aeration Step Timer Pump Maintenance 600 3600 900 sec. IN MAINTENANCE CLEAN: IN MAINTENANCE CLEAN:
Clean - In aeration steps, as detailed in OSC. - steps as noted in the OSC, this is the steps duration.
63
Consult the OSC, Maintenance Clean steps, for details.
20-KQS-201G Trigger Maintenance Clean Schedule Schedule Maintenance IN PRODUCTION & STANDBY: IN PRODUCTION: IN MAINTENANCE CLEAN:
Clean - all steps, when the system time is greater than - in permeate step, proceeds to MAINTENANCE CLEAN - step 1. - step 1.
or equal to the operator entered time to IN STANDBY:
start/enable the Maintenance Cleans, 20-KQS- -proceeds to MAINTENANCE CLEAN - step 1.
63 201H, the train has not done a maintenance clean Only one Maintenance Clean can be scheduled per day.
since midnight, and a Maintenance Clean has
been selected to occur that day. Note: the
maintenance clean is skipped when the train is
enabled as a thickener.
20-HMS-201U-x Button Maintenance Clean to Occur on Given Schedule Maintenance Operator can select to have a Maintenance Clean on specific days of the
Day Enable Button Clean week. ENABLE indicates a Maintenance Clean for that train.
63 Only one Maintenance Clean can be scheduled per day, Sunday to

Saturday. Each day can have a different start/enabled and stop/disabled
time.
20-KQS-201H Setpoint Maintenance Clean Start/Enable Time Schedule Maintenance 0 2400 Determined by hr. Operator entered value to start/enable Maintenance Clean on the given day.
63 Clean Operator
20-FSH-201 Trigger Maintenance Cleans Delay or Aborted Schedule Maintenance System calculates the plant capacity as if there was one currently available
when Plant Flow Demand is high. Clean train not in service.
WHEN:
Current plant permeate demand is at or above [Max. net flow for Train 1 x
Total number of trains available less one train].
IF:
63 20-FCY-201A ≥
[(20-FCYH-301B) x (NUM_TR_PROD + # of tr. in Standby step 3 + # of tr.
in Maintenance Clean - 1]
The result of the calculation determines if one train can proceed to do a

Maintenance Clean and the remaining trains can meet the current permeate
demand.
20-FAH-201-x Alarm Maintenance Clean Delay/Abort Alarm Schedule Maintenance When 20-FSH-201 is active and either the Prevents Maintenance Cleans from starting and aborts Maintenance Cleans When 20-FSH-201 is not active. Y Y
Clean Maintenance Clean is pending for train "X" or that are in progress.
train "X" is in a Maintenance Clean.
WHEN IN PRODUCTION, BACKPULSE, OR RELAX:
The Maintenance Clean request is blocked and remains active. Alarms and
displays on the alarm banner "Maintenance Clean delayed".
When alarm 20-FAH-201-x clears at lower plant demands, 20-FSH-201 is
63 not active, trains that have a Maintenance Clean request active will proceed
to Maintenance Clean step 1 when no other train is in a Maintenance Clean,
as described in the OSC.
WHEN IN MAINTENANCE CLEAN:

- steps 1 to 8, proceeds to MAINTENANCE CLEAN step 9.
- steps 12, proceeds to MAINTENANCE CLEAN step 13.
Displays on the alarm banner "Maintenance Clean aborted"
23-HMS-101A-x Button Maintenance Clean Sodium Hypochlorite Sequence Maintenance When the button is pressed. Allows the operator to select Sodium Hypochlorite Maintenance Clean for
63
Button Clean each scheduled Maintenance Clean.
23-HMS-301A-x Button Maintenance Clean Citric Acid Button Sequence Maintenance When the button is pressed. Allows the operator to select Citric Acid Maintenance Clean for each
63
Clean scheduled Maintenance Clean.
20-KQS-301C Setpoint Maintenance Clean Repeated Pulse Sequence Maintenance 5 200 30 sec. IN MAINTENANCE CLEAN: IN MAINTENANCE CLEAN:
Duration Clean for steel tanks - steps as noted in the OSC. - steps as noted in the OSC, this is the steps duration.
63
use 20
20-KQS-301D Setpoint Maintenance Clean First & Last Pulse, Sequence Maintenance 5 200 120 sec. IN MAINTENANCE CLEAN: IN MAINTENANCE CLEAN:
Pulse Duration Clean for steel tanks - steps as noted in the OSC. - steps as noted in the OSC, this is the steps duration.
63
use 60
20-KQS-301E Setpoint Maintenance Clean Soak Duration Sequence Maintenance 5 600 270 sec. IN MAINTENANCE CLEAN: IN MAINTENANCE CLEAN:
Clean - steps as noted in the OSC. - steps as noted in the OSC, this is the steps duration.
63
Page 20 of 23
Notification
ZenoTrac®
Shutdown
Range Range
Callout
Min Max
20-KQS-301F Setpoint Maintenance Clean Number of iterations Sequence Maintenance 2 10 8 N/A IN MAINTENANCE CLEAN: Operator entered number of iterations for the chemical pulses in
Clean - steps as noted in the OSC. Maintenance Clean mode.
63 This is the number of iterations the chemical pulses in Maintenance Clean

are repeated.
Consult the OSC, Maintenance Clean mode, for details.

64 CIP - Recovery Clean
20-KQS-201B Setpoint Recovery Clean Aeration Step Timer Sequence Recovery Clean 0 3600 300 sec. IN RECOVERY CLEAN: IN RECOVERY CLEAN:
- steps as noted in the OSC. - steps as noted in the OSC, this is the steps duration.
64
Consult the OSC, Recovery Clean steps, for details.
20-KQS-301T Setpoint Empty Tk Manual Flush Duration Sequence Recovery Clean 0 1800 0 sec. IN RECOVERY CLEAN: IN RECOVERY CLEAN:
64
20-KQS-301V Setpoint Number of Iterations for Recovery Clean Sequence Recovery Clean 0 3 0 N/A IN RECOVERY CLEAN: Operator entered number of iterations for the flushing the membrane tank in
Mem Tk Flushing - steps as noted in the OSC. Recovery Clean.
64 This is the number of iterations the flush step in Recovery Clean is

repeated.
Consult the OSC, Recovery Clean mode, for details.

20-KQS-301M Setpoint Recovery Clean Repeated Pulse Duration Sequence Recovery Clean 30 7200 120 sec. IN RECOVERY CLEAN and NEUTRALIZATION: IN RECOVERY CLEAN and NEUTRALIZATION:
64
20-KQS-301N Setpoint Recovery Clean Soak Duration Sequence Recovery Clean 30 500 120 sec. IN RECOVERY CLEAN: IN RECOVERY CLEAN:
64
20-KQS-301P Setpoint Recovery Clean Extended Soak Duration Sequence Recovery Clean 3 24 12 hr. IN RECOVERY CLEAN: IN RECOVERY CLEAN:
64
- as per OSC. - duration of step as per OSC.
20-KQS-301Q Setpoint Recovery Clean Soak Extended Soak - Sequence Recovery Clean 30 300 60 sec. IN RECOVERY CLEAN: IN RECOVERY CLEAN: IN RECOVERY CLEAN:
Mixing Duration - in extended soak step and aeration is enabled, - setpoint is mixing duration with air in extended soak step. - as per OSC.
64 and every time 20-KQS-301R times out. - aerates the membrane tank for 20-KQS-301Q seconds every 20-KQS-
301R seconds. Starts step with no mixing.
20-KQS-301R Setpoint Recovery Clean Soak Extended Soak Sequence Recovery Clean 600 7200 1200 sec. IN RECOVERY CLEAN: IN RECOVERY CLEAN: IN RECOVERY CLEAN:
Mixing Frequency - as per OSC. - setpoint is mixing duration with air in extended soak step. - as per OSC.
64 - aerates the membrane tank for 20-KQS-301Q seconds every 20-KQS-
301R seconds. Starts step with no mixing.
20-HMS-210C-x Button Extended Soak Mixing Disable Button Sequence Recovery Clean When the button is selected When the button is selected there is not intermittent aeration in the soak
64
step of Recovery Clean
20-HMS-210C-x Button Extended Soak Mixing Enable Button Sequence Recovery Clean When the button is selected When the button is selected there is intermittent aeration in the soak step of
64
Recovery Clean
65 Neutralization System
20-KQS-201J Setpoint Neutralization Aeration Step Timer Sequence Neutralization 5 900 60 sec. IN NEUTRALIZATION: IN NEUTRALIZATION:
64
Consult the OSC, Neutralization steps, for details.
20-KQS-301U Setpoint Neutralization Soak Duration Sequence Neutralization 5 1200 900 sec. IN NEUTRALIZATION: IN NEUTRALIZATION:
64
20-KQS-110C Setpoint Inlet Gate Opening Duration Sequence Neutralization 5 120 60 sec. IN SHUTDOWN, NEUTRALIZATION, DRAIN: IN SHUTDOWN, NEUTRALIZATION, DRAIN:
64
Consult the OSC, shutdown, Neutralization, drain steps, for details.
20-KQS-110D Setpoint Inlet Gate Stop Sending the Open Signal Sequence Neutralization 5 360 100 sec. IN STANDBY, SHUTDOWN, NEUTRALIZATION, IN STANDBY, SHUTDOWN, NEUTRALIZATION, DRAIN:
Frequency DRAIN: - steps as noted in the OSC, this is the steps duration.
64
- steps as noted in the OSC.
Consult the OSC, shutdown, Neutralization, drain steps, for details.
20-HMS-201V-x Button RESUME NEUTRALIZATION Button Sequence Neutralization IN NEUTRALIZATION: IN NEUTRALIZATION:
When the button is pressed. - steps as per OSC, proceeds according to the OSC.
64
20-HMS-201W-x Button CONFIRM NEUTRALIZATION Button Sequence Neutralization IN NEUTRALIZATION: IN NEUTRALIZATION:
When the button is pressed. - steps as per OSC, proceeds to next step.
64
65 DRAIN
Page 21 of 23
Notification
ZenoTrac®
Shutdown
Range Range
Callout
Min Max
20-KQS-201N Setpoint Drain Aeration Step Timer Sequence Neutralization 900 1800 900 sec. IN DRAIN: IN DRAIN:
64
20-KQS-301H Setpoint Frequency of Backpulse During Drain Sequence Neutralization 600 1800 900 sec. IN DRAIN: IN DRAIN:
64
70 Vacuum System
20-FV-802-x Button Vacuum Ejector Compressed Air Valve Valve Vacuum AUTO: When the valve called to open then the PLC energizes discrete output to
70
MANUAL:
Supervisor.
20-PAH-301A-x Alarm Re-Priming Pressure High Pressure Vacuum 4.0 9.0 9.0 psig IN ALL MODES: IN ALL MODES: When the ON button is pressed. Y Y Y
- when the compressed air ejector valve is - closes the ejector valves then proceeds to SHUTDOWN - step 1.
70
requested open and the pressure, 20-PI-301-x, is
at or above this setpoint with no time delay. Displays on alarm banner "Priming Aborted"
20-KS-802A Setpoint Train Ejector Operating Frequency - Sequence Vacuum 4 120 8 min. Operator entered value used as a Master Ejector Cycle Timer.
Master Ejector Cycle Timer Setpoint sets the frequency for ejector operation for each train.
Ejector for train X operates every 20-KS-802A seconds.
Master Ejector Cycle Timer starts once any train is in STANDBY step 3 and
continues while there is at least one train in STANDBY step 3 or in
PRODUCTION step 2. When there are no trains in these steps, the cycle
70 timer stops.
Train # ejector opens at time = # x 20-KS-802B, of the Master Ejector Cycle

Timer as follows:
Train 1 ejector opens at start time = 1 x 20-KS-802B
etc.
20-KS-802B Derived Ejector Operating Interval - time between Sequence Vacuum sec. Derived setpoint is the ejector operation interval between any two trains.
operating any two ejectors This time is used to determine when to trigger an ejector to operate in the
Master Ejector Cycle Timer, as described in 20-KS-802A.
70
20-KS-802B seconds = 60 sec. x 20-KS-802A / (# of trains installed)
20-KS-802C-x Setpoint Train Ejector Open Duration Sequence Vacuum 5 30 15 sec. IN STANDBY step 3, & PRODUCTION step 2: Operator entered value.
- When ejector is required to operate according to Ejector opens for this duration.
70
the start time calculated in 20-KS-802A
This is a plant setpoint.
75 Treated Water System
20-FCY-201A Derived Plant Permeate Flow Demand Flow Plant Permeate 0 3098 gpm Plant Flow Demand = Moving Average Feed Flow + Trim Factor from
average Membrane Tk. Level
20-FCY-201A = 16-FXI-401 + 20-FCY-201B
75 Where: 20-FCY-201B = (Trim Factor from Membrane Tk Level )

Where the water accumulates in the plant, is the location the level trim is
calculated.
The peak flow equals 3098 gpm
The overall plant flow demand used to calculate the net permeate flow 20-
FCY-301A-x.
20-FIY-301 Derived Plant Permeate Flow Flow Plant Permeate 0 3700 gpm IN PRODUCTION and BACKPULSE:
75 - all steps, totalizes permeate flows (Sum of 20-FI-301-x) minus backpulse
flow (Sum of 20-FI-601-x).
20-FQI-301C Derived Today's Plant Production Volume Volume Plant Permeate -10000 1000000000 gal IN PRODUCTION: At midnight after current value is put into 20-FQI-
75
- all steps, totalizes permeate volumes from each train. 301D.
75 20-FQI-301D Derived Yesterday's Plant Production Volume Volume Plant Permeate -10000 1000000000 gal At midnight. Set value to 20-FQI-301C. Y
20-TAT-301 Alarm Plant Permeate Temperature Transmitter Temperature Plant Permeate 0 30 deg. C IN ALL MODES: When the transmitter is in range. Y Y
Out of Range When the transmitter is out of range by 1% of the
calibrated range for 2 seconds.
75
20-TI-301 Analog in Plant Permeate Temperature Temperature Plant Permeate 0 30 deg. C Displays value with engineering units on screen. Y
75
Actual instrument is 20-TE/TIT-301
80 Utility Air System
90-YA-001-x Alarm Air Compressor Fail Compressor Utility Air IN ALL MODES: IN ALL MODES: When the failed signal is no longer present. Y
80
- all steps, when the failed signal is present. - all steps, alarm only. Continues steps.
90-KQI-002 Derived Air Compressor Compressor Utility Air 0 30000 hours IN ALL MODES: IN ALL MODES: When the Reset Run Time button is pressed,
80
Accumulated Run Time When the compressor is operating. Displays accumulated run time for the compressor on the screen. run time resets to 0 hours.
Page 22 of 23
Notification
ZenoTrac®
Shutdown
Range Range
Callout
Min Max
90-PAL-002 Alarm Compressed Air Pressure Low Low Pressure Utility Air IN ALL MODES: IN STANDBY: When 90-PSL-002 is no longer active. Y Y Y
- all steps, when 90-PSL-002 is active for 5 - intermittent aeration and priming is prevented. (the Master Ejector Cycle IN RECOVERY CLEAN & DRAIN:
seconds. Timer is not running) When the pump (recirculation & process pump)
is put back into auto and Fault Timer clears then
IN PRIME, PRODUCTION, BACKPULSE, RELAX (both trains and align valves as per OSC step after a six second
thickener): delay resume step, as shown in the OSC.
- all steps, proceeds to STANDBY - step 1.
IN DRAIN:
- holds step
- all steps, places all operating pumps into man off and after a delay of six
seconds close the valves.
80 Displays, "Thickener will be Shutdown due to active alarm" .
- all steps, proceeds to STANDBY - step 1.
Displays on alarm banner "Maintenance Clean Aborted."
IN RECOVERY CLEAN:
- holds step
- all steps, places pump (process and recirculation/drain pumps) into man
off and after a delay of six seconds closes 20-FV-301-x.
IN NEUTRALIZATION:
- all steps, proceeds to SHUTDOWN - step 1.
Displays on alarm banner "Neutralization Aborted."
85 System Power
20-JAL-001 Alarm Plant Power Failure Plant System Power IN ALL MODES: All trains and thickener proceed to POWER OFF mode. When power is restored. Y Y
- all steps, when the system detects that power is
85
lost for 1.5 seconds. The system blocks all fail safe inputs that are normally closed (to avoid
nuisance alarms).
Interlock Startup Step 1 Startup System Power When the system detects that power is restored. This startup sequence shows the order in which the devices in the plant are
re-enabled after a power interruption or after an system stop button has
been reset.
All trains and thickener proceeds to POWER OFF until power is resumed
and the train/thickener is enabled.
ZeeWeed® trains that were in STANDBY, PRODUCTION,

BACKPULSE/RELAX, or MAINTENANCE CLEAN prior to the power failure,
will proceed to STANDBY - step 1 for train as per the start-up sequence.
ZeeWeed® trains that were in RECOVERY CLEAN, prior to the power
failure, will proceed to SHUTDOWN - step 1 as per the start-up sequence.
85 Displays on alarm banner "Recovery Clean Aborted."
ZeeWeed® trains that were in NEUTRALIZATION, prior to the power
failure, will proceed to SHUTDOWN - step 1 as per the start-up sequence.
Displays on alarm banner "Neutralization Aborted."
Thickener that was in STANDBY, PRODUCTION, BACKPULSE prior to the
power failure, will proceed to STANDBY - step 1 for thickener as per the
start-up sequence.
A delay is provided in each step to allow for devices to start before
advancing to the next step. Steps are skipped for those devices which are n
Allows utility air compressors to run if required.
Allows transmitters to warm up and complete a self diagnostics.
Displays "Power-up Delay" on the screen.
Interlock Startup Step 2 Startup System Power 60 seconds after start of step 1 and 90-PSL-002 Re-enables all common, non-sequenced valves.
85
shows normal pressure.
Interlock Startup Step 3 Startup System Power 30 seconds after the start of the previous step. Allows train 1 to come out of POWER OFF mode. Y
There is no delay if the device in the previous step
85
is not required. Train proceeds to either STANDBY - step 1 or SHUTDOWN - step 1. See
start-up sequence step 1 for more details.
Interlock Startup Step 4 Startup System Power 30 seconds after the start of previous step. Allows train 2 to come out of POWER OFF mode. Y
85
Train proceeds to either STANDBY - step 1 or SHUTDOWN - step 1. See
Interlock Startup Step 5 Startup System Power 30 seconds after the start of previous step. Allows train 3 to come out of POWER OFF mode. Y
85
Train proceeds to either STANDBY - step 1 or SHUTDOWN - step 1. See
Interlock Startup Step 6 Startup System Power 30 seconds after the start of previous step. Allows train/thickener 4 to come out of POWER OFF mode. Y
85 Train/thickener proceeds to either STANDBY - step 1 or SHUTDOWN - step

1. See start-up sequence step 1 for more details.
Page 23 of 23
This page has been
SECTION 6
WARRANTY
This page has been
Warranty Information Sheet
m -fill out Green Highlighted sections before transfer to Service.
Tech Support - fill out Yellow Highlighted sections before transfer A 0 Binder to PM. Include this sheet with every A 0
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
IXI Zenon Standard Proposal Terms Client Specification Terms
Term Details:
WARRANTY TERM: 12 months from Substantial Completion or 18 months from ship
PROCESS GUARANTEE - N/A Biology by Others

Zenon Standard Proposal Terms Client Specification Terms
Term Details:-
GUARANTEE TERM:
DETAILS OF WARRANTY:
MEMBRANE
Zenon Standard Proposal Terms Client Specification Terms
Term Details:-
WARRANTY TERM: Cliff Warranty Term - Length of Cliff term

Prorated Warranty Term - Length of Pro-rated term
GUARANTEED MEMBRANE REPLACEMENT COST: $NONE given IXI USD [7 CDN Other
Unique calculation required for replacement price?
List details
MSRP
MSRP Price List Effective Date
MEMBRANEREPLACEMENT 'OST (No $None given

MEMBRANE COST FOR FUTURE EXPANSION NIA
tXI USD CDN Other
us, ,DN Other
Oakville
PRICE ESCALATION CALCULATION REQUIRED: (XI Yes No
IXI US Bureau of Labour State Specific
Canada
Unique terms:
Maximum Fibre Repairs : (module/cassette/train)
over (montldyearllife)
SERVICE
LEVEL OF ZENOTRAC SERVICE: None
SERVICE CONTRACT: # OF VISITS 0 # OF YEARS 0
I ENF-042 Rev 06 16-Jan-06 This warranty applies to the Originalpurc/mser only, and is non transferable.
This is a summary and requires supporting documentation for each item.
1 of 1
I
This page has been
SECTION 7
RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS
LIST
This page has been
C = CRITICAL
RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS LIST FOR PROJECT NO. 200326 R = RECOMMENDED

M = MAINTENANCE
CS = CONSUMABLES
Item No. Item Qty GE WATER # Tag # Item Details Check List C R M CS
PLEASE NOTE: THIS IS THE MOST CURRENT RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS LIST BASED ON THE BILL OF MATERIAL AT THE TIME OF REQUEST. FOR A FULL CUSTOM PRICED LIST PLEASE ALLOW 1-2 WEEKS FOR
GENERATION.
PUMPS
1 SPARES FOR EJECTOR 1 MAINTENANCE KIT X
"23-P-310
SPARES FOR AIR DIAPHRAGM 23-P-320
2
PUMP
1 DUODOS 15 PVDF
"
PUMP SPARE PARTS KIT X
23-P-110
SPARES FOR PUMP HYPO
3
PUMP SKID
1 HYPO PUMP SKID 23-P-120 PUMP SPARE PARTS KIT X
16-P-801-1
16-P-801-2
4 SPARES FOR RAS PUMP 1 RAS PUMP 16-P-801-3
16-P-801-4
PUMP REPAIR KIT X
20-P-301-1
20-P-301-2
5 SPARES FOR PROCESS PUMP 1 PROCESS PUMP 20-P-301-3
20-P-301-4
PUMP REPAIR KIT X
VALVES
23-FV-131-1 1 1/2" TYPE 233 PNEUMATICALLY ACTUATED VENTED BALL VALVE, PVC, FPM
23-FV-131-2 O-RINGS, FAIL SAFE TO CLOSE PART # S199 233 077 C/W V161 546 356 C/W
6 BALL VALVE 1-1/2" 1 1033705 23-FV-131-3
23-FV-131-4
CSA/UL APPROVED SOLENOID PILOT VALVE 120/60 VAC TYPE PV95
PT#199190555CSA
X
"VALVE, BALL, 1"", TRUE UNION, PVC BODY, TEFLON SEATS, EPDM O-RINGS,
23-FV-331-1 SOCKETWELD, GEORGE FISCHER TYPE 546, C/W PA11 SPRING RETURN FAIL CLOSE
23-FV-331-2 PNEUMATIC RACK AND PINION ACTUATOR PT# 198 150 127, ASSEMBLY PT#
7 BALL VALVE 1" 1 1040026 23-FV-331-3
23-FV-331-4
S199 233 065 C/W TYPE PV95 120V AC SOLENOID VALVE PT# 199 190 555CSA
WITH
X
MANUAL OVERRIDE, CSA/UL APPROVED"
VALVE, BUTTERFLY, BRAY SERIES 31-119, 10" CAST IRON LUG STYLE BODY,
20-FV-301-1 RATED VACUUM TO 50 PSI, UNDERCUT NYLON COATED DISC, SS SHAFT, EPDM
20-FV-301-2 SEAT, BRAY PNEUMATIC RACK AND PINION DOUBLE ACTING ACTUATOR SERIES
8 BUTTERFLY VALVE 10" 1 1041079 20-FV-301-3
20-FV-301-4
92/118, C/W NAMUR DIRECT MOUNT SOLE NOID 110VAC NEMA 4,4X
630250-21520536
X
WITH SPEED CONTROLS; BRAY ASSEMBLY ID 9C100LV119926C.
VALVE, SOLENOID, BURKERT PT# 0290-A-12,O-FF-VA-NM84-120/60-12* PD02,

20-FV-320-1 2-WAY AIR/WATER 1/2" FNPT, SS BODY, VITON
20-FV-320-2 SEAL, NORMALLY CLOSED, 7/16" ORIFICE, Cv-3.3GPM (WATER) OR 110 SCFM
9 SOLENOID VALVE 1 1023781 20-FV-320-3
20-FV-320-4
(AIR), 0 PSI PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL REQUIRED, 0-230 PSI PRESS URE RANGE,
C/W TYPE H ELECTRICAL CONNECTION, IDENTIFICATION # 137943L AND 1/2"
X
FNPT CONDUIT RING ADAPTOR, ASSEMBLY # 454424J.
USA / ZENON Membrane Solutions

CAD / GE Water Process Technologies Canada RSPL200326XMR1.xls 12/10/2009 AC 1 of 6
C = CRITICAL

M = MAINTENANCE
CS = CONSUMABLES
0.5" BURKERT ANGLE SEAT AND SOLENOID VALVE ASSEMBLY

USED FOR VACCON EJECTOR
SYST-2000-463250-6518-CD06041
Type 2000 Piston Valve material # 92707036.
2/2-Ways Normaly Closed
Orifice: 13mm (1/2")
Seal: FKM (viton)
Body: Stainless Steel
10 ANGLE SEAT VALVE 0.5" 1 1033457
Port: NPT 1/2" X
Actautor: PA
Actuator Size: 50mm
FLOW ABOVE SEAT
VACUUM VERSION
Type 6518 Pilot Valve
Power Supply: 120 Volts / 60 Hertz / 2 Watts
14 INCH ORBINOX #20-3636R-14-PA FULL KNIFE GATE

VALVE,316SS BODY AND GATE, PTFE IMPREGNATED
SYNTHETIC FIBER PACKING, EPDM SEAT
16-FV-820
C/W PNEUMATIC DOUBLE ACTING CYLINDER,
11 KNIFE GATE VALVE 14" 1 KN GATE DA 14IN 16-FV-821
BASED ON 80 PSI AIR SUPPLY AND 60 PSI X
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE.DOUBLE ACTING PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR
18 INCH ORBINOX #20-3636R-18-PA FULL KNIFE GATE

20-FV-501-1 VALVE,316SS BODY AND GATE, PTFE IMPREGNATED
20-FV-501-2 SYNTHETIC FIBER PACKING, EPDM SEAT,
12 KNIFE GATE VALVE 18" 1 KN GATE DA 18IN 20-FV-501-3
20-FV-501-4
C/W 10” BORE PNEUMATIC DOUBLE ACTING
CYLINDER, BASED ON 80 PSI AIR SUPPLY AND 30 PSI
X
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE.
BUTTERFLY VALVE, LUG, HIGH PERFORMANCE, 10", TYCO, K-LOK

PT#F362-105-K-LOK, ANSI 150#, 316SS LUG STYLE BODY, 316SS DISC,
17-4pH,SS STEM, RTFE SEAT,FIBERGLASS RTFE IMPREGNATED BUSHINGS, C/W
20-FV-210-1
MORIN SERIES B-036 DA, DOUBLE ACTING PNEUMATIC A CTUATOR SCOTCH YOKE
20-FV-210-2
STYLE, DUCTILE IRON ACTUATOR BODY AND END CAPS, SS CYLINDER C/W
20-FV-210-3
WESTLOCK QUANTUM POSITION MONITOR PT# 765-N-BY-1A-2M06-00-A-36-0-L,
20-FV-210-4
1/2" CONDUIT ENTRY, C/W WITH BUILT-IN 120VAC SOLENOID ENERGIZED TO
13 CYCLIC VALVE 10" 1 1033379 20-FV-211-1
20-FV-211-2
CLOSE, MANUAL OVE RRIDE, POWER LOSS OPENS, TWO SPDT MAGNUM PROXIMITY X
SWITCHES 3A @ 120VAC, NEMA 4, 4,4X, C/W ASCO SERIES 112, 1/4" NPT
20-FV-211-3
FILTER/REGULATOR WITH PRESSURE GAUGE, PT# 34203089, 25 MICRON FILTER
20-FV-211-4
WITH BOWL PROTECTOR, SEMI-AUTO DRAIN, PRESSURE CONT ROL RANGE 7-145 PSI,
COMES ASSEMBLED WITH TWO DELTROL 1/4" INLINE SPEED CONTROLS & TWO
PARKER ES25MB MUFFLERS FOR NOISE REDUCTION.
INSTRUMENTS
16-PI-801-1
16-PI-801-2
16-PI-801-3
PRESSURE GAUGE, ASHCROFT PT# 100-1008SL-04L 15PSI, SS CASE 100MM DIAL
16-PI-801-4
(4"), 0-15 PSI (DUAL SCALE PSI & kPa) 1/2" LOWER CONNECTION, GLYCERINE
14 PRESSURE GAUGE 1 1023426 16-PI-802-1
16-PI-802-2
FILLED, 3-2-3% ASME GR B ACCURACY, POLYCARBONATE WINDOW. X
16-PI-802-3
16-PI-802-4
DIAPHRAGM SEAL, TYPE 100, ASHCROFT PT # 15-102SSL-04T-CK-150, ALL CLAMPED, 1 ½” FLANGE

FOR CONNECTION 150#, DIAPHRAGM AND HOUSING OF 316SS, ½” FNPT GAUGE CONNECTION, GUAGE
DIAPHRAGM SEAL FOR ABOVE 16-PI-801-1/2/3/4 MOUNTED WITH SILICONE FLUID FOR PRESSURE APPLICATION.
15
PRESSURE GAUGES
1 1033613
16-PI-802-1/2/3/4 X
20-PI-301-1
20-PI-301-2
20-PI-301-3 PRESSURE GAUGE, ASHCROFT PT# 100-1008SL-04L 30PSI, SS CASE, 100MM DIAL
20-PI-301-4 (4"), 30" MERCURY-30 PSI (DUAL SCALE IN MECURY & PSI/kPa) 1/2" LOWER
16 PRESSURE GAUGE 1 1023462 20-PI-302-1
20-PI-302-2
CONNECTION, GLYCERINE FILLED, 3-2-3% ASME GR B ACCURACY, POLYCARBONATE
WINDOW.
X
20-PI-302-3
20-PI-302-4

C = CRITICAL

M = MAINTENANCE
CS = CONSUMABLES
20-PSH-601-1
20-PSH-601-2
20-PSH-601-3
20-PSH-601-4
20-PSH-602-1
20-PSH-602-2
20-PSH-602-3
20-PSH-602-4
PRESSURE SWITCH,U.E. PT# J6-S134B-M201-M444,30"HG VAC-20PSI,1/2" FNPT,
SETPOINT: 9 PSI INCREASING
NO REFERENCE DIAL,316SS BELLOWS,FACTORY SET, PAPER ID TAG,ONE SPDT
17 PRESSURE SWITCH HIGH 1 1010914
20-PSH-301-1
RELAY (15A),0.2-0.8"HG FIXED DEAD BAND,25 PSI PROOF PRESS.,NEMA 4X,
ALUMINUM BODY,+-1% REPEATABLITY.
X
20-PSH-301-2
20-PSH-301-3
20-PSH-301-4
20-PSH-302-1
20-PSH-302-2
20-PSH-302-3
20-PSH-302-4
SETP OINT: 20 PSI INCREASING
90-PSL-002 PRESSURE SWITCH,U.E. PT# H100-270-M201-M444,4-200 PSI,1/4"FNPT,WITH

REFERENCE SCALE,PHOSPHOR BRONZE BELLOWS,FACTORY SET,PAPER ID TAG,ONE
18 PRESSURE SWITCH LOW 1 1010917 SETPOINT=70 PSIG
DECREASING
SPDT RELAY (15A),1-4 PSI FIXED DEAD BRAND,250 PSI PROOF PRESS.,NEMA 4X
ALUMINUM BODY,+-1% REPEATABLITY.
X
20-LSL-201B-1
20-LSL-201B-2
20-LSL-201B-3 SWITCH, LEVEL, MJK PT# 202810, MODEL 7030, CABLE SUSPENDED 4" Ø FLOAT,
20-LSL-201B-4 POLYPROPYLENE HOUSING, 39 FT LONG OIL RESISTANT PVC CABLE, 120VAC OR
19 LEVEL SWITCH LOW 1 1032157 20-LSLL-201C-1
20-LSLL-201C-2
220VAC, 1PH/60Hz, -20oC to 60oC OPERATING TEMPERATURE X
20-LSLL-201C-3
20-LSLL-201C-4
SWITCH FLOW, KOBOLD PT# KAL-8115-C,3.3-66 FT/SEC VELOCITY RANGE,

0.5"MNPT PROC. CONNECTION, Ni-PLATED BRASS WETTED PARTS, NYLON HOUSING,
20-FSL-201-1
8-LED FLOW TREND, 2-COLOUR LED SWITCH STATUS, NEMA 4, 0.5"NPT CONDUIT
20-FSL-201-2
CONNECTION, 24V DC POWER SUPPLY, 1-SPDT SWITCH, 120 PSIG MAX. OPERATING
20 FLOW SWITCH LOW 1 1022883 20-FSL-201-3
20-FSL-201-4
PRESSURE, -10 TO +250 DEGREE F. PROCESS TEMPERATURE, +/-1% X
REPRODUCIBILITY, UP TO 60 SEC. TIME DELAY START UP, CSA APPROVAL IS
REQUIRED.
LEVEL SWITCH FLOAT, KOBOLD PT# NCK-2554, 20' CALBE W/ PVC JACKET, 1/8"
23-LSL-101
NPT TOP MOUNTED CONNECTION, 1" X 1" FLOAT. KYNAR, 204 VAC AC/DC @ 0.5
21 LEVEL FLOAT SWITCH 1 1028356 23-LSL-301
AMPS. X
TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER, 0-50 DEGREE C., ENDRESS & HAUSER PT#
TR11-A2ACESY43000 WITH TMT180 TRANSMITTER, PT100 CLASS B RTD, 75MM
INSERTION LENGTH, 316SS STRAIGHT TIP THERMOWELL WITH 3/4" MNPT PROCESS
20-TW/TIT-301
22 TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER 1 1022657 CONNECTION, 4-20mA 2-WIRE ANALOG FIXE D RANGE OUTPUT, 10-36 VDC LOOP
POWERED,COATED ALUMINUM IP55 HOUSING, 1/2" NPT CONDUIT ENTRY, GREATER
X
OF 0.1% MEASURING RANGE OR 0.1 DEGREE C. ACCURACY.
TRANSMITTER, PRESSURE, E&H PT# CERABAR-S PMC71-UAC1KBRAAAA, ALUMINUM

HOUSING W/ 1/2" NPT PROCESS CONNECTION, CAPACITIVE WETTED SENSOR W/
20-PIT-301-1
CERAMIC DIAPHRAGM: 2 BAR G, 200 KPA, 30 PSIG10X OVERLOAD PROOF.
20-PIT-301-2
LINEARITY = +/- 0.1%, TURNDOWN= 100 :1, HIGH RELIABILITY, 4-20 mA HART
20-PIT-301-3
OUTPUT W/ LINEARISATION & LCD DISPLAY, CSA CL. I II III, DIV 1, GROUP
23 PRESSURE TANSMITTER 1 1026612 20-PIT-301-4
A-G. X
RANGE: -15 TO 15 PSIG
RANGE TO BE SPECIFIED IN THE BOM TEXT.
"FLOW TRANSMITTER AND SENSOR,MAGMETER,ENDRESS & HAUSER PROMAG

10P2F-EL0A1RA0B4AA,TEFLON LINER, 10"",150# ANSI FLANGE
20-FIT-301-1
CONNECTIONS,ACCURACY 0.5% ,MICROPROCESSOR CONTROLLED,SELF-MONITORING,
20-FIT-301-2
PULSED DC FILED,316SS MEASURING/GROUNDING/EMPTY-PIP E DETECTION
20-FIT-301-3
ELECTRODES,DISPLAY WITH PUSH BUTTON CONTROL,85-260 VAC 50/60Hz
24 FLOW TRANSMITTER 10" 1 1029518 20-FIT-301-4
POWER,NEMA 4X, X
,FREQUENCY AND CURRENT (4-20mA)/HART OUTPUTS,CSA CLASS 1 DIV 2 GROUPS
RANGE 4-20 mA 0-2000 GPM
ABCD
APPROVAL."

C = CRITICAL

M = MAINTENANCE
CS = CONSUMABLES
"FLOW TRANSMITTER AND SENSOR,MAGMETER,ENDRESS & HAUSER PROMAG

16-FIT-801-1 10P3F-EL0A1RA0B4AA,TEFLON LINER, 14"",150# ANSI FLANGE
16-FIT-801-2 CONNECTIONS,ACCURACY 0.5% ,MICROPROCESSOR CONTROLLED,SELF-MONITORING,
16-FIT-801-3 PULSED DC FILED,316SS MEASURING/GROUNDING/EMPTY-PIP E DETECTION
16-FIT-801-4 ELECTRODES,DISPLAY WITH PUSH BUTTON CONTROL,85-260 VAC 50/60Hz
25 FLOW TRANSMITTER 14" 1 1029520
POWER,NEMA 4X, X
RANGE 4-20mA ,FREQUENCY AND CURRENT (4-20mA)/HART OUTPUTS,CSA CLASS 1 DIV 2 GROUPS
FROM 0-2500 GPM ABCD
APPROVAL."
E&H VIBRATION LEVEL SWITCH, COMPACT, PT# FTL20-3314, CSA GENERAL

20-LSL-302
PURPOSE, 3/4" NPT, 316SS, HOUSING 316SS, 1/2" NPT ELECTRICAL CONN, 2
26 LEVEL SWITCH LOW 1 1030578 20-LSL-303
WIRE OUTPUTS, 19…253VAC, CABLE ENTRY IP65. X
20-LIT-201A-1 TRANSMITTER, LEVEL, E&H PT# DELTAPILOT-S DB51A-TG32FC11GE3A, 316L 3"
20-LIT-201A-2 150# ANSI FLANGE PROCESS CONNECTION, TRANSMITTER FOR HYDROSTATIC LEVEL
20-LIT-201A-3 MEASUREMENT, TUBE (ROD) VERSION FOR MOUNTING IN TANKS, FLUSH MOUNTED
20-LIT-201A-4 CONTITE-SENSOR W/ METALLIC D IAPHRAGM ALLOY C4, HERMETICALLY WELDED.
27 LEVEL TRANSMITTER 1 1030631
ROD LENGTH = 160 INCH
CSA, CL. 1, DIV 2, GROUP A-D. MEASURING RANGE: 0-15 PSIG. CELL W/
LINEARITY < 0.2%, SILICON FILL & VITON SEAL. LOOP POWERED 4-20 mA W/
X
RANGE 4-20mA from 0 to 160 INCH DISPLAY, HART PROT. 316l SS NEMA 4X HOUSING W/ 1/2"" CON DUIT
SG = 1 CONNECTION.
20-AE/AIT-320-1
20-AE/AIT-320-2
SPARE LAMP FOR ON-LINE 20-AE/AIT-320-3
28
TURBIDIMETER
1 1022882
20-AE/AIT-320-4
SPARE LAMP FOR ON-LINE TURBIDIMETER. X
20-AE/AIT-320-1
20-AE/AIT-320-2
SPARE PHOTOCELL FOR ON- 20-AE/AIT-320-3
29
LINE TURBIDIMETER
1 1027420
20-AE/AIT-320-4
SPARE PHOTOCELL FOR ON-LINE TURBIDIMETER. X
STABLCAL STABILIZED FORMAZIN CALIBRATION SOLUTION, HACH,PT #26601-53,

30 CALIBRATION SOLUTION 1L 4 1028119 For Turbidimater INCLUDES 1L OF 20 NTU STABLCAL STANDARD (CALIBRATION CYLINDER
REQUIRED). FOR SINGLE CALIBRATION ONLY.
X X
MISCELLANEOUS
STRAUB COUPLING, NON-RESTRAINT, FLEX 1L, F1L 3" IPS, E, 316L SS CASING,
LP & INSERT, 3.7" LONG, 3" NOM INNER DIAMETER (88.9
MM), 5.4" OUTER DIAMETER, 1 PC, PRESSURE RATING: 232 PSI,
316L SS FULL VACUUM RATED STRIP INSERT EPDM SEALING SLE EVE, 2 X BOLTS,
31 COUPLING 3" 14 1027929
M8, 5.5 FT.LB, X
MAX PIPE GAP 1".
STRAUB COUPLING, NON-RESTRAINT, FLEX 1L, F1L 6" IPS, E, 316L SS CASING,
LP & INSERT,
4.21" LONG, 6" NOM INNER DIAMETER (168.3 MM), 7.5" OUTER DIAMETER, 1 PC
PRESSURE
32 COUPLING 6" 7 1027931
RATING: 232 PSI, 316L SS FULL VACUUM RATED STRIP INSERT EPDM SEALING X
SLEEVE, 2 X BOLTS, M10, 7.5 FT.LB.
SPARES FOR - COALESCING

90-F-020
33 PREFILTER FOR COMPRESSED
AIR
1 FILTER ELEMENT X X
FILTER ONLY FOR - FILTER, COMPRESSED AIR, GENERAL PURPOSE, 40 MICRON
F-9200-1
ELEMENT, 1/4" NPTF CONNECTIONS, C/W SIGHT GAUGE AND TWIST DRAIN, METAL
34 40 MICRON FILTER 2 F-9200-2
BOWL X X
90-PY-001
40 MICRON ELEMENT, 0-250 PSI RANGE, C/W GAUGE. RATED FOR
35 SPARES FOR - PRV COMP AIR 1 PRV COMP AIR
SETPOINT = 80 PSIG X X
Great Lakes Model GRF-100A-116 Refrigerated Dryer
Complete with:
90-DR-001-1
Stainless Steel Coolers, Low Ambient Head Master Control,
36 AIR DRYER 1 AIR DRYER 90-DR-001-2
NEMA4 Electrics, Crankcase heater, X
High/Low Refrigerant Pressure Cut Out with Manual Reset.

C = CRITICAL

M = MAINTENANCE
CS = CONSUMABLES
90-F-001-1
90-AC-001-1
90-TK001-1
90-PSV-001-1
90-FV-001-1
90-HV-001-1
90-PI-001-1
37 SPARES FOR AIR COMPRESSOR 2 AIR COMPRESSOR
90-F-001-2
SPARE PARTS KIT X X
90-AC-001-2
90-TK001-2
90-PSV-001-2
90-FV-001-2
90-HV-001-2
90-PI-001-2
20-B-201-1
20-B-201-2
SPARES FOR MEMBRANE
38
BLOWER
4 MEMBRANE BLOWER 20-B-201-3
20-B-201-4
AIR FILTER & BELT SET X X
ZEE-WEED Membrane Spares
REQUIRED FOR REGULAR CASSETTE & MEMBRANE MAINTENANCE.
ZW500D V2.1.3 KIT INCLUDES: INTERCONNECTION STRIP, O-RINGS, BOLTS, NUTS, WASHERS, MODULE RELEASE TOOL,
39
CASSETTE SPARE PARTS KIT
1 1029418
LOCKING KEYS. X
ZW 500D Module Permeate
40
Adapter
1 1028578 SINGLE MODULE ADAPTER FOR FLUSHING/BUBBLE TESTING X
41 ZW500D REMOVAL TOOL 1 1032836 ZW500D MDL REMOVAL TOOL(REV5-NOV2007) X
ZW500D, DUMMY ELEMENT, TOP AND BOTTOM FILLED WITH URETHANE
42 ZW500D Blank Header 1 1029083 X
PORTABLE INSTRUMENTS FOR TESTING THE INTEGRITY OF ZEEWEED MEMBRANES. THE UNIT
INCLUDES A HIGH ACCURACY DIGITAL PRESSURE DISPLAY, A PRECISION AIR REGULATOR WITH
Bubble/Pressure Decay Test
43
Kit
1 1023613 PRESET UPPER LIMIT PRIMARY. PROTECTION AT 8 PSI, A SECONDARY AIR RELIEF PROTECTION VALVE,
COALESCING AIR FILTER, STAINLESS STEEL CASING WITH HANDLE, 20 FEET OF 1/4 TUBING, 2X3" AND
X
2X4" CAMLOCK END CAPS EACH WITH A 1/4" FEMALE QUICK CONNECT.
( 4 ) 20cc SYRINGE, ( 10 ) NEEDLES (PURPLE), ( 5 ) 22G NEEDLES, SILICONE ( SHELF LIFE OF 6 MONTHS ),
44 Fiber Repair Kit 1 1022887
SCISSORS 4 1/2", ( 2 ) GLOVES. X X
45 Silicone Dispensing Gun 1 1025796 FOR USE WITH FIBER REPAIR KIT. X
Pneumatic Silicone Injection
Compressed Air Injection Gun (requires 10cc barrels)
46 Tool
(LITTLE JOE)
1 1028260 *Option to above Item* X
Membrane Maintenance
47
Station - Tank
1 1027906 PLASTIC WORK TANK WITH METAL STAND X
48
Station - Pump Kit
1 1027907 SKID MOUNTED - PUMP FOR FLUSHING/PRESERVING MODULES X
49
Station - Hose Kit
1 1027908 3 HOSE SECTIONS FOR CONNECTION PUMP KIT TO MODULES X
50
Station - Work Tray
1 1027985 SLIDING TRAY FOR TOP OF TANK X

C = CRITICAL

M = MAINTENANCE
CS = CONSUMABLES
TTF IS AN ANALYTICAL TEST PARAMETER THAT PROVIDES CRITICAL DATA ON THE FILTERABILITY
OF MIXED LIQUOR BIOREACTOR SLUDGE
LAB EQUIPMENT PACKAGE
(1) CERAMIC BUCHNER FUNNEL 100 MM DIAMETER (1) ERLENMEYER SUCTION 1000ML SUCTION
TIME TO FILTER KIT FLASK
51
LAB EQUIPMENT
1 1030547 FOR WASTE WATER
(1) FILTER PAPERS, GLASS MICRO-FIBRE, 9CM, BOX OF 100 (1) GRADUATED CYLINDER 100 ML PLASTIC X
(1) RUBBER STOPPER 1 HOLE, # 8, PACK OF 12 (1) BEAKER 250 ML, PLASTIC (1) POCKET THERMOMETER
0-120F
(1) STOPWATCH
VACUUM PUMP EQUIPMENT

(1) VACUUM PUMP; 120 VAC/60 HZ OR 250 VAC/50 HZ (1) VACUUM REGULATOR, 0 TO 29" HG,
2.47CFM WITH GAUGE
TIME TO FILTER KIT
52
VACUUM PUMP
1 1030548 FOR WASTE WATER (1) MALE PIPE ADAPTER, POLYETHYLENE, 1/8" X 1/4", (1) REDUCER BUSHING, 3/8X1/8, THREAD X
THREAD, NYLON
X
(1) NIPPLE 1/8"X1" NPT(M) X NPT(M), 316SS (6) FEET OF 1/4" PLASTIC TUBE
TIME TO FILTER KIT

53
FILTER PAPERS
1 1030539 FILTER PAPERS, GLASS MICRO-FIBRE, 9CM, BOX OF 100 X X
DELIVERY TIME AVERAGES
PLC, INSTRUMENTS - 4 - 6 WEEKS TRANSMITTERS 8 - 12 WEEKS

MEMBRANE SPARES - STOCK - 2 WEEKS GAUGES, VALVES, SWITCHES - 4 - 6 WEEKS
FILTERS BELTS - STOCK - 2 WEEKS PUMPS, BLOWERS, MIXERS ETC - 8 - 12 WEEKS
TERMS:
QUOTATION #
FCA OAKVILLE, ONTARIO CANADA
PAYMENT TERMS: TE BE NEGOTIATED AT A LATER DATE
PRICES ARE VALID 30 DAYS.

ONCE A SPARE IS USED. IT SHOULD BE REPLACED IN INVENTORY
FREIGHT, TAXES AND DUTIES EXTRA WHERE APPLICABLE
DELIVERY VARIES FROM STOCK TO 12 WEEKS
LIST COMPLETED BY ALEX CAVICCHI - 24 NOV 2009
PHONE # 905-465-3030 EXT 3383

EMAIL: alex.cavicchi@ge.com

SECTION 8
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA
SHEETS
This page has been
GLYCEROL Page 1 of 7
MSDS Number: G4774 * * * * * Effective Date: 05/25/05 * * * * * Supercedes: 08/10/04
GLYCEROL
1. Product Identification
Synonyms: 1,2,3-propanetriol; glycerin; glycol alcohol; glycerol, anhydrous
CAS No.: 56-81-5
Molecular Weight: 92.10
Chemical Formula: C3H5(OH)3
Product Codes:
J.T. Baker: 2135, 2136, 2140, 2142, 2143, 2988, 4043, M778
Mallinckrodt: 0564, 5092, 5093, 5100
2. Composition/Information on Ingredients
Ingredient CAS No Percent Hazardous

--------------------------------------- ------------ ------------ ---------
Glycerin 56-81-5 90 - 100% Yes
3. Hazards Identification
Emergency Overview
--------------------------
http://www.jtbaker.com/msds/englishhtml/G4774.htm 8/26/2005
CAUTION! MAY CAUSE IRRITATION TO SKIN, EYES, AND RESPIRATORY

TRACT. MAY AFFECT KIDNEYS.
SAF-T-DATA(tm) Ratings (Provided here for your convenience)

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Health Rating: 2 - Moderate (Life)
Flammability Rating: 1 - Slight
Reactivity Rating: 0 - None
Contact Rating: 1 - Slight
Lab Protective Equip: GOGGLES; LAB COAT; VENT HOOD; PROPER GLOVES
Storage Color Code: Green (General Storage)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Potential Health Effects

----------------------------------
Inhalation:
Due to the low vapor pressure, inhalation of the vapors at room temperatures is unlikely.
Inhalation of mist may cause irritation of respiratory tract.
Ingestion:
Low toxicity. May cause nausea, headache, diarrhea.
Skin Contact:
May cause irritation.
Eye Contact:
May cause irritation.
Chronic Exposure:
May cause kidney injury.
Aggravation of Pre-existing Conditions:
Persons with pre-existing skin disorders or eye problems or impaired liver or kidney
function may be more susceptible to the effects of the substance.
4. First Aid Measures

Inhalation:
Remove to fresh air. Get medical attention for any breathing difficulty.
Ingestion:
Induce vomiting immediately as directed by medical personnel. Never give anything by
mouth to an unconscious person. Get medical attention.
Skin Contact:
Immediately flush skin with plenty of water for at least 15 minutes. Remove contaminated
clothing and shoes. Wash clothing before reuse. Thoroughly clean shoes before reuse. Get
medical attention if irritation develops.
Eye Contact:
Immediately flush eyes with plenty of water for at least 15 minutes, lifting upper and lower
eyelids occasionally. Get medical attention if irritation persists.
5. Fire Fighting Measures

Fire:
Flash point: 199C (390F) CC
Autoignition temperature: 370C (698F)
Slight fire hazard when exposed to heat or flame. Slight fire hazard when exposed to heat or
flame.
Explosion:
Above flash point, vapor-air mixtures may cause flash fire.
Fire Extinguishing Media:
Use any means suitable for extinguishing surrounding fire. Water spray may be used to
extinguish surrounding fire and cool exposed containers. Water spray will also reduce fume
and irritant gases.
Special Information:
In the event of a fire, wear full protective clothing and NIOSH-approved self-contained
breathing apparatus with full facepiece operated in the pressure demand or other positive
pressure mode.
6. Accidental Release Measures

Ventilate area of leak or spill. Wear appropriate personal protective equipment as specified
in Section 8. Contain and recover liquid when possible. Collect liquid in an appropriate
container or absorb with an inert material (e. g., vermiculite, dry sand, earth), and place in a
chemical waste container. Do not use combustible materials, such as saw dust. Do not flush
to sewer!
7. Handling and Storage

Keep in a tightly closed container, stored in a cool, dry, ventilated area. Protect against
physical damage. Isolate from incompatible substances. Containers of this material may be
hazardous when empty since they retain product residues (vapors, liquid); observe all
warnings and precautions listed for the product.
8. Exposure Controls/Personal Protection

Airborne Exposure Limits:
For Glycerin Mist:
- OSHA Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL):
Total Dust: 15 mg/m3 (TWA);
Respirable Fraction: 5 mg/m3(TWA).
- ACGIH Threshold Limit Value (TLV):
10 mg/m3
Ventilation System:
A system of local and/or general exhaust is recommended to keep employee exposures
below the Airborne Exposure Limits. Local exhaust ventilation is generally preferred
because it can control the emissions of the contaminant at its source, preventing dispersion
of it into the general work area. Please refer to the ACGIH document, Industrial
Ventilation, A Manual of Recommended Practices, most recent edition, for details.
Personal Respirators (NIOSH Approved):
If the exposure limit is exceeded and engineering controls are not feasible, a half facepiece
particulate respirator (NIOSH type P95 or R95 filters) may be worn for up to ten times the
exposure limit or the maximum use concentration specified by the appropriate regulatory
agency or respirator supplier, whichever is lowest.. A full-face piece particulate respirator
(NIOSH type P100 or R100 filters) may be worn up to 50 times the exposure limit, or the
maximum use concentration specified by the appropriate regulatory agency, or respirator
supplier, whichever is lowest. Please note that N filters are not recommended for this
material. For emergencies or instances where the exposure levels are not known, use a full-
facepiece positive-pressure, air-supplied respirator. WARNING: Air-purifying respirators
do not protect workers in oxygen-deficient atmospheres.
Skin Protection:
Wear protective gloves and clean body-covering clothing.
Eye Protection:
Use chemical safety goggles. Maintain eye wash fountain and quick-drench facilities in
work area.
9. Physical and Chemical Properties

Appearance:
Clear oily liquid.
Odor:
Odorless.
Solubility:
Miscible in water.
Specific Gravity:
1.26 @ 20C/4C
pH:
(neutral to litmus)
% Volatiles by volume @ 21C (70F):
0
Boiling Point:
290C (554F)
Melting Point:
18C (64F)
Vapor Density (Air=1):
3.17
Vapor Pressure (mm Hg):
0.0025 @ 50C (122F)
Evaporation Rate (BuAc=1):
No information found.
10. Stability and Reactivity

Stability:
Stable under ordinary conditions of use and storage.
Hazardous Decomposition Products:
Toxic gases and vapors may be released if involved in a fire. Glycerin decomposes upon
heating above 290C, forming corrosive gas (acrolein).
Hazardous Polymerization:
Will not occur.
Incompatibilities:
Strong oxidizers. Can react violently with acetic anhydride, calcium oxychloride, chromium
oxides and alkali metal hydrides.
Conditions to Avoid:
Heat, flames, ignition sources and incompatibles.
11. Toxicological Information
Oral rat LD50: 12,600 mg/kg. Investigated as a mutagen, reproductive effector.
--------\Cancer Lists\------------------------------------------------------
---NTP Carcinogen---
Ingredient Known Anticipated IARC Category
------------------------------------ ----- ----------- -------------
Glycerin (56-81-5) No No None
12. Ecological Information

Environmental Fate:
When released into the soil, this material is expected to readily biodegrade. When released
into the soil, this material is not expected to evaporate significantly. When released into
water, this material is expected to readily biodegrade. This material is not expected to
significantly bioaccumulate. When released into the air, this material may be moderately
degraded by reaction with photochemically produced hydroxyl radicals. When released into
the air, this material may be removed from the atmosphere to a moderate extent by wet
deposition.
Environmental Toxicity:
This material is not expected to be toxic to aquatic life.
13. Disposal Considerations
Whatever cannot be saved for recovery or recycling should be managed in an appropriate

and approved waste disposal facility. Processing, use or contamination of this product may
change the waste management options. State and local disposal regulations may differ from
federal disposal regulations. Dispose of container and unused contents in accordance with
federal, state and local requirements.
14. Transport Information

Not regulated.
15. Regulatory Information

--------\Chemical Inventory Status - Part 1\---------------------------------
Ingredient TSCA EC Japan Australia
----------------------------------------------- ---- --- ----- ---------
Glycerin (56-81-5) Yes Yes Yes Yes
--------\Chemical Inventory Status - Part 2\---------------------------------

--Canada--
Ingredient Korea DSL NDSL Phil.
----------------------------------------------- ----- --- ---- -----
Glycerin (56-81-5) Yes Yes No Yes
--------\Federal, State & International Regulations - Part 1\----------------

-SARA 302- ------SARA 313------
Ingredient RQ TPQ List Chemical Catg.
----------------------------------------- --- ----- ---- --------------
Glycerin (56-81-5) No No No No
--------\Federal, State & International Regulations - Part 2\----------------

-RCRA- -TSCA-
Ingredient CERCLA 261.33 8(d)
----------------------------------------- ------ ------ ------
Glycerin (56-81-5) No No No
Chemical Weapons Convention: No TSCA 12(b): No CDTA: No

SARA 311/312: Acute: Yes Chronic: Yes Fire: No Pressure: No
Reactivity: No (Pure / Liquid)
Australian Hazchem Code: None allocated.

Poison Schedule: None allocated.
WHMIS:
This MSDS has been prepared according to the hazard criteria of the Controlled Products
Regulations (CPR) and the MSDS contains all of the information required by the CPR.
16. Other Information

NFPA Ratings: Health: 1 Flammability: 1 Reactivity: 0
Label Hazard Warning:
CAUTION! MAY CAUSE IRRITATION TO SKIN, EYES, AND RESPIRATORY
TRACT. MAY AFFECT KIDNEYS.
Label Precautions:
Avoid breathing mist.
Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothing.
Keep container closed.
Use with adequate ventilation.
Wash thoroughly after handling.
Label First Aid:
If inhaled, remove to fresh air. Get medical attention for any breathing difficulty. In case of
contact, immediately flush eyes or skin with plenty of water for at least 15 minutes. Get
medical attention if irritation develops or persists.
Product Use:
Laboratory Reagent.
Revision Information:
MSDS Section(s) changed since last revision of document include: 3.
Disclaimer:
*******************************************************************************
Mallinckrodt Baker, Inc. provides the information contained herein in good faith but
makes no representation as to its comprehensiveness or accuracy. This document is
intended only as a guide to the appropriate precautionary handling of the material by
a properly trained person using this product. Individuals receiving the information
must exercise their independent judgment in determining its appropriateness for a
particular purpose. MALLINCKRODT BAKER, INC. MAKES NO
REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE WITH
RESPECT TO THE INFORMATION SET FORTH HEREIN OR THE PRODUCT
TO WHICH THE INFORMATION REFERS. ACCORDINGLY, MALLINCKRODT
BAKER, INC. WILL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR DAMAGES RESULTING
FROM USE OF OR RELIANCE UPON THIS INFORMATION.
*******************************************************************************
Prepared by: Environmental Health & Safety

Phone Number: (314) 654-1600 (U.S.A.)
This page has been
SECTION 9
SERVICE & SUPPORT
This page has been
Facility
9.1 INTRODUCTION
This section provides information regarding the various support services
offered by GE W&PT. All service bulletins associated with the SCLA
Industrial Wastewater Treatment Facility ZeeWeed MBR-Ultrafiltration
System are to be inserted at the end of this section.
9.2 CONTACTING GE W&PT SERVICE

Upon subscribing to GE W&PT’s 24/7 technical support service and
activating your customer account, a 4-digit security code will be issued.
Provide this code when contacting the Service Department, which can
be reached at:
PHONE: 1-866-439-8272
EMAIL: GEWater.TechnicalSupport@ge.com
Contact your facility representative for additional information about the

24/7 technical support service and other services provided by GE W&PT.
9.3 MYZENON
TIP: In the event of a MyZENON (www.MyZENON.com) provides an information exchange
lost MyZENON location between GE W&PT and your facility. It is strongly recommended
password, contact the
Service department that the contact information for all facility supervisors be posted and
immediately. regularly updated in order to allow for better support.
Rev. 0 Service & Support

June, 2010 9-1
Facility
9.4 AVAILABLE SERVICES

GE W&PT delivers a comprehensive range of services beyond system
design and installation. Contact the Service Department to enquire
about the following services:
• ZenoTrac* automated process data monitoring and analysis.
• Site visits and equipment audits.
• Training programs.
• 24/7 technical support.
• Emergency call-out support.
• OEM components and consumable products inventory.
• O&M agreements.
• Plant commissioning, optimization, and upgrades.
• System controls support.
• Equipment calibration and preventive maintenance planning.
9.4.1 ZENOTRAC
ZenoTrac is a powerful plant support tool available to those system
owners who choose to subscribe. It provides fully automated process
data monitoring and trend analysis, and stores information in a
centralized database. This information is then presented as a series of
charts and provided to system operators through email, a secure web
site, or as printed reports.
With ZenoTrac, system operators can view trends, solve process

problems quickly, improve plant productivity, reduce the impact of
operator turnover, and manage continuous software enhancements.
Service & Support Rev. 0

9-2 June, 2010
Facility
9.4.2 SITE VISITS

GE W&PT service professionals are on-hand for both emergency service
calls (call-outs) and planned service visits. Areas of plant operation that
they can assist with include instrument calibration, preventive
maintenance planning, process monitoring, and DCS code
modifications. Contact the Service Department and ask them to develop
a service plan tailored to your system.
Emergency call-outs are invoiced based on the Field Services Labor Rate
Sheet, which can be found on MyZENON or obtained by contacting the
Service Department.
9.4.3 TRAINING
Training for all system operators is provided at the time of plant
commissioning. Customized training packages are available. Contact
the Service department for more information.
Rev. 0 Service & Support

June, 2010 9-3
This page has been
SECTION 10
GLOSSARY
This page has been
Facility
10.1 INTRODUCTION
The following sections define acronyms, abbreviations, and terms used
within this manual and the water treatment industry in general.
This glossary is intended to address all aspects of the products and

services offered by GE Water & Process Technologies (GE W&PT), and
may include some information that does not apply to your system.
10.2 ACRONYMS & ABBREVIATIONS

Table 10.1.1 - Acronyms & Abbreviations
Acronym Definition Acronym Definition
BBD Brine Blowdown MLVSS Mixed Liquor Volatile
Suspended Solids
BMU Brine Make-up MMF Multi-Media Filtration
BOD Biological Oxygen Demand MMI Man Machine Interface (see
HMI)
c/w complete with MOV Motor Operated Valve
CaCO3 Calcium Carbonate NaOCl Sodium Hypochlorite
CBD Concentrate Blowdown NaOH Sodium Hydroxide

CEB Chemically Enhanced NH3 Ammonia
Backwash
CIP Clean In Place NO2 Nitrite
CLC Control Logic Chart NO3 Nitrate
COD Chemical Oxygen Demand NTU Nephelometric Turbidity Unit

CPU Central Process Unit O2 Molecular Oxygen
CMU Concentrate Make-Up OI Operator Interface

OIT Operator Interface Terminal
CR Concentrate Recycle OSC Operations Sequence Chart
DCS Distributed Control System OSP Off-Spec Product
DF Dilute Feed OUR oxygen uptake rate
DO Dissolved Oxygen PAC Powdered Activated Carbon
ECIP Electrode Clean In Place P&ID Piping & Instrumentation
Diagram
ED Electrodialysis PDT Pressure Decay Test
Rev. 0 Glossary
June, 2010 10-1
Facility
Table 10.1.1 - Acronyms & Abbreviations

Acronym Definition Acronym Definition
EDI Electrodeionization PC Personal Computer
EDR Electrodialysis Reversal PFD Process Flow Diagram
EF Electrode Feed PID Proportional Integral Derivative
EW Electrode Waste PLC Programmable Logic Controller
ESD Emergency Shutdown POV Pneumatically Operated Valve
E2PROM Electronically Erasable ppb parts per billion

Programmable Read Only
Memory
FeCl3 Ferric Chloride ppm parts per million
GFD Gallons per ft2 per Day

gpm gallons per minute psi pounds per square inch
HCO3 Bicarbonate psid pounds per square inch
differential
H2SO4 Sulfuric Acid psig pounds per square inch gauge
H3PO4 Phosphoric Acid RAS Return Activated Sludge
HMI Human Machine Interface RO Reverse Osmosis

kg/L kilograms per litre SCADA Supervisory Control & Data
Acquisition System
kPa kilo pascals scfm standard cubic feet per minute
L Litre SDI Silt Density Index
LMH Litres/m2 of Membrane Area TDS Total Dissolved Solids
per Hour
LRV Log Removal Value TKN Total Kjeldahl Nitrogen
FeCl3 Ferric Chloride TMP Transmembrane Pressure
GFD Gallons per ft2 per Day USgpm US gallons per minute
LSI Langelier Saturation Index UV Ultraviolet

MCC Motor Control Center VFD Variable Frequency Drive
mg/L milligrams per liter VS Volatile Solids
MIT Membrane Integrity Test VSS Volatile Suspended Solids
MLSS Mixed Liquor Suspended Solids ZW ZeeWeed
Glossary Rev. 0
10-2 June, 2010
Facility
10.3 DEFINITIONS
AC MOTOR Consists of two basic parts: A rotating cylinder called a Rotor and a
stationary part called a Stator. The Stator surrounds the Rotor. It has
coil windings, which produce an alternating magnetic field. This
magnetic field causes current to flow through the Rotor conductors,
resulting in a rotational force. The Rotor spins at a speed proportional
to the frequency of the applied alternating current. The motor rotates
at a set rotation depending on the frequency of the winding
configuration.
ACID A solution having an excess of hydrogen (H+) ions (with a pH of less

than 7.0).
ACTIVATED SLUDGE The floc produced in raw or settled wastewater due to the growth of
bacteria and other organisms in the presence of dissolved oxygen (DO).
ACTUATED VALVE Any valve with an actuator that is controlled by an external command.
ADSORPTION Non-permanent attachment of a particular molecule to a solid

substrate.
ADVISORY ALARM A process alarm, which alerts the operator, that action is needed to
prevent an impending shutdown, or to restore the equipment to a
normal state.
AEROBIC BACTERIA Any bacteria requiring free oxygen for the metabolic breakdown of
material.
AEROBIC ZONE An environment where there is dissolved air or free oxygen.
AIR COMPRESSOR Air compressors provide oil-free, pressurized air for the operation of the
actuated valves and for Membrane Integrity Tests (MITs).
AIR DIAPHRAGM Air diaphragm metering pumps provide chemical dosing at measured
METERING PUMPS rates. This dosing is set manually and it is regulated either by the
amount of compressed air driving the pump or by setting the
backpressure of the pumps.
Rev. 0 Glossary
June, 2010 10-3
Facility
AIR DRYER Air dryers protect pneumatic devices, like valves and air diaphragm
pumps, from damage due to condensation in the compressed air. The
controls on the air dryer allow for adjustment of dew point and
temperature setpoints.
AIR FLOW SWITCH Air flow switches, located in the membrane aeration piping or the
supplemental aeration piping, are used to indicate when a specific flow
rate has been reached for a blower. This flow rate identifies low
aeration to the membranes or bioreactor, triggering an alarm or alert.
AIR RELEASE VALVES Air release valves allow the air to separate from the permeate to
prevent air locks in the permeate piping.
ALARM A visible or audible indication that an operator is expected to take

action to rectify or prevent an abnormal situation. An alarm may be an
operator interface screen message, a pilot light, a buzzer, or another
form of communication to the operator.
ALARM BEACON A visible device for alerting an operator when a new alarm occurs, such
as a flashing or rotating light.
ALERT A warning to the operator that a process or piece of equipment is

operating outside normally accepted limits and requires attention to
prevent the occurrence of an alarm.
ALTERNATION A control scheme for 2 or more pumps or process units in parallel,

where the unit that has been running for the longest time is stopped
first, and the unit that has been in readiness to start for the longest time
is started first.
ALKALINE A solution having an excess of hydroxyl (OH) ions (with pH greater than
7.0).
ALKALINITY A measure of the capacity of water or wastewater to neutralize an

acid. Alkalinity in wastewater results from the presence of carbonate,
bicarbonate, and hydroxide. Alkalinity in water helps to resist changes
in pH caused by the addition of acids. A measure of the amount of
HCO3 present in water, generally expressed as an amount of CaCO3
equivalent.
ANAEROBIC Any bacteria that can survive in partial or complete absence of oxygen
BACTERIA by using molecular oxygen found in nitrates and sulfates.
Glossary Rev. 0
10-4 June, 2010
Facility
ANAEROBIC ZONE An environment where there is an absence of any electron receptor

(nitrate, sulfate or oxygen).
ANALOG An electrical signal that is proportional to the size of the variable being
monitored or controlled. Analog signals in our systems are exclusively
4-20 mA, but an analog signal can be 0-20 mA or 0-10 VDC.
ANION An ion that is negatively charged resulting from the dissociation of

salts, minerals, or acids in water.
ANTISCALANT In membrane systems, a compound added to feed water to increase

concentrations at which scalants will precipitate, thereby increasing
efficiency.
ANOXIC ZONE An environment where there is an absence or deficiency of free

oxygen.
AUTOMATIC FLOW Automatic flow valves are used when regular changes are required in
VALVE the state of the valve (fully open or fully closed only). They are
controlled by the PLC.
AVERAGE OPERATING Average of the module inlet and outlet pressures. Expressed in psi or
PRESSURE FOR RO kPa.
BACK DIFFUSION A phenomenon in which ions will transfer to the demineralized stream
from the concentrate stream against the DC current. This transfer is
due to high concentrations of ions in the concentrate. (EDR)
BACKPULSE A mode of operation in which the flow of permeate is reversed through

the ZeeWeed membrane and directed from the inside of the fibers to
the outside. During backpulse, there is a net flow of solids away from
the membrane surface due to the combined effects of the membrane
aeration and the backpulse of permeate.
BACKWASH (FOR The process of cleaning a filter or membrane by reversing flow of clean
EDI, EDR) water through it.
BACKWASH (FOR An event that takes place regularly throughout the day, consisting of
ZEEWEED 1000) backpulse, tank drain, and aeration.
BACKWASH The channel running along the length of the membrane tank. The
CHANNEL (FOR channel collects water from the troughs in the membrane tank and
ZEEWEED 1000) discharges it to the drain.
Rev. 0 Glossary
June, 2010 10-5
Facility
BACKWASH TMP The change in TMP over a permeation cycle that overrides the
TRIGGER permeation time in order to trigger a backwash.
BACKWASH TROUGH The trough on the side of the membrane tank that collects the water
during a backwash and discharges it to the backwash channel.
BIOCHEMICAL The measurement of the amount of oxygen required by

OXYGEN DEMAND microorganisms to oxidize (eat) the organic matter (food) in the water.
(BOD) This test is used to estimate the amount of organic matter in a sample.
The units of BOD5 are mg/L. The ‘5’ refers to the duration of the test (5
days). Due to the long period of time required to perform the test,
Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD) is becoming a more common test to
measure the amount of ‘food’.
BIOCIDE A chemical for preventing biological growth.
BIOLOGICAL OXYGEN See Biochemical Oxygen Demand.

DEMAND (BOD)
BIOMASS The mixture of biodegradable material, bacteria, and biosolids present

in a biological wastewater treatment system.
BIOSOLIDS The by-product from the biodegradation of organics by bacteria.
BLOWER Blowers provide aeration to recirculate influent in the ZeeWeed

membrane tank and for scouring the membranes to prevent
membrane fouling. In a bioreactor, blowers are used to introduce air in
order to create an aerobic environment for BOD removal.
BRINE The stream (usually Concentrate) into which ions or solids are
concentrated.
BRINE BLOWDOWN The portion of the concentrate stream displaced by concentrate make-
(BBM) up and sent to waste.
BRINE MAKEUP The portion of the feed stream added to the brine recycle stream to
(BMU) maintain ionic concentrations in the brine stream. (EDI)
CASSETTE FOR A A group of interlocked ZeeWeed modules, fastened together to act as

ZEEWEED 500 a single unit. A cassette is the smallest functional part of a ZeeWeed
system that can be removed or isolated for removal or bubble testing.
Glossary Rev. 0
10-6 June, 2010
Facility
CATHODE Electrode with negative electrode potential that attracts cations. (EDI,
EDR)
CATION A negatively charged ion, resulting from dissociation of molecules in

solution. (EDI, EDR)
CELL PAIR Basic element of an EDI or EDR stack consisting of a cation membrane,
a demineralized water flow spacer, an anion membrane, and a
concentrate water flow spacer. (EDI, EDR)
CATION MEMBRANE Flexible sheet of cloth-reinforced membrane permeable to cations and

impermeable to anions. (EDI, EDR)
CHEMICAL OXYGEN A test used to estimate the amount of organic matter within a sample.
DEMAND (COD) A strong chemical oxidizing agent is used to measure the amount of
organic matter that can be oxidized. The COD of wastewater is
generally higher than the BOD because more compounds can be
chemically oxidized than can be biologically oxidized. The units of COD
are mg/L. Generally the BOD/COD ratio varies from 0.4 to 0.8.
CHEMICAL FEED The required concentration (example: design dosage) of anti-scalant

REQUIREMENTS and/or acid and/or sodium bisulfite specific to each RO or other
membrane system.
CHEMICALLY Backwash and soaking of ultrafiltration (UF) membranes with a

ENHANCED chemical solution in order to remove scale and fouling from the
BACKWASH (CEB) membrane surfaces.
CHLORINE CONTACT The part of a water treatment plant where effluent is disinfected by
CHAMBER chlorine.
CIP MODE The system operating mode in which the unit is undergoing the CIP
procedure.
CLEAN-IN-PLACE A system or procedure for cleaning a membrane system without

(CIP) removing or disassembling the system. CIP involves the circulation of
chemicals through the membrane system to remove scale and
biological fouling from the piping and membranes.
COAGULANT An agent that causes dissolved or fine impurities to group together

(coagulate). Coagulants are typically inorganic compounds, such as
ferric chloride or alum.
Rev. 0 Glossary
June, 2010 10-7
Facility
COAGULATION The addition of inorganic coagulants into raw water prior to filtration.
This promotes clumping (aggregation) of dissolved or fine impurities.
CO-CURRENT FLOW Flow across and through a membrane where the feed/reject and
permeate flow in the same direction and parallel to the membrane
surface.
COLOR Color can occur as the result of decaying or organic debris in the water.
COMPOSITE A membrane with two or more distinct layers.

MEMBRANE
CONCENTRATE The portion of the feed solution that does not pass through the
membrane, in which solids or ions are at an increased concentration.
Also known as Reject or Retentate.
CONCENTRATE A method in which overall recovery is increased by reusing a fraction

RECYCLE (CR) of the concentrate stream. Also refers to the portion of the concentrate
stream that exits the membrane stack, and is repressurized by the
concentrate recycle pump and returned to the stack concentrating
stream.
CONCENTRATE The process stream flowing through the concentrate compartments of

STREAM a membrane stack.
CONCENTRATE Portion of the concentrate stream displaced by concentrate makeup

BLOWDOWN (CBD) and sent to waste.
CONCENTRATE Portion of the feed stream added to the concentrate recycle stream to
MAKEUP (CMU) control ionic concentrations in the concentrate stream.
CONCENTRATION The amount of a given compound in the reject as a multiple of the

FACTOR amount in the feed stream.
CONDUCTIVITY A device for measuring conductivity in aqueous solutions, primarily to

SENSOR obtain information on total ionic concentrations (example: dissolved
compounds).
Glossary Rev. 0
10-8 June, 2010
Facility
CONTACTOR The electrical switch component of the motor starter. The contactor
protects the PLC by isolating it from the high currents and voltages
necessary to run most motors. A contactor operates as follows: an
output of 120 V or less from the PLC energizes a magnetic coil and/or
coils in the contactor. The magnetic field causes the contact(s) to pull
in, completing the motor’s circuit.
CONTROL LOGIC A control system development document in spreadsheet form that lists
CHART (CLC) the control logic elements of a system, such as process variables,
motors, valves, PID controls, alarms, and operator selections. For each
control element, the chart defines attributes such as tag number,
description, unit of measure, range, setpoint, and control actions.
CONTROL NARRATIVE A control system development document, in narrative text form, that
(CN) describes high level functions of the programmable controllers and
operator interfaces. This document also defines any control system
details that are not included in the associated Control Logic Chart (CLC)
and Operations Sequence Chart (OSC).
CONTROL STRATEGY The document, or set of documents, that defines the function of the
programmable controllers and operator interfaces that will be used to
control a process system. Generally, a GE W&PT control strategy
includes a Control Narrative (CN), a Control Logic Chart (CLC), and an
Operations Sequence Chart (OSC).
CONTROL VALVE A valve with a positioning actuator (not an open/closed actuator) for
manipulating a process flow, or a self-actuated valve. Typically tagged
“FCV”, “LCV”, “PCV”, or “TCV” on a P&ID.
CORROSION The attack upon metals by chemical agents, converting them to non-
metallic products. Stainless steel has a passive film created by the
presence of chromium (and often other alloying elements) that resists
this process.
CRITICAL ALARM An alarm condition that requires the operator’s immediate attention to
allow the system to run at the necessary level of production, or to
investigate a potentially unsafe condition.
CRITICAL FAILURE A condition that triggers a process alarm that causes the unit to shut
down immediately, because continued operation could present an
immediate hazard or cause damage to the equipment.
Rev. 0 Glossary
June, 2010 10-9
Facility
CROSS-FLOW Flow across and through a membrane where the feed/reject stream
FILTRATION flows parallel to the membrane while the permeate stream flows
perpendicular. The flow pattern reduces fouling on the media surface.
Cross flow filtration necessitates a certain amount of the feed being
lost to maintain flow.
CROSS LEAK Hydraulic transfer of water between manifolds in the stack (from the
demineralizing stream to the concentrate stream).
CRYPTO OOCYST The hard shell in which the parasite cryptosporidium resides. This hard
shell protects the cryptosporidium from chlorine disinfection
treatment.
CRYPTOSPORIDIUM A parasite that contaminates water and can cause severe illness in
humans. Since chlorine does not kill cryptosporidium, the most
effective treatment for water supplies is through filtration.
CURRENT The movement of electrons through a conductor (such as wire).

Electrical current is analogous to the flow of water through a pipe.
Current is measured in Amperes (A) or milliAmperes (mA). The current
direction can be either direct (DC) or alternating (AC). The current draw
of a motor is stamped on the factory nameplate of the motor. This is
the tested maximum ampere draw of the motor under full load
conditions (FLA).
CURRENT DAY TOTAL A totalized value that is reset to zero at midnight.
CYCLIC AERATION Cyclic aeration valves control the air flow to the ZeeWeed membrane
VALVES cassettes, typically in 10 second intervals. The PLC controls the
operation of cyclic aeration valves.
DECHLORINATION The process of removing residual chlorine from water. Also, GE W&PT
typically uses specially formulated, thin film composite RO
membranes, which have a limited tolerance for the free chlorine found
in most municipal water supplies. Hence, dechlorination is typically
required upstream of the RO membranes. Activated carbon filters or
sodium bisulfite are used to remove the free chlorine. With ZeeWeed
membrane systems, dechlorination with the use of sodium bisulfite, is
required after a chlorine Recovery Clean procedure.
DECONCENTRATION An operation to periodically drain water from a membrane tank to

reduce the average solids concentration when permeation is stopped.
Glossary Rev. 0
10-10 June, 2010
Facility
DEIONIZATION The removal of ions by ion exchange processes.
DEMAND A dynamic setpoint that is typically used for controlling a system with
multiple process trains or units in parallel (example: an integer setpoint
for the number of trains or pumps that should be running or a flow
setpoint for the desired system production rate).
DEMINERALIZATION The process of reducing the quantity of minerals or salts in an aqueous

solution.
DEMINERALIZING Process stream flowing through and out of the demineralizing

STREAM compartments of the membrane stack.
DENITRIFICATION The biological process by which nitrate is converted to nitrogen gas.

This process occurs in the absence of free oxygen (example: anoxic
zone of a bioreactor).
DISSOLVED OXYGEN The amount of free oxygen dissolved in water or wastewater. Dissolved
(DO) oxygen levels are measured to ensure that sufficient oxygen is
available for the biological population to degrade the wastewater
during aerobic digestion. DO is normally expressed in mg/L, ppm, or
percent of saturation. Oxygen dissolves into the mixed liquor by
diffusion across the water surface and aeration.
DIGITAL VS. ANALOG A digital (discrete) electrical signal is either on or off. This signal is used
SIGNALS for simple on/off control of devices or alarm/alert setpoints.
DILUTE FEED The stream that serves as the feed water source for demineralization.
DILUTE IN The dilute (feed) stream entering the EDI stack(s).
DILUTE OUT The dilute (product) stream leaving the EDI stack(s).
DISTRIBUTED A centralized electronic monitoring and control system for unit

CONTROL SYSTEM operations.
(DCS)
DRY CONTACT An electrically isolated relay contact that is not directly connected to a
power source. Typically used for sending a contact closure to a remote
control circuit where the circuit power comes from a remotely located
controller.
Rev. 0 Glossary
June, 2010 10-11
Facility
E-CELL The trade name for GE W&PT’s Electrodeionization (EDI) process, which
uses electrical impulse or stimulus to remove ions from water.
EDR STACK An Electrodialysis Regeneration (EDR) stack is comprised of sets of cell

pairs stacked one on top of the other. Each cell pair consists of an anion
transfer and a cation transfer membrane, separated by a spacer, with
another spacer on one side of the cell pair. The stack has an anode
electrode on one side, and a cation electrode on the other. Applied
direct current induces ion migration in feed water. When current is
applied to the stacks, alternating channels of demineralized product
water and concentrate are created.
EDUCTOR A jet pump for withdrawing a fluid or powdery substance from a space.
EFFLUENT The flow of a liquid out of a system or process.
EJECTOR A device for removing air from the system.
ELECTRICAL POWER The rate of consumption of electrical energy. Power is calculated by

multiplying the current by the voltage. Power is usually expressed in
watts (W), kilowatts (kW), or horsepower (Hp).
ELECTRICAL STAGE Cell pairs bounded by two electrodes.
ELECTRODE A thin metal plate (usually platinum plated titanium) used to apply
electrical potential to an electrical stage of an ED/EDI/EDR membrane
stack.
ELECTRODE CLEAN An automatic procedure for cleaning the electrode compartments in

IN PLACE (ECIP) an EDR system without removing or disassembling the system. ECIP is
a preventive procedure, not a repair procedure, to help prevent the
build up of scale and foulants. If the electrode compartments are
blocked to the point where no flow can get through, this procedure will
not work, and the stacks will require disassembly.
ELECTRODE Independent flow path formed by the electrode, electrode spacer, and
COMPARTMENT heavy cation membrane. It prevents gases and pH changes resulting
from electrode reactions from entering the main process flow.
ELECTRODE FEED Feed water that is diverted to the electrode compartments.

(EF)
Glossary Rev. 0
10-12 June, 2010
Facility
ELECTRODE SPACER An extra thick spacer used with a heavy cation membrane to form the
electrode compartment.
ELECTRODE WASTE Wastewater from the electrode stream.

(EW)
ELECTRODEIONIZATI Removal of ions using electrical impulse or stimulus.

ON
ELECTRODIALYSIS A process in which ions are transferred through membranes from a

less concentrated to a more concentrated solution under the impulse
or stimulus of an electric current.
ELECTRODIALYSIS A continuous self-cleaning electrodialysis process involving periodic

REVERSAL reversal of the DC polarity, switching concentrating and diluting flow
streams.
ELECTROMAGNETIC Electromagnetic flow meters (mag meters) measure liquid flow rate.
FLOW METERS (MAG The PLC uses this information to regulate pump speed and to totalize
METERS) flow.
ELEMENT The smallest membrane entity replaceable in a ZeeWeed cassette. (See

also Module).
EMERGENCY STOP The manual stopping of operation as quickly and reliably as possible,
using a circuit that meets the requirements of NFPA 79, Chapters 9 and
10.
ENGINEERED UNITS A numerical data value that is correct for its unit of measure, so it does
not need to be scaled for use or display.
EVENT An occurrence that is not an alarm condition.
FAULT An abnormal condition that affects the ability of a device to perform its
normal function. “Fault” should generally be used instead of “failure”,
“failed”, or “faulted”, and should not be used where “alarm” would be
applicable.
FEED A water stream entering a unit treatment process.
FEED CHANNEL FOR The channel running along the length of the membrane tank that
ZEEWEED 1000 distributes the feed to the cassettes.
Rev. 0 Glossary
June, 2010 10-13
Facility
FEED FLUSH FOR The flow of feed from the bottom to the top of the tank during a
ZEEWEED 1000 backwash, to assist in the discharge of water to the backwash channel.
FILTRATE Liquid exiting a filtration process with reduced content of solids or

contaminants. (See also Permeate).
FILTRATION CYCLE A repeated sequence of permeate production and backpulse.
FLOC A mass of clumped solids or precipitates formed in sewage by

biological or chemical activity.
FLOCCULANTS Materials that can precipitate into aggregates or flocs from finely
suspended particles. The suspended materials can then be separated
from the water.
FLOCCULATION The process of creating aggregates or flocs from finely suspended

particles that can later be separated from the water. Flocculation is
often aided by a coagulant addition.
FLUX A measure of the rate at which permeate passes through the filtration
membrane per unit surface area of membrane. Usually measured in
GFD (gallons per ft2 per day) or LMH (liters per m2 per hour). Flux =
permeate flow rate / membrane surface area.
FOOD-TO- The mass (kg) of organic matter fed to the bioreactor each day per unit
MICROORGANISM mass of microorganism. Expressed as (kg BOD (or COD) / kg VSS - d).
RATIO (F:M)
FOULANTS The unwanted materials that deposit on the surface of a membrane.
FOULING The buildup of unwanted materials on the surface or within the pores
of the filtration membrane. Fouling reduces the active surface area of
the membrane and results in a reduction in permeability.
FREEBOARD (FOR The space above the resin that accommodates the resin expansion
SOFTENERS) during the backwash procedure.
GAS BLANKETING The accumulation of electrode reaction gases on the surface of the
electrode.
GIARDIA LAMBLIA A parasite that contaminates water and can cause illness (giardiasis) in
humans. The most effective treatment for water supplies is through
filtration.
Glossary Rev. 0
10-14 June, 2010
Facility
GLYCERIN Glycerin is the impure commercial form of glycerol. Glycerin is used to

(GLYCEROL) preserve and prevent ZeeWeed membranes from drying out or
freezing.
GLYCEROL See Glycerin.
HAND VALVES FOR Hand valves are used to control flow in situations where regular
FLOW CONTROL changes in flow are not required. The valve is in the fully open or fully
closed position.
HAND VALVES FOR Hand valves for isolation are used in situations where regular changes
ISOLATION in the valve’s state are not required. The valve is in the fully open or fully
closed position. Types of hand valves used for isolation include ball
valves, butterfly valves, and gate valves.
HARDNESS A measure of the amount of calcium and magnesium present in water.

A property of water that can produce scale as a result of the presence
of calcium and magnesium salts in solution.
HEADLOSS The drop in pressure of water flow through a resin bed.
HEAVY CATION A cation membrane formed more thickly to withstand higher

MEMBRANE differential pressures. The heavy cation membrane is used as an
electrode compartment border.
HIGH A condition in which a process variable is greater than its normal value
or range of values. This condition is typically used for control and/or for
an advisory alarm.
HIGH-HIGH A condition in which a process variable is greater than a High setpoint.

This condition typically causes an equipment shutdown.
HUMAN MACHINE A typical panel-mounted operator interface, which allows the operator
INTERFACE (HMI) access and control of the various equipment functions of a system. An
HMI may be an operator interface with proprietary software or a
Windows-based industrial computer running SCADA software.
HYDRAULIC The time required to displace the working volume of a bioreactor, by

RETENTION TIME the feed flow into the bioreactor, in a continuous flow system.
(HRT) HRT (d) = anoxic and aerobic bioreactor volume (L) / feed flow rate (L/d)
HYDROMETER Measures the specific gravity of fluids.
Rev. 0 Glossary
June, 2010 10-15
Facility
HYDROXYL The anion of water. The chemical formula is OH-.
IMMEDIATE A shutdown alarm condition that causes the process unit to stop
SHUTDOWN ALARM immediately (because continued operation could damage the
equipment) instead of using the normal shutdown sequence that might
include flushing or cleaning.
INFLUENT A liquid flow into a tank or system.
INPUTS/OUTPUTS Inputs/outputs refer to the direction of the electronic signal in

reference to the PLC. Inputs are signals that come into the PLC via an
external device. Outputs are signals that are sent from the PLC to an
external device. Inputs/outputs can be either digital or analog signals.
INTERLOCK A control scheme for preventing a mechanism or action from being set
in motion when another mechanism or action is in operation, because
the two operating simultaneously might produce undesirable results.
ION An electrically charged particle with a positive or negative charge,

formed by the dissociation of a salt, mineral, or acid in water.
ION EXCHANGE The process by which salts (cations and anions) are removed from
water by using electricity to replace undesirable ions with a certain
charge with desirable ions of the same charge.
ION EXCHANGE The process of restoring the ion exchange resin to its fully charged
REGENERATION state.
LANGELIER A measure of the tendency of water to dissolve or deposit calcium

SATURATION INDEX carbonate (scaling). LSI is calculated based on the total alkalinity,
(LSI) hardness, total dissolved solids (TDS), pH, and temperature of the
water, and scaling. An LSI of 3.0 is indicative of a potential for severe
scaling. The LSI is a calculated, dimensionless number that is used to
determine the tendency of a water supply to foul RO membranes with
calcium carbonate scale. It is dependent upon the following:
• the calcium content of the water supply.
• the bicarbonate alkalinity of the water supply.
• the pH of the water.
• the temperature of the water.
Glossary Rev. 0
10-16 June, 2010
Facility
If the LSI is negative, there is no potential for calcium carbonate scale

as CaCO3 dissolves in water. If the LSI is zero, there is no potential for
scaling or CaCO3 dissolving. If the LSI is positive, there is a potential for
CaCO3 scale, the magnitude of the potential being dependent upon the
magnitude of the LSI number. An LSI of 3.0 would be considered to be
a water with severe scaling tendencies.
As the concentrate stream moving through a reverse osmosis unit

becomes more and more concentrated in dissolved minerals, the LSI of
the water changes from the inlet of the system to the final concentrate
outlet. As all RO membrane processes are staged (except for single
element systems) with the concentrate out of one membrane feeding
into the next, the worst LSI (example: most positive) is seen in the water
coming out of the last membrane from the last housing. If it is predicted
that this LSI will in fact be positive, it is common practice to either:
• polish the raw water, reducing the calcium and magnesium

contents.
• feed antiscalant chemical, which 'negates' the effects of the

calcium.
• feed an acid to lower the pH and move the LSI in a negative

direction.
LEVEL SWITCH Level switches are placed in tanks to indicate very high or very low
tank levels.
LEVEL TRANSMITTERS Level transmitters measure the liquid level in membrane tanks. The PLC
uses these levels to calculate the permeate rate or the feed flow rate to
maintain appropriate tank levels.
LOG REMOVAL Log removal is the degree of removal or inactivation of pathogenic

VALUE (LRV) organisms through physical-chemical treatment of water. For the
ZeeWeed system, the calculation is for removal. The log scale is used.
Each increase in whole number is a 10 fold improvement in removal.
The calculation is expressed in whole numbers, which are
dimensionless.
Rev. 0 Glossary
June, 2010 10-17
Facility
For example, if the feed concentration is 100:
Table 10.1.2 - Log Removal

Permeate Concentration Removal Log Removal
10 90% 1
1 99% 2
0.1 99.9% 3
0.01 99.99% 4
0.001 99.999% 5
Given:
• Feed Concentration: 800,000 particle counts 1,238 colonies
• Permeate Concentration: 50 particle counts 2 colonies
Calculation:
Log removal = -Log10 (50 counts / 800,000 counts) = 4.2
Or
Log removal = -Log10 (25,238 colonies / 2 colonies) = 4.1
LOW A condition in which a process variable is less than its normal value or
range of values. This condition is typically used for control and/or for
an advisory alarm.
LOW-LOW A condition in which a process variable is lower than the Low setpoint.
This condition typically causes an equipment shutdown.
LUMEN The internal cavity within the hollow fiber of a ZeeWeed membrane
through which air and permeate flow.
MAINTENANCE A cleaning procedure consisting of aeration, backpulsing, and soaking

CLEAN the ZeeWeed membranes. The operator selects either citric acid or
sodium hypochlorite as the cleaning solution.
MANIFOLD A flow path that feeds several other flow paths.
MAN MACHINE See Human Machine Interface (HMI).

INTERFACE (MMI)
Glossary Rev. 0
10-18 June, 2010
Facility
MC-1 (CITRIC ACID) A proprietary cleaning chemical available from GE W&PT and designed
to remove inorganic foulants from membranes.
MEMBRANE Thin barriers or films of material with many small pores of a

predetermined size. These pores allow solvent and other smaller
molecules, ions, or particles to pass through while preventing the
passage of other materials. Membranes are designed to allow the
separation of permeate streams from feed streams.
MEMBRANE The process of using blowers to provide turbulence at the membrane

AERATION surface to reduce accumulation of foulants on the membranes.
MEMBRANE A biological wastewater treatment system that uses a membrane to

BIOREACTOR separate water from biomass.
MEMBRANE BLOWER Membrane blowers provide aeration to recirculate influent and provide
turbulence to membrane surfaces to reduce membrane fouling.
MEMBRANE A test procedure that introduces air under pressure into the lumen side
INTEGRITY TEST of the ZeeWeed membrane. This test detects the condition of the
(MIT) membranes and any broken fibers, while the membranes remain in the
tank. Membrane Integrity Test (MIT) and Pressure Decay Test (PDT) are
two terms that are often used interchangeably when referring to
protocols for integrity monitoring. However, there are subtle but
important differences between the two terms. MIT refers to any
method, both direct and indirect, used to monitor the integrity of the
ZeeWeed membranes. Two currently used methods of indirect
monitoring are particle counting and turbidity tracking.
The PDT is GE W&PT’s standard method for direct membrane integrity

monitoring. The PDT consists of pressurizing the inside of the
membrane fibers with clean air between 3.0 and 10.0 psig, depending
on which ZeeWeed membrane product and version is being used. This
pressure is allowed to stabilize in order to ensure that all of the water
inside the membrane fibers has been displaced by air. The flow of air
to the membranes is then turned off and the decay in pressure is
measured in regular intervals over a specified duration. The rate of
pressure decay is a function of the rate of air loss through the
membranes due to diffusion, dry pores, and leaks. Other than leaks, air
can only pass through a wetted pore by diffusion since the air pressure
required to displace the water out of a pore is much higher than the air
pressure used for the PDT.
Rev. 0 Glossary
June, 2010 10-19
Facility
A PDT at 3 and 5 psig can detect broken fibers, tears, and delamination.
These are the types of membrane leaks expected to develop as the
membranes age. However, to be compliant with future regulations, GE
W&PT has increased the test pressure to 9.0 psig for ZW500D
membranes and 10.0 psig for ZW1000 membranes. This measures the
air loss from defects larger than 3 microns, which will be a requirement
of the USEPA Long-term 2 Enhanced Surface Water Treatment Rule
(LT2ESWTR).
MEMBRANE The ratio of the flux and the transmembrane pressure at that flux.
PERMEABILITY Usually expressed in L/m2/h/kPa or GFD/psi.
MEMBRANE SURFACE A measurement of the effective surface area of each element.

AREA
METERING PUMP A chemical metering pump is an electronically-controlled, solenoid or

motor-driven diaphragm pump used for metering fluids, such as acid,
base, and hypochlorite. The stroke length and rate of the pump can be
manually set from the control panel on the pump face. Electronic
metering pumps dose chemicals into the ZeeWeed system at
measured rates. Changing the stroke frequency and stroke length can
control the dosing rate, allowing it to be fixed or paced to achieve the
correct dosing rate.
MHO A measure of conductance. It represents the ratio of the current

flowing through a conductor, measured in amperes, to the potential
difference between the end to the conductor, measured in volts. A mho
is a unit of conductance equal to the reciprocal of the ohm, expressed
as amperes/volt.
MICROMHO (μMHO) One millionth of a mho.
MICROSIEMENS (μS) A measure of conductance equivalent to a micromho.
MIXED BED An ion exchange tank consisting of both cation and anion resin.
Provides the most complete deionization of water, up to 18.3 megohm/
cm resistivity. Mixed bed resins or mixed bed ion exchange resins are
mainly used in water purification for polishing process water to
achieve demineralized water quality (example: after a reverse osmosis
system).
Glossary Rev. 0
10-20 June, 2010
Facility
MIXED LIQUOR The liquid mixture present in the aeration tank of an activated sludge
system. The liquid is a mixture of activated sludge and water
containing organic matter undergoing activated sludge treatment. The
mixed liquor is a living ‘soup’ of microorganisms that requires food,
oxygen, nutrients, proper pH, and correct solids retention time.
MIXED LIQUOR A measure of the quantity of suspended solids in the aeration tank of
SUSPENDED SOLIDS an activated sludge treatment system. Mixed Liquor Suspended Solids
(MLSS) (MLSS) is usually measured in milligrams per liter (mg/L).
MIXED LIQUOR The portion of the Mixed Liquor Suspended Solids (MLSS) that vaporizes
VOLATILE when heated to 550ºC ± 50ºC (1022ºF ± 122ºF). This volatile portion is
SUSPENDED SOLIDS mainly organic material and thus indicates the biomass present in the
(MLVSS) aeration tank. The portion of solids that does not vaporize is mostly
inorganic substances.
MODULE A filtration device consisting of membrane fibers, top and bottom

(MEMBRANE) FOR headers, and connecting air and permeate pipes. A module is the
ZEEWEED 500A/B smallest distinct portion into which a cassette can be divided.
MODULE (TUBULAR A filtration device consisting of membrane tubes, entrance and return
MEMBRANE) headers, and connecting feed and concentrate pipes. A module is the
smallest distinct portion that a system can be divided into. The module
houses and contains the tubular membrane. The modules consist of
two endcaps, one capped and the other with two hosebarb
connections for the feed inlet and reject outlet. The permeate collects
inside the module and exits via an elbow near the closed end.
MODULE FLOW RATE The fluid flow rate through the module, which is normally equal to the
sum of the permeate and concentrate flow rates. Measured in US gpm
or liters/minute.
MODULE FLOW RATE The fluid flow rate through the RO module, which is normally equal to
FOR RO the sum of the permeate and the concentrate flow rates. Measured in
US gpm or liters/minute.
MOLECULAR WEIGHT The size of the molecule that determines whether or not the molecule
CUT-OFF is small enough to pass through the membrane’s pore.
MOTOR CONTROL The control panel that holds the motor starters and breakers for the
CENTER (MCC) system equipment.
Rev. 0 Glossary
June, 2010 10-21
Facility
MOTOR A number of important motor components consist of a motor starter,

FUNDAMENTALS contactor, overload, A.C. motors, variable frequency drive, and pump
rotation verification.
MOTOR ROTATION A pump may be severely damaged if started in reverse rotation. Three-
CHECK phase motors can run either clockwise or counter-clockwise
depending on how they are wired. It is essential to verify motor
rotation before operating a pump. Rotation should be checked each
time the motor’s three-phase power is disconnected. A coupled pump
should always be uncoupled before checking the rotation.
MOTOR STARTER A starter allows the PLC to operate a motor while remaining electrically
isolated from the motor circuit. A motor starter consists of a contactor
and an overload.
NAVIGATION The process of getting from one graphic or pop-up screen on an

operator interface to another.
NEPHELOMETRIC A measurement of the turbidity (opacity) of water.

TURBIDITY UNIT
(NTU)
NITRATE Nitrate is the most highly oxidized form of nitrogen found in

wastewater. Total Kjedahl Nitrate (TKN) is converted to nitrate during
nitrification. Nitrate is converted to nitrogen gas during denitrification.
Nitrate is chemically written as NO3-.
NITRIFICATION The biological process by which ammonia is converted to nitrite and

then to nitrate.
NITRITE Nitrite is the middle step of nitrification where ammonia is converted to

nitrite and then to nitrate. Nitrite is relatively unstable and easily
oxidized to the nitrate form. Nitrite is chemically written as NO2-.
NO VS. NC A circuit is either open (off) or closed (on). A circuit is closed if current
SWITCHES flows through it; a circuit is open if there is no current.
NON-CRITICAL An alarm condition that needs to be addressed but that does not
ALARM require immediate operator attention.
NON-CRITICAL A process alarm condition which starts an orderly shutdown of the

FAILURE unit.
Glossary Rev. 0
10-22 June, 2010
Facility
NORMALLY OPEN The circuit is open when no forces are acting on the switch.
SWITCH (NO)
NORMALLY CLOSED The circuit is closed when no forces are acting on the switch.
SWITCH (NC)
OFF-SPEC PRODUCT Portion of product stream sent to the feed tank or waste tank for not
(OSP) meeting product quality standards.
OPERATOR Also called Human Machine Interface (HMI) or Man Machine Interface
INTERFACE (OI) (MMI). A display screen through which system conditions can be
monitored and controlled.
OPERATOR Also called Human Machine Interface (HMI) or Man Machine Interface
INTERFACE TERMINAL (MMI).
(OIT)
ORGANIC LOADING The mass of organic matter feed to the anoxic and aerobic reactors
RATE each day per unit volume. Expressed as kg of COD/m3 of nitrification
reactor/d or kg of BOD5/m3 of nitrification reactor/d. The organic
loading rate can be reported using the units of mg/L/min.
OPERATIONS A control system development document in spreadsheet form that

SEQUENCE CHART shows the required sequences for process operations. For each
(OSC) process sequence step, the chart defines attributes such as pump
states, valve actuations, step times, interlocks, and control actions.
OVERLOAD Provides thermal overload protection to the motor. This occurs when
the motor is drawing a higher current than its full load amperage (FLA)
for an extended period. Common thermal overloads use bimetallic strip
switches or heater coils. Common features on an overload are as
follows:
• A reset button/dial that allows the motor circuit to reset

manually after it has been tripped, or the overload to reset itself
automatically after a few minutes.
• A trip current dial (for bimetallic strip overloads) sets the current
(usually at or slightly above the FLA) at which the circuit will trip.
• A test button trips the circuit manually.
Rev. 0 Glossary
June, 2010 10-23
Facility
• A trip indicator window displays a colored indicator when the

circuit is tripped.
OXYGEN UPTAKE The rate of oxygen at which microorganisms consume food in the
RATE (OUR) bioreactor. The rate at which the microorganisms use oxygen (OUR)
can be a direct indicator of their biological activity. OUR is measured in
mg of O2 consumed/L of biomass/minute.
PANELVIEW HMI Provides an interface between the operator and the PLC. The
(HUMAN MACHINE PanelView screen enables the operator to monitor the system’s
INTERFACE) operation. The touch-screen controls and/or push buttons allow the
operator to control the system.
PARTICLE COUNTS The number of particles per 100 ml of filtrate water. Water can be
microscopically examined using a particle counter, which classifies
suspended particles by number and size.
PARTICLE COUNTER Particle counters are placed in piping to measure the particle count,
verify membrane integrity, and ensure the quality of the permeate.
PARTICULATES Very small suspended solids in water. They vary in size, shape, density,
and electrical charge, and can be gathered together by coagulation
and flocculation.
PASSIVATION A chemical treatment used to expedite the natural passive quality of

stainless steels. When exposed to air, stainless steels passivate
naturally due to the presence of chromium. The rate of natural
passivation varies. To ensure that a passive layer forms rapidly after
pickling, a solution of nitric acid and water is applied to the metal
surface. Passivation does not remove embedded surface
contamination. Thorough water rinsing must follow all passivating
treatments.
PASSIVE A characteristic condition of stainless steels, which impedes normal

corrosion tendencies, and renders the steel passive to its environment.
Glossary Rev. 0
10-24 June, 2010
Facility
PERCENT REJECTION Percent (%) rejection is defined as the percentage of Total Dissolved
FOR RO Solids (TDS) that are rejected by the membranes into the concentrate
stream. It is calculated using the following formula:
Permeate TDS x 100

Percent Rejection = 100 - Feed TDS
For example, if the feed water has a TDS level of 359 mg/L (or ppm) and
the permeate water has a TDS level of 9 mg/L, the percent rejection of
the system would be calculated as follows:
9 x 100
Percent Rejection = 100 - 359
= 97.5%
The Total Dissolved Solids level is typically measured with a

conductivity probe and instrument. The rejection typically increases
with decreasing recovery levels and higher transmembrane pressures.
PERMAFLOW The trade name for GE W&PT’s tubular membranes.
PERMEATE The portion of the feed solution that passes through the membrane.
PERMEATE FLOW The permeate flow rate per unit of membrane area. This is used for a
RATE (FLUX) specific system with a fixed number of membranes. The term can be
used interchangeably with permeate flow rate. The most common
usage is in GFD (gallons of permeate per square foot of membrane
area per day) or in LMH (liters of permeate per square meter per day).
PERMEATE FLOW Permeate flux is defined as the permeate flow rate per square foot of
RATE (FLUX) FOR RO membrane area. It is used interchangeably with permeate flow rate.
The rate at which permeate is produced is dependent upon the
following:
• the membrane operating pressure.
• the feed water analysis.
• the system recovery ratio.
Rev. 0 Glossary
June, 2010 10-25
Facility
• the feed water temperature.
PERMEATE HEADER The piping running along the length of the membrane tank that collects
permeate from each of the permeate manifolds.
PERMEATE The piping running across the top of the cassette (parallel to the main
MANIFOLD axis of the cassette) that collects the permeate from the individual
stacks. The permeate is discharged to the permeate header.
PICKLING When stainless steels have been heated to elevated temperatures

(such as during welding), an oxide scale will form on the surface unless
the material is surrounded by a protective atmosphere. Any such
oxides must be removed to restore the stainless steel to its optimum
corrosion resistance.
The part is immersed in a pickling solution to remove oxides and

loosely embedded iron. Pickling paste can be used to clean larger
affected areas in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions.
PH The measure of the acidity or alkalinity of a solution, based on the

concentration of hydrogen ions. pH values are expressed as numbers
on a scale of 0 to 14. With values less than 7 being acidic, and greater
than 7 being basic.
PH ANALYZER pH analyzers measure the pH levels in the recirculation line during

Recovery Cleans. The PLC uses the analyzer to monitor the pH of the
cleaning chemicals and to control the dosing of neutralizing chemicals.
POLARIZATION The point at which the amount of current per unit area of membrane is
high enough to dissociate water molecules, resulting in the formation
of OH- and H+ ions.
POPUP SCREEN A screen design that is displayed by selecting buttons on a graphical

screen of the operator interface. The popup screen overlays a portion
of the graphical screen. Popup screens are typically used for
controlling a motor or entering setpoints.
POWER SUPPLY A device that converts an AC input to a DC output.
PORE SIZE The size of the holes in the membranes.
PPM Parts per million. 1 ppm = 1 mg/L (assuming specific gravity = 1.0).
Glossary Rev. 0
10-26 June, 2010
Facility
PRESSURE DROP A loss of pressure due to friction or flow restriction.
PRESSURE DECAY See Membrane Integrity Test.

TEST
PRESSURE GAUGE A device used for measuring the pressure of a gas or liquid.
PRESSURE Pressure transmitters, located on the permeate header, are used to

TRANSMITTER control pump speed during production, backpulse, and membrane
integrity tests of the conventional membrane systems. The
transmitters inform the PLC of high or low pressures, triggering an
alarm.
PRESSURE VESSEL A cylindrical vessel (usually made of FRP) that contains membrane
elements.
PROCEDURE The strategy for carrying out a process. It may refer to a process that
does not result in the production of a product, for example a Clean-In-
Place (CIP) procedure.
PRODUCT WATER A treated water stream exiting a unit treatment process.
PROGRAMMABLE A microprocessor-based controller that uses programmable memory

LOGIC CONTROLLER to store instructions in order to control a process. The main
(PLC) components of a PLC are the power supply, processor, memory, input
interface, and output interface.
PROPORTIONAL A control scheme in which the controller output is varied to maintain a

CONTROL process variable to a certain ratio of another variable. As an example,
proportional control is used to vary a chemical dosing pump speed in
proportion to the water flow at the chemical dosing location. This
control method ensures that the chemical concentration in the water
will not change when the water flow changes.
PROPORTIONAL Feedback control with proportional, integral, and derivative control

INTEGRAL action. This control method allows the PLC to manipulate a physical
DERIVATIVE (PID) device (control variable) to achieve a setpoint by constantly observing
CONTROL LOOP the response (process variable). A PID controller attempts to correct the
error between a measured process variable and a desired setpoint by
calculating and then outputting a corrective action that can adjust the
process accordingly and rapidly in order to keep the error minimal.
The PID loop contains the following three parameters:
Rev. 0 Glossary
June, 2010 10-27
Facility
Gain (Kc) - Proportional control.
Reset (Ti) - Integral control.
Rate (Td) - Derivative control.
The proportional control term Kc changes the control variable by an

amount proportional to the setpoint deviation. The magnitude of Kc
determines the sensitivity of the PID control loop to process changes.
The larger the Kc value, the larger the proportional change in the
control variable.
The integral control term Ti is the time during which the actuating
variable is changed for an existing deviation. The magnitude of Ti
determines the amount of memory that the PID control loop exhibits. A
large Ti value has a low effect on the setpoint deviation and vice versa.
Controllers that use 1/Ti have opposite effects on the deviation.
The derivative control term Td changes the control variable by an

amount proportional to the rate of change (slope) of the setpoint
deviation. The larger the Td value, the more effect the rate of change of
the deviation has on the control variable and vice versa. Systems that
use 1/Td have the opposite effect.
RATE The tuning parameter for the derivative control action of a PID
controller.
RECOVERY The amount of water recovered as permeate divided by the amount of

feed water supplied to the system. High recovery ratios mean that a
large percentage of the water is collected as permeate, whereas a low
recovery results in most of the feed water going to the reject stream.
As the recovery ratio increases, the suspended solids concentration of
the reject stream increases. Higher solids in the reject stream represent
higher solids concentrations in the membrane tank. This may result in
higher transmembrane pressure (TMP) readings.
While membrane systems can be forced to run at a higher recovery

than designed, premature membrane fouling may result. DO NOT
run the system at a higher recovery than designed.
Glossary Rev. 0
10-28 June, 2010
Facility
The formula for determining percent recovery is as follows:
Permeate Flow Rate x 100

Percent Recovery = Feed Flow Rate
RECOVERY CLEAN A chemical cleaning procedure used to restore ZeeWeed membrane

permeability.
RECTIFIER An electrical device that changes AC power to DC power.
REDOX/ORP The redox analyzer measures the ability of a solution to act as an

ANALYZER oxidizing agent or reducing agent. Redox potential/ORP (oxidation-
reduction potential) is measured in the range specified in the vendor
data. Positive readings indicate an oxidizing agent, while negative
readings indicate a reducing agent.
REGENERANT Chemicals used in the regeneration of resin beds in an ion exchange

CHEMICALS unit.
REGENERATION A process for restoring the resin in an ion exchange unit to its fully
charged state.
REINFORCED FIBER GE W&PT-patented hollow fiber used in the ZeeWeed 500 series
modules, consisting of a polymeric membrane on a strong support.
RESET The process of using a manual reset button to clear an alarm condition
after it has been resolved. The tuning parameter for the integral control
action of a PID controller.
RESIN BEDS Layers of resin in an ion exchange unit. See also Mixed Bed.
RESIDUAL CHLORINE Residual chlorine analyzers are placed in the recirculation piping to
ANALYZER electronically measure the level of chlorine present during Recovery
Cleans. The PLC uses this online chlorine measurement to control the
neutralizing chemical dosing pumps.
RESISTIVITY FOR RO The property of a substance (in this case, water) to resist the flow of
electricity. Resistivity is the measurement of that resistance. Resistivity
is the inverse of conductivity. Measured by a resistivity monitor.
RETENTATE See Reject.
Rev. 0 Glossary
June, 2010 10-29
Facility
REJECT Also known as Concentrate or Retentate. The portion of the feed

solution that does not pass through the membrane.
REVERSE OSMOSIS A water purification process that utilizes high-pressure pumps to drive
(RO) process water through semi-permeable reverse osmosis (RO)
membranes in order to remove dissolved ions and unwanted matter.
RO FEED The feed solution is the stream that enters the reverse osmosis (RO)
membrane unit. Following reverse osmosis, the feed stream is divided
into concentrate and permeate streams.
RUN TIME METER A run time counter for a motor or process unit, usually with units of
hours.
SCALE Precipitate of calcium carbonate or calcium sulfate.
SCALING The formation of a precipitate on a surface in contact with water as the

result of scale deposit. The process of converting a raw numerical value
to a value in engineering units.
SEQUENTIAL A control function intended to set the states of the pumps, valves, and
CONTROL other control devices of a process unit for a series of operation steps.
SETPOINT An adjustable value for a process variable, which is used for controlling
a process. A controller will vary the process to keep the process
variable at the setpoint, or a process alarm and/or control action will
occur when the process variable reaches the setpoint.
SHUTDOWN ALARM An alarm that alerts the operator that action is needed to recover from
a situation where either a piece of equipment is unable to operate, or
the control system has determined that operation is unsafe or
undesirable.
SHROUD The plastic covering that protects the ZeeWeed 1000 element.
SILICA ANALYZER A device for measuring silica concentrations in liquid.
SILT DENSITY INDEX The silt density index represents the quantity of silt (colloidal material)
(SDI) present in a water source. It is a measure of the potential of suspended
solids to foul RO membranes.
SLUDGE WASTING The excess volume of biological sludge wasted daily from the
RATE bioreactor. Usually measured in L/d or g/d.
Glossary Rev. 0
10-30 June, 2010
Facility
SODIUM A membrane cleaning and conditioning agent that removes organic

HYPOCHLORITE foulants and sanitizes the system permeate/treated water piping. This
(NAOCL) substance is a strong oxidant and disinfectant.
SOLENOID VALVE Solenoid valves provide on/off control for low flow volume locations,
including air diaphragm chemical pumps and pneumatic valves. The
PLC controls the solenoid valves.
SOLIDS RETENTION The time required to remove the working volume of the bioreactor’s
TIME (SRT) mixed liquor by the average flow rate of waste sludge from the system.
Anoxic and Aerobic Reactor Volume (L)

SRT (d) = Sludge Wasting Rate (L/d)
SOLUTE Material (such as salts) dissolved by a solvent (such as water).
SOLVENT Any material that acts to dissolve another. The solvent constitutes the
dissolving medium, or liquid portion, of a solution. Water is frequently
referred to as the universal solvent.
SPACERS Polyethylene sheets with die cut water flow paths and manifolds to
allow water in the membrane stack to be channeled into
demineralizing and concentrating streams.
STACK A group of two or three elements arranged in a vertical stack with a

common permeate collection pipe.
STACK DIFFERENTIAL The hydraulic pressure between the demineralizing and concentrating
PRESSURE streams in the membrane stack.
STACK SHORTING Damage to stack membranes due to excessive voltage travelling

through the membranes and generating heat.
STAGING In reverse osmosis (RO), a process configuration where rejected water

is fed through additional sets of membrane in order to increase
recovery (without changing final product water quality).
STRAINER A slotted or screen sieve for screening flowing liquid.
Rev. 0 Glossary
June, 2010 10-31
Facility
SUPERVISORY A computer system that collects and records process data and alarms,
CONTROL AND DATA and provides a graphical user interface for a process system. It is
ACQUISITION typically a Windows-based desktop computer that runs a SCADA
(SCADA) software package. The SCADA, which is the center of the control
system, acts as a link between the PLC and the operator. It allows the
control of valves, pumps, and blowers. All electronic parameters are
displayed and setpoint values are stored.
SWITCH A device that produces a binary signal in response to an operator

action or the comparison of a process variable to a setpoint. For
example a High level switch converts a tank level into a binary signal
for high level. The device may be a mechanical float switch, a relay in
an electronic instrument, or a software comparator.
SYSTEM RECOVERY The system recovery ratio is the ratio of water recovered as permeate
versus the amount of feed water supplied to the system. A high
recovery ratio means that a large percentage of the water is collected
as permeate; a low recovery ratio results in most of the feed water
going to the reject stream. As the recovery ratio increases, the
concentration of the reject stream increases and the permeate quality
decreases. As the recovery ratio is lowered, the proportion of feed
water that is rejected increases.
Operating the RO subsystem at a higher rate of recovery than

recommended will result in premature membrane fouling.
The formula for determining percent recovery is as follows:
Permeate Flow Rate x 100

Percent Recovery = Feed Flow Rate
SUPPORT MEDIA A high-density material with a graded particle size for supporting resin
(example: gravel, anthrafil, and quartz).
TANK DRAIN FOR An event that takes place once per day, consisting of draining the tank
ZEEWEED 1000 while backpulsing and air scouring.
Glossary Rev. 0
10-32 June, 2010
Facility
TANK HEATER During a Recovery Clean, a CIP tank heater increases the temperature
of the cleaning solution.
TEMPERATURE The feed water temperature has a pronounced effect on the

EFFECTS permeability through the membranes. As the operating temperature
increases, the permeability also increases.
TEMPERATURE Temperature transmitters monitor temperatures.

TRANSMITTER
TOTAL DISSOLVED The concentration of all solids dissolved in a solution (normally

SOLIDS (TDS) expressed in ppm).
TOTAL KJELDAHL The total concentration of nitrogen in a sample present as ammonia or

NITROGEN (TKN) bound in organic compounds. Total Kjeldahl Nitrogen (TKN) is usually
measured in mg/L.
TOTAL ORGANIC A measure of the amount of organic materials suspended or dissolved

CARBON (TOC) in water. Total Organic Carbon (TOC) is a quicker sampling method than
measuring Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD) or Biological Oxygen
Demand (BOD) for determining the quality of the effluent.
TOTAL SOLIDS (TS) A measure of the amount of material that is dissolved or suspended in
a water sample, by weight. Total Solids is determined by allowing a
known volume to evaporate and then weighing the remaining residue.
Total Solids = Total Dissolved Solids + Total Suspended Solids
TOTAL SUSPENDED A measure of the solids (normally expressed in ppm) found in water,
SOLIDS (TSS) which can be removed by filtration.
TRAIN FOR ZEEWEED A group of cassettes immersed in a tank and connected to a common
MEMBRANES header through which the permeate is drawn. Suction is created with
either a permeate/process pump or a siphon.
TRAIN FOR A single filtration or ion exchange system capable of producing the
SOFTENERS desired treated water.
Rev. 0 Glossary
June, 2010 10-33
Facility
TRANSMEMBRANE The difference in pressure across the membranes, between the outer
PRESSURE (TMP) and inner surface of membrane. TMP is the driving force that causes
filtration through the membranes to occur. This pressure difference is
created by applying a partial vacuum inside the membrane fibers with
the suction of the permeate/process pump. TMP can be varied by
changing the speed of this pump.
TRIGGER A trigger allows a change in operation. It is a normal event that can

clear an alarm or be one of several points in a sequence of events.
TUBULAR MEMBRANE A pressure driven cross flow filtration membrane used for separating
and concentrating suspended solids and high molecular weight
particles from a variety of waste and process streams. The filtration
surface is a strong polymeric membrane cast on the inside surface of
a porous support tube. The membrane is constructed of materials that
can withstand harsh chemical environments.
TURBIDITY A measure (via light penetration) of the cloudiness of an otherwise clear

liquid. Measured in Nephelometric Turbidity Units (NTU). Sediment or
foreign particles stirred up or suspended in water.
TURBIDITY METER Turbidity meters are placed in the permeate piping or the feed piping
(TURBIDIMETER) to measure turbidity. When registering high turbidity, the PLC will
trigger an alarm and shut down the ZeeWeed system.
ULTRAFILTRATION Water treatment methods used to remove suspended solids, bacteria,

and viruses from water. This method operates using low pressures and
typically using hollow-fiber or rolled membrane elements.
ULTRAVIOLET (UV) A light wave, at a specific wavelength, used to disinfect water. UV will
kill any viable bacteria, viruses, and parasites.
UNREINFORCED Conventional hollow fiber, which is based on a simple polymeric

FIBER structure, used in the ZeeWeed 1000 module.
VACUUM DEGASIFIER A tower to which a vacuum is applied and through which water
droplets descend to remove dissolved gas.
VACUUM PUMP Vacuum pumps remove air from the system and ensure that the
permeate/process pump remains primed.
VALVE TEST The process in which the operation of motor-operated valves may be
manually tested.
Glossary Rev. 0
10-34 June, 2010
Facility
VARIABLE An electrical device attached to a pump motor used to automatically

FREQUENCY DRIVE adjust motor speed in response to process conditions. A VFD controls
(VFD) the speed of a pump by changing the frequency of the alternating
current to power the motor. For example, a pump motor operating at
1800 rpm at 60 Hz would run at 900 rpm if the frequency is reduced to
30 Hz.
VOID VOLUME The space between media particles in a settled bed.
VOLATILE SOLIDS The total content of suspended and dissolved solids in water, which are
(VS) volatile at 550ºC (1022ºF).
VOLATILE The suspended solids that can be filtered from a sample of water and
SUSPENDED SOLIDS are volatile at 550ºC (1022ºF).
(VSS)
VOLTAGE The difference in electrical potential across two points. This is

analogous to gauge pressure in water applications. Voltage is
measured in volts (V).
WATER HAMMER Instantaneous surges of water pressure caused by a sudden

interruption in water flow.
WATER SOFTENER Cation resin in sodium form that removes cations such as calcium and
magnesium from the water, and releases sodium ions.
WATER SOFTENING The exchange of sodium by ion exchange.
WATER FLOW A die-cut sheet of plastic which forms direct flow paths for
SPACER demineralized and concentrate streams. (EDI)
WATER TRANSFER Water that is electrically (but not hydraulically) transferred through the
membranes along with ions.
ZENOGEM The trade name for GE W&PT’s process of using a ZeeWeed membrane
system to clarify effluent from a bioreactor.
ZENOTRAC The trade name for GE W&PT’s powerful plant process support tool
which provides fully automated process data monitoring and trend
analysis.
ZEEWEED The trade name for GE W&PT’s immersible hollow fiber filtration
module.
Rev. 0 Glossary
June, 2010 10-35
This page has been
GE Water & Process
Technologies
APPENDIX A
ZEEWEED 500D
IMMERSED HOLLOW-FIBER
ULTRAFILTRATION TECHNOLOGY
NOTICE
The enclosed materials are considered proprietary property of GE Water & Process Technologies. No assignments, either implied or expressed, of intellectual
property rights, data, know-how, trade secrets or licenses of use thereof are given. All information is provided exclusively for the addressee for the purposes of
evaluation and is not to be reproduced or divulged to other parties, nor used for manufacture or other means, or to authorize any of the above, without the
express written consent of GE Water & Process Technologies. The acceptance of this document will be construed as an acceptance of the foregoing conditions.
* Trademark of General Electric Company; may be registered in one or more countries.
This page has been
A.1
CAUTIONS
This page has been
Facility
A.1.1 CAUTIONS SPECIFIC TO THIS SUBSYSTEM
The following precautions must be read and adhered to by all system

operators.
1. This appendix must be read and understood in its entirety before

operating the subsystem.
2. Membranes must be kept moist at all times. Store in a

temperature between 5 - 35ºC (41 - 95ºF). Do not allow
membranes to freeze or dry out.
3. If the system has been preserved (example: for shipment or

shutdown), any shipping preservatives should be flushed from
the system before startup. See Section 3.7.1: Flushing for more
information.
4. Membranes must be immersed in a biocidal solution prior to

storage, shipping or system shutdowns longer than 72 hours.
Flushing the system at least once per day while off-line is also
sufficient for short term shutdowns. See the section on cleaning
for procedures.
5. The customer is fully responsible for the effects of unapproved

chemicals when used with ZeeWeed filtration systems. Their use
will render the membrane warranty null and void. Contact GE
Water & Process Technologies if there is a concern about
chemical use.
6. To avoid damaging the membranes, all prescreening measures

must be in operation at all times. Do not bypass prescreening
processes under any circumstances.
7. During construction, maintenance, or any other work performed

directly above the membrane tank, ensure that foreign debris
(example: pipe turnings) does not fall into the tank.
Rev. 0 ZeeWeed 500D - Cautions

June, 2010 A-1
Facility
8. During membrane integrity tests (MIT) or bubble tests, the

compressed air must be clean, dry, and free of oil. Do not exceed
the maximum recommended pressure.
9. Do not allow membrane fibers to come in contact with sharp

objects, become entangled with equipment or tools, be pulled
tightly, or to freeze or dry out.
10. Do not clean the membranes with a high-pressure water stream

(example: pressure washer or fire hose), and do not use water
that exceeds maximum temperatures for membranes
11. Membranes that are to be returned to GE W&PT must be cleaned,

sanitized, and preserved before shipment. Contact GE W&PT for
instructions before returning membranes.
ZeeWeed 500D - Cautions Rev. 0

A-2 June, 2010
A.2
SUBSYSTEM OVERVIEW
This page has been
Facility
A.2.1 OVERVIEW
The ZeeWeed 500D is a supported hollow-fiber ultrafiltration membrane
technology introduced in 1997.
The ZeeWeed 500D product line consists of both modules and cassettes.
A module is the basic building block and smallest replaceable unit of a
ZeeWeed 500D membrane treatment system as shown in Figure A.2.1 -
ZeeWeed 500D Cassettes in a Treatment System. Modules are joined
together to form a cassette, which is the smallest operable unit of a
treatment system.
Cassettes are integrated into a treatment system by suspension in a

membrane tank and connection to permeate collection and air
distribution piping. They are designed to be lifted by overhead devices
and special tools exist to facilitate cassette access.
Figure A.2.1 - ZeeWeed 500D Cassettes in a Treatment System
Rev. 0 ZeeWeed 500D - Subsystem Overview

June, 2010 A-5
Facility
A.2.2 MEMBRANE FIBER

The ZeeWeed 500D membrane is an outside-in supported
polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) hollow-fiber. The term ‘supported’ refers to
the fact that the membrane polymer coats a braided material that
reinforces the fiber. The ultrafiltration membrane fiber has a nominal
pore size of 0.04 µm and is capable of removing suspended solids,
protozoa, bacteria, and most viruses. As a result, high quality water can
be produced with minimum chemical addition and treatment.
A.2.3 MODULES
Membrane fibers are arranged vertically between two headers. Water is
drawn through the fibers into the permeate header and then exits the
module via the permeate spigot or saddle. The module has a key, which
is used to lock the module in place when it is installed in the cassette.
Figure A.2.2 - ZeeWeed 500D Module
ZeeWeed 500D - Subsystem Overview Rev. 0

A-6 June, 2010
Facility
The following table provides general specifications for the ZeeWeed

500D module.
Table A.2.1 - Module Specifications

Module Dimensions
Height 2,198 mm (86.4”)
Width 844 mm (33.2”)
Depth 49 mm (1.9”)
Module Weight
Max. Shipping Weight (crated) 26 kg (58 lb) (wastewater)
28 kg (62 lb) (drinking water)
Lifting Weight (varies with solids 26-75 kg (58-163 lb) (wastewater)
accumulation) 30-74 kg (66-163 lb) (drinking water)
Membrane Properties
Nominal Surface Area 31.6 m2 (340 ft2) (wastewater)
31.6 m2 (340 ft2); 40.9 m2 (440 ft2) (drinking
water)
Material PVDF
Nominal Pore Size 0.04 microns
Surface Properties Non-Ionic & Hydrophilic
Fiber Diameter 1.9 mm OD/0.8 mm ID
Flow Path Outside-In
Operating Specifications
TMP Range -55 to 55 kPa (-8 to 8 psi) (wastwater),
-90 to 90 kPa (-13 to 13 psi) (drinking water)
Max. Operating Temperature 40ºC (104ºF)
Operating pH Range 5.0-9.5
Cleaning Specifications
Max. Cleaning Temperature 40ºC (104ºF)
Cleaning pH Range 2.0-10.5
Max. Cl2 Concentration 1000 ppm

June, 2010 A-7
Facility
A.2.4 CASSETTES
The cassette is comprised of a welded stainless steel frame. The
ZeeWeed 500D module can be slid into and out of the cassette. Four
modules are connected in parallel into top and bottom common
saddles, which are linked by a 2’’ PVC permeate downcomer pipe. The
top saddle connects into the stainless steel 8’’ permeate manifold. The
cassette is then linked to an external permeate header on the train using
hard pipe or hose connections.
The cassette uses 3’’ aeration CPVC downcomer pipes to feed tube
diffusers assembled into a grid at the bottom of the cassette. For
membrane bioreactor applications, the 1.5’’ PVC diffuser tubes are clear;
for other applications, the tubes are white.
Figure A.2.3 - ZeeWeed 500D Cassette

A-8 June, 2010
Facility
The following table provides general specifications for the ZeeWeed

500D cassette.
Table A.2.2 - Cassette Specifications

Cassette Size 48M 64M
Max. No. of ZeeWeed 48 64
Modules
Dimensions
Length 2,112 mm (83.1”)
743 mm (29.3”)
Width
2,085 mm (82.1”)
Height
Tie-Points
Permeate Connection 6” 316 L SS vert. pipe 8” 316 L SS horz. pipe
Air Connection two 3” PVC vert. spigot
Weights
Max. Shipping Weight 1,730 kg (3,815 lb) 2,040 kg (4,500 lb)
(crated)
Lifting Weight (varies 1,335-4,260 kg (2,945-9,385 lb) 1,425-4,535 kg (3,140-10,000 lb)

with solids accumulation)

June, 2010 A-9
Facility
A.2.5 THEORY OF OPERATIONS
A.2.5.1 FILTRATION
Filtration is defined as the separation of one or more components from
a fluid stream. In conventional usage, it usually refers to the separation
of solid or insoluble particles from liquid or gaseous streams. The most
commonly employed membrane processes and the filtration ranges in
which they operate are presented in Figure A.2.4 - Filtration Spectrum.
Figure A.2.4 - Filtration Spectrum
Membrane separation processes can be categorized in various ways;

three of which are pore size, molecular weight cutoff (MWCO), and
operation pressure. As the pore size gets smaller (and the molecular
weight cutoff decreases), the pressure applied to the membrane for
separation generally increases. The water treatment objectives of each
system decide the basis on which a process is selected and operated.

A-10 June, 2010
Facility
A.2.5.2 ULTRAFILTRATION: AN INTRODUCTION

Ultrafiltration (UF) is a process that filters particles on the basis of size. In
membrane separations, UF is typically used to separate or remove
relatively large particles, such as microbes, bacteria, and
macromolecules with molecular weights greater than about 300,000
molecular weight. UF uses “loose” membranes, which refers to
membranes that have relatively large pores.
A.2.5.3 ZEEWEED ULTRAFILTRATION

ZeeWeed 500D is an immersed ultrafiltration membrane system for low
suspended solids water feeds. The membrane and process have been
developed with the goal of reducing costs while maintaining the high
level of treated water quality.
The filtrate (permeate) is pushed through the membrane from the bulk
fluid by atmospheric pressure due to a partial vacuum applied within the
membrane fibers. The physical barrier of the ZeeWeed membrane
prevents the passage of bacterial organisms and solids into the water
supply.

June, 2010 A-11
This page has been
A.3
INSTALLATION & TESTING
This page has been
Facility
A.3.1 INTRODUCTION
This section provides information regarding subsystem installation,
initial testing, and maintenance procedures. This information must be
read and internalized in its entirety by system operators prior to
installing or operating the subsystem.
A.3.2 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

The following must be available before the subsystem can be installed:
APPLICABLE DRAWINGS: The Process and Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID),

General Arrangement (GA), Plot Plan, and Electrical drawings for the
system are provided in this manual. These drawings will be needed
during installation.
WATER: Water introduced into the system during installation must be

free of particulates, and any debris that falls into the tanks must be
removed immediately.
ELECTRICITY: GE W&PT is not responsible for supplying power to the

subsystem. During installation, a qualified electrician must verify the
following:
• That all electrical connections meet local government and

industry standards.
• That all electrical cables have been properly fitted.
• That all 3-phase motors have been wired for proper rotation.
QUALIFIED PERSONNEL: A qualified electrician, pipefitter, and millwright are

required on site when commissioning the system.
Rev. 0 ZeeWeed 500D - Installation & Testing

June, 2010 A-15
Facility
A.3.3 PERSONAL SAFETY

It is crucial that fall arrest equipment be worn when working overtop the
membrane tank. A fall arrest harness must be worn and appropriate tie-
off lanyards must be used while installing and/or working on a cassette.
Figure A.3.1 - Harness and Lanyard
A.3.4 HANDLING OF FACTORY SHIPPED

ZEEWEED CASSETTES
• ZeeWeed 500D cassettes are always shipped with modules
installed.
• The cassette itself is sealed in a plastic bag to retain moisture to

prevent damage to the membranes due to drying.
• The cassette is shipped on its side in a plywood crate.
ZeeWeed 500D - Installation & Testing Rev. 0

A-16 June, 2010
Facility
A.3.4.1 UNLOADING SHIPPED CASSETTES

The Installer is responsible for the prompt and proper unloading of all
membrane equipment and materials received into his custody. During
unloading, ensure the following:
• Dock level, off-loading facilities are recommended.
• The wooden shipping crates have been designed to be lifted from

the bottom using a forklift.
• Damage incurred or observed during equipment off-loading

needs to be immediately reported to your GE representative.
It is recommended that an experienced/qualified forklift truck driver

unloads the membranes from the carrier. ZeeWeed 500D cassettes
are shipped on their sides and will require uprighting. Follow all
procedures carefully to prevent injury. Shipping crates are not to be
stacked!
A.3.4.2 CONFIRMING EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

A cross-check should be performed on the shipment using the packing
slip to confirm the delivery of membrane equipment.
Do not open membrane crates. Verification is limited to external

examination of crates.
• The equipment delivery will be checked for content and any

damage that may have occurred during shipping or the
unloading process.
• Any non-conformance shall be immediately reported to your GE

representative (in writing). Digital pictures of damage should be
provided.

June, 2010 A-17
Facility
• Refer to A.3.4.3 Confirming Handling Indicators to confirm the

condition of the handling indicators.
• When the equipment shipment has been checked, the

Equipment Acceptance Certificate and Checklist must be
completed and signed by the Site Organization's representatives.
• The Installer shall expeditiously replace all materials and

equipment that are lost or damaged while in the custody of the
Installer.
• Replacement materials and equipment will be of a type and

quality equal to the original materials and equipment, and will be
acceptable to GE W&PT and to the Owner.
A.3.4.3 CONFIRMING HANDLING INDICATORS

GE W&PT includes a series of shipping indicators to protect the integrity
of the membrane cassettes while they are being shipped. Indicators
may include freeze and/or heat (see Figure A.3.2 - Shipping Indicators).
• The Installer's representative should document the indicator

condition on the indicator check label located on the membrane
crate.
Table A.3.1 - Handling Indicators

Freeze Indicator Heat Indicator
Indicator Location External External
When to check At time of receipt At time of receipt
At the time of discovery, the Installer must inform the GE representative

of any triggered indicators.

A-18 June, 2010
Facility
TIP: A triggered During membrane installation, the GE representative on site will also
indicator indicates inspect and record the status of all indicators.
ideal shipping
conditions were not
maintained. The GE
representative will
evaluate membranes
prior to installation.
Figure A.3.2 - Shipping Indicators
Duplicate indicators used by the GE representative are located inside

the crate.
A.3.5 STORING MEMBRANES

The Installer must provide all facilities and services required for the
storage, maintenance, protection, and security of the equipment and
materials delivered by GE W&PT.
The following conditions should be followed:
• Equipment and materials must be stored in assigned lay-down

areas.
• Stored equipment and materials must be adequately supported

and protected to prevent damage. Equipment must be moved
into the permanent building or onto its permanent foundation as
soon as construction will permit.

June, 2010 A-19
Facility
• Stored materials and equipment must not be allowed to contact

the ground. In warehouses that do not have dry concrete or
suspended floors, materials and equipment must be stored on
platforms or shoring.
• Indoor storage furnished by the Installer must consist of suitable

construction trailers or portable enclosures and must be
weather-tight, well ventilated, and secure against theft and
vandalism.
• Access doors must be adequate to accommodate the movement

and handling of materials and equipment to be stored and must
be equipped with secure locks.
• Membrane cassettes will be stored upright on a level surface.
• The membrane cassette crates must remain closed until the

Installer begins membrane installation, to prevent permanent
membrane damage due to drying out.
• The membrane crates should never be exposed to excessive

vibration or large bumps.
Membranes should be stored in a dark dry area with a storage

temperature between 5 - 35ºC (41 - 95ºF) and a setpoint of 20ºC (68ºF).
A.3.5.1 STORING CRATED CASSETTES

The following conditions should be ensured when storing crated
cassettes:
• Sheltered area protected from freezing, direct sunlight, or

extreme heat.
• Vacuum sealed bag should remain sealed until membrane

installation is being performed.

A-20 June, 2010
Facility
The cassettes have been manufactured and preserved to comply with

the contractually specified membrane/cassette delivery and installation
schedule. Should the installation of the membranes/cassettes be
delayed more than one month, contact your GE representative for
instructions.
A.3.5.2 STORING BAGGED MODULES

New modules preserved with glycerin solution, bagged and factory
sealed, may be stored for up to 12 months from manufacturing. For the
exact expiry date, contact GE W&PT technical support. The following
conditions should be ensured when storing bagged modules:
• Stored in a sheltered area protected from freezing, direct

sunlight, extreme heat, and winds that could accelerate drying.
• The module should be kept bagged and sealed at all times.
Disassembly of cassettes to replace modules requires attention and

care. Contact GE W&PT technical services for reassembly procedures,
which include step-by-step instructions, bolt torques, and identification
of non-reusable hardware.
A.3.5.3 STORING WETTED MEMBRANES
ZeeWeed membranes should not be allowed to dry out as membrane

properties will be adversely affected. Drying may result in
irreversible damage to the membranes.
If the preservative is flushed out or if the module has been in contact

with water, the membrane must not be allowed to dry out under any
circumstances. The membranes may be left in air for a maximum of 45
minutes out of direct sunlight and wind. After 45 minutes, membranes
should be immersed in water. Spraying the membranes after this period
is not sufficient to prevent drying-out and will not allow a longer period
of contact with air.

June, 2010 A-21
Facility
If membranes are frequently lightly misted (not sprayed with fire hoses
or pressure washers) from the time they have been taken out of the
water, they may be left in air for a maximum of 6 hours between 5ºC -
35ºC (41ºF - 95ºF). Since the membranes are maintained wet, there is no
need for specific rewetting procedures. However, if necessary for other
reasons (for example, drinking water compliance and residual of
preservatives) the standard procedures for rinsing and disinfection may
be used before starting the operation.
If it is impractical to immerse or repeatedly spray the membrane, the

membrane should be cleaned, preserved in glycerin solution, and re-
bagged according to membrane preservation procedures (see A.3.12
System Shutdown and Membrane Preservation).
Discuss longer storage durations with GE W&PT technical services.
A.3.5.4 STORING WETTED CASSETTES

For storage periods of up to approximately 15 days, simple immersion
of the cassettes in water containing sodium hypochlorite (NaOCl) with a
residual concentration of 3 mg/L is suitable. Perform weekly testing of
the water and add chlorine if the residual chlorine concentration drops
to less than 0.2 mg/L. A Recovery Clean of the membrane prior to
storage is strongly recommended. Periodic aeration may also be
necessary to prevent anoxic or anaerobic conditions from developing in
the tank. Perform weekly testing of the water to ensure that the residual
chlorine concentration is within acceptable limits. A log must be
maintained recording daily sodium hypochlorite concentration and
water temperature.
Longer storage durations are to be discussed with GE W&PT technical

services.
Four (4) - 3/8 - 16 NC

A-22 June, 2010
Facility
A.3.6 UNCRATING AND INSTALLING CASSETTES

The purpose of this document is to outline the steps required to properly
install modules into a 500D 48E WW cassette installed with MARS.
Follow proper safety procedures to prevent injury when carrying out

this procedure.
These instructions are specific to this model of cassette.
Proper crane training is required along with a certified and inspected

crane.
Prior to installation of the membranes, all piping and tanks must be

installed, tested, and readied to accept membrane cassettes.
A.3.6.1 PREPARING THE SITE

The Membrane Pre-Installation Checklist must be completed before
cassettes can be uncrated and installed. The GE representative will
provide the Membrane Pre-Installation Checklist, the Membrane Map,
and Repair Log.
All loose shipped parts required for cassette installation must be located.
All guide brackets, permeate piping and air piping are to be installed as
per installation documentation supplied by GE W&PT.
Membrane tanks must be thoroughly cleaned and free of debris. There

must be enough water in the membrane tank to ensure that the fibers
are completely submerged within water.
Locate and reserve an area for proper cassette assembly and unloading.

June, 2010 A-23
Facility
The following parts should be available:
• Forklift with extended forks rated for cassette weight – to move

crate
• Crane/hoist, slings, and lifting bracket – to upright cassette and

install cassette in tank. Lifting hoist requirements:
• 64 element cassette: 3000-4500 kg (6614-9921 lbs)
• 48 element cassette: 2800-3800 kg (6172-8377 lbs)
• 2 sheets of 1 in. thick foam (90 in. x 90 in.)
• Four (4) 3/4 in. lifting safety hoist rings rated for 2268 kg (5000
lbs), material: 4140 aircraft quality carbon steel (recommended
manufacturer ACTEK, part #46018) c/w 8 3/4 in. diameter SS flat
washers and 4 3/4 in. diameter SS hex nuts (included with
shipment)
• Four (4) slings
• Four (4) point spreader bar
• Two (2) point spreader bar
• Module Removal Tool
• NEFAB tool/flat head screwdriver – to uncrate the cassette
• Camera – for documenting the condition of the cassette and

indic in.” socket – to attach cassette arms
• 1 1/8 in. socket - to attach cassette arms
• PVC glue and primer – to install necessary PVC elbows to cassette
• Anti-Seize - use NSF grade only for drinking water applications

(for example, White Knight)
Always use trained operators and inspected equipment.

A-24 June, 2010
Facility
• Four (4) - 3 in. x 3/4 in. 316 SS bolts
• Eight (8) - 3/4 in. 316 SS nuts
• Four (4) - 3/4 in. 316 SS flat washers
• Four (4) - 3/4 in. 316 SS nord-lock washers
A.3.6.2 INSTALLING LEVELING PINS

The purpose of these pins is to allow for proper leveling of each
membrane cassette during the final stages of the plant construction.
The cassette must be individually leveled to a tolerance of +/-1/8 in. per

cassette within a train. All cassettes across adjoining process must be +/
- 1/4 in. level tolerance of one another. The cassette support design in
the membrane tank includes adjustable pins to fine tune the cassette
levels. Use a laser level prior to cassette installation to ensure the
required tolerances are achieved. Cassettes that are not properly
leveled may exhibit more rapid fouling as air distribution may be
affected.
Ensure that the following parts are available:
• Item #1 - Hitch Pin or Double Split Shaft Collar - please refer to

project specifics
• Item #3 - Qty 8 - 1in. UNC 316L SS Hex Nut
• Item #5 - Qty 8 - 1 in. NL SS Nord-Lock locking washer 1 in. Nom
• Torque = 104 ft-lbs
A.3.6.3 MANEUVERING THE CASSETTE

It is important that before any work begins, the necessary planning and
precautions are done in order to ensure that the membrane installation
procedure is safely carried out. It is the responsibility of those installing
the membranes to properly prepare.

June, 2010 A-25
Facility
Before the crates or cassettes can be moved, ensure that the lifting
mechanism (fork lift and crane) are in good operating conditions and are
rated for the load.
While maneuvering the crate or cassette, ensure that no one is in its path
or out of sight of the crane/forklift operator.
Do not stand under the cassette or crate.
The forklift and crane operators must be qualified and certified

forklift and crane operators and must have the proper
documentation on the person while operating the equipment.
A.3.6.4 UNCRATING CASSETTES

ZeeWeed 500D cassettes are always shipped with modules installed.
The cassette is shipped on its side in a plywood crate. The cassette itself
is sealed in plastic to retain moisture and prevent membrane damage.
500D crates are not designed to be stacked on top of one another.
Damage, such as punctures, water damage, and tripped indicators

incurred during equipment off-loading needs to be reported to the site
superintendent and GE W&PT immediately.
Uncrate the membranes with a GE W&PT representative present to

monitor the process and verify the receiving tanks and piping have been
satisfactorily prepared. Failure to do so may affect the membrane
warranty.
The cassette will need to be transported to a designated uncrating area

using a forklift. Uncrating the cassettes is to be completed on a dry level
surface, out of direct sunlight.

A-26 June, 2010
Facility
The cassette should not be allowed to freeze. Refer to Membrane

Care.
Membranes are not to be uncrated if any of the following activities are

taking place in the immediate vicinity:
• painting
• wiring and terminations
• roofing
• grinding
• tinwork
• welding
• pipe flushing
• sandblasting
• drilling
• all power tools that discharge debris (including carpentry)
• or any other activity that could pose harm to the membranes
The cassettes should be uncrated by removing the top first followed by

the sides. Please note that at least two people are required to uncrate
the cassette. The following pictures illustrate the order of cassette
uncrating.
Use two workers to remove the box sides.

June, 2010 A-27
Facility
The top of the crate is to be removed first followed by one of the sides.
Figure A.3.3 - Top of Crate Removed
The ends will remain supported by the other side of the cassette. When
removing the other side, care must be taken to ensure the remaining
ends of the cassette are supported. See Figure A.3.3 - Top of Crate
Removed.
TIP: Crate
dimensions (LxWxH)
are: 111 in. x 83 in. x
89 in. (2.82 m x 2.10 m
x 2.26 m).
Figure A.3.4 - Cassette Sealed in Plastic

A-28 June, 2010
Facility
A.3.6.4.1 REMOVING THE CASSETTE BAG

The cassette comes packaged in a vacuum sealed bag. After the
cassette is uncrated, and immediately prior to installing the cassette into
the membrane tank with water, carefully remove the bag. See Figure
A.3.4 - Cassette Sealed in Plastic.
Cut open the bag sealing at the top, then carefully roll it down to the base
of the crate. See Figure A.3.5 - Bag Sealing the Cassette.
Do NOT cut along the center of the cassette. Fibers can be damaged.
Figure A.3.5 - Bag Sealing the Cassette
Once rolled down to the base of the cassette, cut the bag at the base and
discard.
There is a plastic wrap underneath the bag. The plastic wrap must
stay intact for the uprighting of the cassette.

June, 2010 A-29
Facility
Depending upon the version of the cassette, it may come equipped with
yellow shipping braces. If these braces are present, they need to be
removed prior to uprighting the cassette.
Figure A.3.6 - Removing the Cassette Bag
If the membranes have been in storage, check for any signs of mold
on the fibers. If mold is present, immediately rebag and contact GE
W&PT.
A.3.6.5 MOVING UNCRATED CASSETTES

When the cassette has been removed from the shipping crate, care
must be taken to ensure that contact with the membrane fibers is
avoided.
Lift the cassette by the factory-supplied lifting points on the top of the
cassette using the lifting module. If a lifting module is not available, a
spreader bar is required.
Do not attach ropes to the four hanger brackets and lift the hanger
brackets. The hanger brackets will not withstand the horizontal
(inward) loads produced by the ropes.

A-30 June, 2010
Facility
Cassettes are designed to be lifted vertically and lowered slowly. Do not

swing or drop cassettes. Never tilt or drag an uncrated cassette. Treat
the product with care.
If necessary, the uncrated and uprighted cassette can be moved on the

wooden skid on which it was shipped, using a forklift. Extreme caution
must be taken to avoid wind, environmental, and safety risks that may
be present while moving the cassette in this manner.
If there is contact with the fibers, the integrity of the membranes may
be compromised. Advise GE W&PT staff on site immediately so the
fibers can be inspected and repairs can be initiated before cassette is
installed. If fiber damage is not reported to GE W&PT staff, extra time
and effort will be required later to remove the cassette and make the
repairs.
A.3.6.6 INSPECTING THE ZEEWEED 500D CASSETTE -

INSPECTION 1
With the cassette uncrated but still on its side, perform the following
inspections of the aeration piping and connections:
• Ensure that aerators are properly in place. See Figure A.3.7 -

Cassette Inspections and Figure A.3.8 - Aerators.
• Ensure that the large holes on the aerators are facing down
relative to the cassette.
• Ensure that all saddles are securely clipped to the cassette frame.
• Ensure that the correct number of non permeating (“dummy”)

headers are installed and in the correct location.
• Ensure that the correct type of aerators are used under the non-
permeating (“dummy”) headers (some aerators are “left” aerators
and some are “right” aerators depending on which side the small
side holes are on).

June, 2010 A-31
Facility
• Ensure that the two main aeration pipes are installed and secure.
Figure A.3.7 - Cassette Inspections
Figure A.3.8 - Aerators

A-32 June, 2010
Facility
A.3.6.7 INSTALLING UNION TO CASSETTE’S MAIN

AERATION PIPES
All cassettes require that either a PVC union or hose barb fitting be glued
to the PVC pipes on the cassette. In order to minimize the amount of time
and work required on the cassette after it is installed and to reduce the
risk of damage to the membranes, these parts should be installed prior
to the cassette being installed in the tank. The ideal time is when the
cassette is still on its side.
Figure A.3.9 - Union Installation
A.3.6.8 UPRIGHTING A CASSETTE

The cassettes are shipped on their sides and need to be lifted, then
rotated to the upright position.
Read this procedure completely before proceeding with the

uprighting operation.

June, 2010 A-33
Facility
To promote safety, uprighting a cassette must be done in a dedicated

staging area. The staging area shall be cordoned-off to people who are
not directly involved in this activity.
Bring shipping crates into the staging area one at a time. Clear the area
of any material and provide the safe space required for both removing
the cassette from the wooden skid and uprighting it. The area for the
uprighting operation shall be at least 7.5 meters X 3 meters (25 ft X 10 ft).
Clearly mark the area and isolate it, so that access of unauthorized
personnel is prevented. The use of a perimeter fence, rope/chain
barriers, pylons, or other signalling and blocking means is highly
recommended.
Be alert! Cassettes have sharp edges.
Follow these two steps:
1. A.3.6.8.1 Removing the Cassette from the Wooden Skid.
2. A.3.6.8.2 Uprighting Cassette.
Remove all uncrating material from the staging area before

commencing the uprighting activity.
The use of an overhead hoist is recommended; however, if an

appropriate overhead hoist is not available, then a mobile telescopic
boom crane or equivalent lifting device should be used. The hoist/crane
must be rated for at least a 5 ton (10,000 lb) lifting capacity at both the
jib extension and the angle required for the lift.
The operation of the hoist/crane shall be performed by a qualified

operator, according to the local and international safety codes and
regulations for lifting operations. If a crane is being used, it shall be
located at an appropriate distance to prevent collision with the cassette
during the lifting and uprighting.

A-34 June, 2010
Facility
Follow proper safety procedures to prevent injury.
A.3.6.8.1 REMOVING THE CASSETTE FROM THE WOODEN SKID

One set of four hoist rings is included with every 10 cassettes (or less) in
the shipment. Attach the four lifting hoist rings to the four upper corners
of the cassette.
Figure A.3.10 - Hoist Ring Location
Hoist rings are made of carbon steel. To prevent cassette frame

stainless steel contamination, it is important to install 3/4 in.
stainless steel flat washers on the top plate along with a stainless
steel nut.
• Tighten the bolt to the recommended torque of 100 ft/lbs.
• Ensure that the bushing of the hoist ring is sitting flush against
the frame.
• Verify that the hoist is free to swivel and pivot in every direction.

June, 2010 A-35
Facility
• Confirm bolt, shoulder pins, or bail do not show any cracks or

signs of wear.
• Secure shoulder pins.
Figure A.3.11 - Hoist Ring Assembly
Ensure that the following steps are taken before performing the
uprighting procedure:
1. Place a 1 in. thick foam sheet on the clear and flat ground where
the cassette will be placed for uprighting.
2. Use a four point lift frame and spreader bar to uncrate and
upright a cassette. This lifting configuration is highly
recommended in conditions where overhead space is limited.
3. Ensure that the hoist rings do not touch or pry against any
surface of the cassette frame, in particular the vertical corner
post, except at the location of attachment. If a lift frame or
spreader bar is not available, an arrangement similar to what is
shown in Figure A.3.12 - Lifting a Cassette Without a Four-Point
Lift Frame and Spreader Bar is recommended. Follow these
recommendations:

A-36 June, 2010
Facility
• Use two slings on each lifting bracket. The sling closest to the
cassette should be a short nylon strap about 4 feet long. This
arrangement will prevent damage from the crane hooks. The
longer cables should be at least 20 feet long.
• Use flexible synthetic material (such as reinforced man-made

fibers) instead of metal chains to avoid damage to the
cassette body material.
• Minimum angles between the horizontal plane and the cables

should be:
i. 60° where the spreader bar (lifting frame) is used
ii. 75° for one point lift
Figure A.3.12 - Lifting a Cassette Without a Four-Point Lift Frame and Spreader
Bar
Ensure that the surrounding area is clear of people.
4. Slowly lift the hoist until the cassette is at the minimum height
(not more than 2 in. or 5 cm) required to move the cassette off the
wooden skid.

June, 2010 A-37
Facility
5. Slowly and gently transfer the cassette to above the 1 in. foam
sheet, and gently lower the cassette to the ground.
6. Remove the skid and the remains of the vacuum-sealed bag.
7. Clean the area of any spills, using rags or other absorbent

material. Clean and dry the floor to prevent slip hazards.
8. Disengage the hoist and slings. Remove the two hoist rings
attached to the bottom side of cassette (the side that will be
placed on the ground).
A.3.6.8.2 UPRIGHTING CASSETTE
If a crane is being used, it must be located at an appropriate distance

to prevent collision with the cassette during the uprighting, in case a
“kicking out” occurs.
Follow these steps:
1. Locate the crane on the side of the cassette where the cassette
moves horizontally during the uprighting.
2. Place another 1 in. foam sheet to the side of the cassette where
it will be placed on the ground.
3. Attach a two-point spreader bar to the lifting hoist. Attach the

spreader bar to the two hoist rings on the upper side of the
cassette using two slings.
Ensure that the surrounding area is clear of people.
4. Slowly lifting the cassette off the ground. The cassette will tilt as
it is lifted. The lifting device must be free to move laterally to
remain over the cassette’s center of gravity.

A-38 June, 2010
Facility
5. At all times, keep the hoist in vertical alignment with the lifting
points on the cassette. Failure to do so could result in the cassette
“kicking out”. Do not attempt to stop the cassette if it kicks out.
6. If a crane is being used, a signaling person, standing at a safe

distance, should signal the crane operator. Appropriate
signaling/communication means are required.
7. Lift the cassette until it pivots onto its side, then lower it until it
rests fully on the foam in its vertical position.
8. After lowering the cassette to the vertical position, remove the

slings and lifting hoist rings.
Figure A.3.13 - Uprighting a Cassette
A.3.6.9 INSTALLING CASSETTE ARMS

The cassette arms, which allow the cassette to be moved using the lifting
frame, are installed after the uprighting procedure. Refer to the
applicable fabrication drawings that are provided for details on this
assembly.
A torque of 104 ft-lb for 3/4 in. Nord-Locks is needed.

June, 2010 A-39
Facility
Figure A.3.14 - Cassette Arms
There are regular and mirror image versions of the arms. Ensure that the
correct arm is installed on the correct side of the cassette.
Note the position of the open end of the hanger arms and the position of
the small tab at the bottom. Also note that the hanger arms on the
diagonal from each other are identical and hanger arms adjacent to
each other are opposite in orientation (top slots are on different sides of
center).
Figure A.3.15 - Installed Cassette Arms with Lifting Bracket

A-40 June, 2010
Facility
A.3.6.10 REMOVING THE PLASTIC WRAPPING

Cassettes are shipped with plastic wrap around the fibers. It must be
removed carefully so that the membrane fibers are not cut. To remove
the plastic, cut the wrapping close to the corner beam. To avoid
contamination of the stainless steel frame (leading to corrosion), do not
come in contact with the cassette frame while cutting. Discard the
wrapping following its removal.
Be sure to cut along the corner beam to prevent fibers from being
damaged. Do not cut plastic wrapper along the membrane area.
Figure A.3.16 - Cutting the Wrapper
A.3.6.11 REMOVING THE PROTECTIVE FOAM

Cassettes are shipped with protective foam placed against the 2 in.
vertical permeate down pipes, on the back side of the cassette. This
foam is used to prevent fibers from rubbing on the pipes during shipping.

June, 2010 A-41
Facility
Before removing the foam, visually inspect the cassette for any tangled
fibers or fibers stuck to the foam. Pull the foam out from within the
cassette carefully and slowly.
Figure A.3.17 - Removing the Protective Foam
To prevent damage to the membranes, use extreme caution when

pulling the protective foam out of the cassette.
A.3.6.12 INSPECTING THE ZEEWEED 500D CASSETTE -

INSPECTION 2
The second inspection consists of the following:
• Before installing the cassette into the membrane tank, inspect

the cassette for loose or missing nuts and bolts. Refer to 500D
Torque Specifications found on the General Arrangement
Drawings.
• Inspect the cassette frame welds for rust spots.
• Verify that the module keys are in the locked position (vertical).

A-42 June, 2010
Facility
• Record the serial numbers of each membrane module on the

membrane map. When placed into the membrane tank, record
the location in the tank where the membrane is placed.
• Ensure that the top and bottom expander blocks are tight and
fully engaged and flush with the bottom surface of the key side
outer assembly.
Figure A.3.18 - Tighten Expander Blocks

June, 2010 A-43
Facility
A.3.6.13 ASSEMBLING AERATION PIPING

Some parts of the cassette aeration spool may be assembled together
before the cassette is installed. These sub-assemblies are then
assembled together after the cassette is installed in the tank. For the
specific parts that can be assembled together, look in the spool
drawings for the specific project. Preassembling reduces the cassette
installation time and reduces the amount of work that will have to be
done on the cassettes after they are installed.
Figure A.3.19 - Aeration Piping
A.3.7 PREVENTING DEBRIS CONTAMINATION

It is critical to ensure that no debris capable of damaging the
membranes enters the membrane tank at any time. Damaged incurred
by debris is not covered by the membrane warranty. Possible
contamination pathways include:
• Feed water laden with debris.
• Debris being blown or falling into the tank during construction,

maintenance, or repairs over the membranes.
• Residue from piping or process equipment.

A-44 June, 2010
Facility
A clean membrane tank needs to be protected from contamination by

debris, especially debris larger than 1.6 mm (1/16 in.). If debris is allowed
to enter the tank, irreversible damage to the membranes can occur.
Examples of common materials that cause damage include (but are not
limited to):
• Cable ties
• Plastic turnings from drilling
• Pieces of wire
• Broken measuring tapes
• Weld slag and metal debris from grinding
• Twigs
• Leaves
• Shells
• Fish
• Sand
To prevent construction debris from entering the tank after membrane

installation, cover cleaned tanks with a continuous plastic barrier
protected by plywood sheets. General good housekeeping practices are
recommended.
A.3.8 INSTALLING CASSETTES IN THE

MEMBRANE TANK
After the cassette has been fully inspected, the cassette can be installed
in the membrane tank.

June, 2010 A-45
Facility
There must be enough potable water in the membrane tank such that
no fibers will be exposed to air once the cassette is installed.
The lifting arm is moved using the crane to the overtop of the cassette.
The pins at its four corners slide into the hanger arm slotted hole facing
the inside of the cassette. Once the pins are through the slotted holes, a
hitch pin must be passed through the lifting bracket pins to secure the
lifting bracket to the cassette.
Figure A.3.20 - Lifting Bracket
Using the hoist and lifting bracket, carefully lift the cassette and install it
onto the leveling pins inside the membrane tank. The outside slotted
holes on the hanger arms slide onto the leveling pins in the tank.
During lifting, the cassette is to be guided by the cassette stainless

steel supports only. Never touch the membranes.

A-46 June, 2010
Facility
A.3.8.1 INSTALLING PERMEATE AND AIR CONNECTIONS

With the membranes in the tank, the permeate and aeration
connections must be completed.
Figure A.3.21 - Permeate and Air Connections
Do not allow any glue or solvent to fall onto the fibers or cassette as
irreversible damage may result. Protect fibers and PVC piping from
spills.
A.3.8.2 CONNECTING PERMEATE PIPING

The permeate piping is connected by installing a coupling that will join
the cassette to the rest of the permeate header. The coupling is either 4
in. or 8 in. depending on the application. Also depending on the
application, the permeate header may come through the tank wall and
straight to the cassette header (Figure A.3.21 - Permeate and Air
Connections) or it may be located above the cassettes and have to be
piped down from the top of the tank to the cassette header (Figure A.3.22
- Cassette Header). Either way, the following steps should be taken in
order to minimize the installation time and reduce the amount of work
done after membranes are installed in the tank:

June, 2010 A-47
Facility
1. Just before dropping the cassette onto the leveling pins, mount
the coupling to the cassette header and the pipe spool that
connects to the other side of the coupling.
2. Tighten the coupling so that it can support the weight of the spool
piece.
3. Lower cassette onto the leveling pins.
4. Install remaining spool pieces and couplings to connect to main

permeate header. Remove the lifting bracket if it gets in the way
of the work.
While installing the remaining couplings and spool pieces after the
cassette is in the tank, make sure that the membrane modules are
not stepped on. Only step on the cassette header and frame.
Figure A.3.22 - Cassette Header
For systems where the permeate header is installed through the wall of
the tank and is aligned with the cassette header, place the coupling on
the section of the permeate header sticking through the tank wall. Lower
the cassette onto the leveling pins, slide the coupling so that it catches
both pipes, and tighten.

A-48 June, 2010
Facility
A.3.8.3 CONNECTING AIR PIPING

Each cassette is provided with two 3 in. air connections. Each of these air
connections provides air to half of the aerators at the bottom of the
cassette. Depending on the design of the system, these two air
connections can either:
• connect together with a 4 in. tee at the cassette and then a
• 4 in. connection is made to the header, or;
• run independently as two 3 in. spools; each spool connecting to

separate aeration headers.
The single 4 in. tee version is for installations with cyclic aeration (whole
cassette on-off air cycling). The twin 3 in. connection version is for
installations with sequential aeration (air is cycled first to half the
aerators on a cassette - and then the other half). If there is any
uncertainty as to which design is to be used, refer to the P&IDs.
Follow these steps:
1. Lower the cassette onto the leveling pins and remove the lifting
bracket, if necessary, to make room to work.
2. Install the permeate piping completely. See Figure A.3.19 -

Aeration Piping.
3. Install the aeration hose connection to the main aeration header.
4. Connect the other end of the hose to the already installed (see
A.3.6.7 Installing Union to Cassette’s Main Aeration Pipes) fitting
on the cassette main aeration pipes.

June, 2010 A-49
Facility
Always connect the air hose to the main aeration header first and
then connect the other end to the cassette PVC aeration pipes. This
avoids stressing the PVC parts on the cassette.
Figure A.3.23 - Air Connections
A.3.9 AFTER CASSETTE INSTALLATION

The following procedures must be completed after all cassettes have
been installed in the membrane tanks.

A-50 June, 2010
Facility
A.3.9.1 FLUSHING
All ZeeWeed membrane modules and cassettes are shipped in a glycerin
solution with a pH of 3.5 to 4.5 to prevent the membranes from drying.
This glycerin solution has a high biochemical oxygen demand (BOD) and
is not suitable for discharge to surface water or as drinking water.
The contractor is responsible for supplying available disposal capacity

for spent water, including disposal of wastewater following flushing of
glycerin after membrane installation (pH range of 2 to 11).
The downstream tank for permeate must not be contaminated with

glycerin.
A.3.9.1.1 PURGING GLYCERIN FROM MEMBRANES

Complete the following steps:
1. Install the membranes in the membrane tank filled with feed

water.
2. Run the system so that the membranes are permeating at 40

LMH (23.6 GFD). Recycle the permeate from the permeate pump
discharge to the membrane tank for 60 minutes.
3. Drain the membrane tank contents to a drain and pump to

headworks of the plant.
4. Refill the membrane tank with feed water.
5. As in step 2, run the system so that the membranes are

permeating at 40 LMH (23.6 GFD). Recycle the permeate from the
permeate pump discharge to the membrane tank for 30 minutes.
6. Drain the tank contents to a drain or a tanker.

June, 2010 A-51
Facility
7. Repeat steps 4, 5, and 6 twice. Measure the organic contents of

the final tank drain to verify that TOC is less than 3 mg/L above
the background level, or that the COD is less than 10 mg/L above
the background level.
If there are multiple trains, the glycerin flushing water can be reused.
GE W&PT will provide calculations to determine the volume of water
required.
A.3.9.2 CHECKING AERATION

The cassettes must be installed before starting an aeration check.
To verify proper aeration to the membranes, complete the following

steps:
1. Start the blower and ensure that air is being supplied to the
membrane cassettes.
2. If the installation procedure is carried out correctly, the aeration

diffuser system should be totally horizontal, providing even
distribution of air over the membranes. After install the cassettes,
visually verify that the air distribution is even.
Air must be evenly distributed within the cassette.
3. Observe the bubble pattern on the surface of the tank. The

surface should bubble evenly above the membrane cassette. If
any uneven aeration is observed, the system must be stopped
and the cause isolated. If the airflow is uneven, it can be
corrected by adjusting the level of the cassette using the levelling
bolts. This is critical and will be supervised by a GE W&PT FSR.
4. Check the air pipe connections for leakage. If any leaks are found,
fix the piping immediately to ensure that the membrane
cassettes are receiving sufficient aeration.

A-52 June, 2010
Facility
5. With the aeration on, observe the airflow pattern in the various
membrane tanks. Determine if the difference in membrane tank
level while backpulsing has an effect on the airflow pattern.
6. Observe the aeration pattern within the individual cassettes

during the 10-second cycle to determine whether all of the
modules are receiving equal airflow.
7. Turn aeration on in one membrane tank and off in another tank.

Ensure there is no aeration in the membrane tank that is off.
A.3.9.3 TESTING PERFORMANCE

The customer is responsible for ensuring a supply of raw water and a
receiving body for the treated water for commissioning and
performance testing of the equipment.
The customer is responsible for the provision of necessary analytical

tests for treated water quality, as per project specifications.
A.3.9.4 BUBBLE TEST

A bubble test is used to locate leaks in the membranes and should be
completed for each cassette in the subsystem. To complete a bubble
test, perform the following steps:
TIP: If possible, 1. Reduce the water level in the membrane tank to a point below
remove the cassette the permeate connection, so that no water can get into the
from the membrane
tank and test in a cassette after the connection is removed. The membranes must
separate tank. be completely submerged.
Before making any connections, ensure that the membrane safety

hand valve and the pressure regulating valve are closed.
2. Connect the PDT kit adapters to the permeate connection(s) on

the cassette.

June, 2010 A-53
Facility
3. Connect the 1/4 in. tubing from the adapter to the permeate air
connection, and then connect the 1/4 in. tubing from the
compressed air source.
4. Slowly open the pressure regulating valve to empty liquid from

the permeate side of the membrane into the membrane tank.
5. Set the applied air pressure to just over half of the required
pressure.
6. Wait 5 minutes to ensure the air has purged the water, and then
increase the air pressure to just under the required pressure.
7. Examine the membranes for escaping bubbles (indicating a leak).
8. If a leak is found, analyze the bubble stream as described in

A.3.9.4.1 Bubble Types. Based on the type of bubble stream found,
the module can be repaired using the procedures outlined later
in this manual.
In cases where few leaks are present in a given module, and none of the
leaks are serious, the repairs should be made on site. If a module
requires difficult or numerous repairs, contact GE W&PT for further
information.
A.3.9.4.1 BUBBLE TYPES

The size and type of bubbles released by a leak during a bubble test
indicate the type of leak. Bubbles are classified according to four types,
as shown in Figure A.3.24 - Bubble Sizes.
TYPE 1: A Type 1 bubble stream appears as a steady flow of large

bubbles, typically 10 mm (3/8 in.) in diameter or greater. Type 1 streams
are usually released by a broken membrane fiber. However, if the stream
appears to come from one of the permeate headers, it may also be
caused by an improperly installed O-ring.

A-54 June, 2010
Facility
TYPE 2: A Type 2 bubble stream is characterized by a steady flow of

moderate sized bubbles (between 1 - 10 mm (1/32 - 3/8 in.)). This form of
leak is typically minor and often caused by damaged fibers or “pin holes”
in the membrane. Type 2 leaks may not always require repair. Any larger
leaks found during the bubble test should be repaired first, after which a
second test will determine whether Additional repairs for Type 2 leaks
are necessary to bring performance up to specified levels.
TYPE 3: A Type 3 bubble stream appears as an intermittent stream of

small bubbles (less than 1 mm (1/32 in.)). This type of stream is typically
due to air passing through unwetted pores. Unwetted pores allow
passage of air but not water, and do not need to be repaired.
TYPE 4: Type 4 bubbles gather at the top of the cassette and release
when the bubble is sufficiently large. This type of bubble is usually
formed by accumulated Type 2 or Type 3 bubbles.
Figure A.3.24 - Bubble Sizes

June, 2010 A-55
Facility
A.3.10 MEMBRANE INSPECTION/REPLACEMENT

This procedure is required if the membranes are being replaced,
inspected as part of routine maintenance, or being removed from the
tank. GE W&PT recommends that direct supervision of GE personnel be
arranged whenever the membranes are removed from the tanks. If
there is a build up of solids on the membranes, read A.3.10.1 Heavy
Cassette Lifting before lifting the cassette from the membrane tank.
Once membrane inspection or replacement has begun, it must be

completed promptly. It is vital that the membranes DO NOT DRY OUT
OR FREEZE before completing this procedure.
To remove a cassette from the membrane tank:
1. Lower the liquid level in the membrane tank to just below the
connections. Carry out a general shutdown of the whole system.
Isolate the cassettes using the manual valves at the permeate
and air headers.
Individual membrane modules cannot be isolated from the rest of a

membrane cassette.
2. Disconnect the YN couplings from the cassette: 1 coupling for

permeate and 2 couplings for air per cassette.
3. Attach the lifting bracket to the cassette.
4. Attach a chain or lifting strap to the steel lifting harness on the

cassette.
5. Use a manual hoist and monorail (boom truck or crane) to

carefully lift the cassette until the strap is tight. Continue to lift the
membrane cassette out of the frame with the crane, taking care
not to trap the flexible piping or damage the membranes,
especially if any sharp edges are exposed in the area.

A-56 June, 2010
Facility
6. Remove the cassette to a safe, preferably level, location and

transplant the necessary items to the new membranes (if
applicable; no transplantation is necessary when inspecting the
membranes). If new membranes are being installed, the
customer will ensure that the delivery is correct and will assist in
checking the integrity of the supplied membranes.
7. When inspecting the membranes, check for any apparent

damage to the modules or fibers, and for items that are clearly
different from module to module. Look for any loose hardware or
fasteners. Ensure that none of the membrane fibers are broken.
Check the top and bottom permeate headers and piping for any
apparent damage or cracking.
8. When replacing a membrane cassette or installing new

membranes, disassemble the cassette in reverse order of
assembly. Contact GE W&PT before disassembling a cassette.
Contact the Service Department at (905) 465-3030 for additional

technical assistance if any problems are observed. GE W&PT maintains
an inventory of membranes at all times. Generally, if membrane
modules are being replaced, they can be shipped on short notice.
A.3.10.1 HEAVY CASSETTE LIFTING

ZeeWeed cassettes that have been operated for extended periods of
time may accumulate debris, which will add weight to the cassette. The
extent of debris buildup over time will depend on the nature of the waste
stream, the effectiveness of the wastewater prescreening step, and
other factors.
If heavily weighted cassettes are completely removed from the tank for
inspection and cleaning, this could result in the cassette frame and
cassette lifting mechanism being subjected to excessive loadings. In
some cases, the resulting load may encroach on the design safety factor
of the cassette frame and lifting mechanism, as well as the cassette
support beam and grating in the location where the cassette is set down.

June, 2010 A-57
Facility
Improper handling of overweight cassettes may result in injury or

property loss.
If by direct measurement with a weigh scale or by other means, it is

suspected the cassettes are overweight, or if for safety reasons, it is
assumed the cassettes are overloaded every time the cassettes are
removed, the following procedure will assist in removing the debris from
the cassettes before they are removed from the tank:
1. Isolate the cassettes from permeation and aerate them for 12 to

24 hours. The cassettes can be isolated via the local hand valves
or by disabling the train from the HMI. Aerating without
permeation has proven effective in removing built up debris from
the cassette and will reduce or eliminate the overweight
condition.
2. Turn off the aeration and lift the cassette partially out of the tank.
Flush the exposed section with clean water (process effluent is
sufficient). Lift the cassette approximately 50 cm – 75 cm (20 in. -
30 in.) at a time and repeat the process. By lifting the cassette in
steps, the submerged sections will be partially supported by the
wastewater and will reduce the lifting loads. For a deep tank
application, where this process is not practical, wash off the
debris prior to lifting the cassette above the grating.
3. Do not complete any lift with staff directly under or in the

immediate vicinity of the cassette. The normal safe operating
practice of using guide ropes should always be used for
controlling the lift. Any direct staff contact with the cassette
should be minimized.
For optimal performance and long life of the equipment, all areas
must be kept clean. Remove any chemical spills immediately and
wipe down the maintenance equipment frequently.

A-58 June, 2010
Facility
A.3.11 RETURNING DAMAGED MEMBRANES

If the membrane is being returned to GE Water & Process Technologies,
it is imperative that it be properly cleaned, preserved, and that a
“Returned Goods Authorization” (RGA) number be obtained prior to
shipping it. Contact GE Water & Process Technologies technical services
for information on the RGA procedure.
A.3.12 SYSTEM SHUTDOWN AND MEMBRANE

PRESERVATION
When membranes have been installed in a tank, they need to be kept
wet at all times. When the protective glycerin solution is removed during
soaking in water, the membranes become especially susceptible to
drying. For storage periods of up to approximately 15 days, simple
immersion of the cassettes in water containing sodium hypochlorite
(NaOCl) with a maximum residual concentration of 3 mg/L. Residual
chlorine levels should be monitored every week and repeat testing is
required if the chlorine level drops to less than 0.2 mg/L. Recovery
cleaning of the membrane prior to storage is strongly recommended.
An isolated cassette must be cleaned before it is returned to service.

If a cassette is isolated for less than a week, perform a Maintenance
Clean with sodium hypochlorite. If a cassette is isolated for longer
than a week, perform a Recovery Clean with sodium hypochlorite. For
information on Maintenance and Recovery Cleans, refer to A.5 -
Preventive Maintenance.
A.3.12.1 SHORT TERM SHUTDOWN

The system is always expected to operate in On, with all components in
Auto. Do not leave the system unattended, if any component without an
online spare is not in Auto.

June, 2010 A-59
Facility
System shutdown procedures include the following steps:
1. Chemical clean the system component(s) to be shutdown.
2. Switch the train(s) to OFF.
3. Shutdown the plant.
Before the system is returned to service, it must be cleaned. The period

of time that the system has been shutdown will dictate the type of
cleaning required; short shutdown periods (less than a week) require a
less vigorous cleaning then shutdown periods lasting longer than a
week.
Alternatively, for long-term storage, the components can be removed

from the system and preserved in glycerine.
A.3.12.2 LONG TERM MEMBRANE SHUTDOWN

Following are the steps by the operator:
1. Perform a Recovery Clean. For Recovery Clean instructions, refer

to A.5 - Preventive Maintenance.
2. Ensure that the membranes are free of solids.
3. Prepare a solution of 50 wt% glycerin.
The preservative solution is extremely slippery on surfaces and

extreme care should be exercised when handling the solution. To
minimize the risk of staff injury from slipping, clean up spills
immediately.

A-60 June, 2010
Facility
The following is an example calculation for preparing 1000 liters of

the preservative solution. The specific gravity of 100% glycerine is
1.26. For 1000 liters of preservative solution: Add 396 liters of 100%
glycerine. Fill the tank to the 1000 liter mark. (Approximately 600
liters).
4. Use one of the following procedures to impregnate the modules:
Option I for ZeeWeed 500D:
a. ZeeWeed 500D modules in a horizontal tank:
i. Soak the module in the above solution and apply 0.34 bar
vacuum (0.66 bar absolute) for 30 minutes.
ii. Take the module out of the solution and place it on the
floor for 30 minutes to allow excess solution to drain off.
iii. Bag and seal the module immediately as described in step

5.
b. Single module vertical in stand:
i. Plug the bottom permeate port and pour 3 liters (0.8

gallons) of mixture prepared in Step 3 into the top port.
ii. Bag and seal the module immediately, as described in

step 5.
Option II for ZeeWeed 500D:
a. ZeeWeed 500D cassettes:
i. With the cassette immersed in water, ensure that the

lumen is full of water by operating under vacuum
(permeation).
ii. Close permeate isolation valves and then remove

cassette from water. Do not allow air to enter the
permeate side of the module.

June, 2010 A-61
Facility
iii. Connect a reservoir of preservative solution (as prepared

in Step 3) to the permeate piping and keep the reservoir at
least 60 cm (24”) above the top of the cassette.
iv. Open the permeate isolation valves; the level in the

reservoir should fall as the holdup water volume reverse
permeates and preservative enters the module.
v. Continue reverse permeation until a volume of

preservative equivalent to 3 liters (0.8 gal) is reverse
permeated through each module in the cassette (a 64
module cassette requires 192 liters (51 gal) of preservative
solution).
5. Bag the module using a 0.15 mm (6 mil) thick plastic bag. These
bags are available from GE W&PT. Seal the membranes in the
plastic bag, using either a hand held sealer or tape, so that they
will remain preserved and will not dry out. For the tape seal,
remove as much air as possible from the bag. Seal most of the
membrane bag with tape, then remove the excess air with a shop
vacuum.
6. Store in a cool, dry area, out of the direct sunlight and protected
from accidental contact that could damage the module or bag. It
is recommended that the membranes be double bagged or
enclosed in suitable cardboard cartons.
The membranes are now properly preserved, and the system can be
shut down.
To shut down the ZeeWeed system:
1. Set the system to Off.
2. Set all equipment to Off.
3. Close all automatic valves.
The ZeeWeed train is now shut down.

A-62 June, 2010
Facility
4. To allow drainage, open the appropriate lines on the permeate

pumps and associated piping runs. The permeate header and all
dedicated pipelines to the out-of-service train should be drained,
flushed, and dried.
5. Close the isolation valves on the permeate header.
6. Leave the cassette isolation valves on the air headers open, and
the header outlets capped with camlock caps.
7. Remove and store the membrane tank level transmitter from the
membrane tank.
8. Follow the normal maintenance schedule for all equipment,

specifically all pumps and blowers.
Contact the Service Department at (905) 465-3030 for any additional

technical assistance with the handling and storage of the membranes.

June, 2010 A-63
This page has been
A.4
MEMBRANE CARE
This page has been
Facility
A.4.1 INTRODUCTION
This section describes various aspects of membrane care that may arise
during operations including:
• Causes and prevention of ZeeWeed fouling
• Fiber shrinkage and slack
• Module removal from a cassette
• Module insertion into a cassette
• Fiber repair
If any of the problems discussed in this section persist or other

difficulties arise, the operator should contact GE Water & Process
Technologies. Complete operating logsheets are necessary to
determine the source of the problem.
A.4.2 MEMBRANE FOULING

The following section provides information regarding membrane fouling,
types of foulants, and the processes used to remove them.
A.4.2.1 PROBLEMS ASSOCIATED WITH MEMBRANE

FOULING
Membrane fouling causes increased operational TMP, increased energy
costs, and reduced membrane life. Foulants create an increased
resistance to permeation, requiring more vacuum (or operational TMP)
to treat similar quantities of water. When TMP increases, the process
pump requires more energy to draw the increased vacuum to meet the
flow setpoint.
Rev. 0 ZeeWeed 500D - Membrane Care

June, 2010 A-67
Facility
Membrane fouling reduces the life of a membrane.
A.4.2.2 FOULING AND FOULANTS

Fouling is defined as the accumulation of unwanted deposits on a
membrane surface. These deposits reduce the effective membrane
surface area, thus reducing the flow of purified water.
Foulants are materials that accumulate on the surface of a membrane

and decrease membrane performance. Foulants are divided into the
following four groups:
• Biological
• Precipitative
• Adsorptive
• Solids Formation
BIOLOGICAL FOULING: Aerobic and anaerobic living materials, such as

bacteria, fungus, and algae, are classified as biological foulants. These
organisms colonize on the surface of the membrane, which can block
the flow through the membrane surface.
PRECIPITATIVE FOULING: Precipitative fouling usually occurs in the form of

scale. Scale forms when the compounds in the feed water are
concentrated beyond their solubility. Common precipitative foulants
include calcium carbonate and magnesium sulfate.
Inorganic foulants form a hard scale on the membrane surface,

hindering membrane performance. Scale can be caused by high pH
levels and extremely hard feed water. This type of fouling is not common
in ZeeWeed systems because filtration does not remove dissolved ions
from the water.
ADSORPTIVE FOULING: Compounds that stick to the surface of the

membrane, such as oil, polymers, cationic surfactants, and
hydrocarbons, are classified as adsorptive foulants.
ZeeWeed 500D - Membrane Care Rev. 0

A-68 June, 2010
Facility
SOLIDS FORMATION: In applications with high solid levels in the feed water,
it is possible to accumulate solids between the membrane fibers. The
accumulation of material between the membrane fibers can create the
following conditions:
• Increased membrane resistance to permeation (causing

increased TMP),
• Permanent physical membrane damage.
Figure A.4.1 - Solids Accumulation Between Fibers
Adequate aeration and proper prescreening can prevent membrane

solids formation.
A.4.2.3 FOULING TREATMENT

Different strategies are required to treat the four types of fouling.
BIOLOGICAL FOULING TREATMENT: Experience has shown that antimicrobial

agents and biocides are effective in preventing and reversing biological
fouling. Since established biological growth is much more difficult and
time-consuming to remove than recent biological growth, GE W&PT
prescribes frequent cleanings with low doses of sodium hypochlorite
(bleach) to kill biological foulants. These low-strength doses are
preferable to the infrequent, high strength cleanings required when
biological growth becomes established.

June, 2010 A-69
Facility
PRECIPITATIVE FOULING TREATMENT: Membranes fouled with precipitative

scale are cleaned using an acidic cleaner, such as citric acid. It is
preferable to avoid precipitative fouling by reducing the concentration
of potential fouling compounds. Feed water can be pretreated by lime
softening and pH adjustment to remove scale-forming compounds in
the influent stream. Concentrations of hydroxide and carbonate ions
can be reduced by adding acid.
ADSORPTIVE FOULING TREATMENT: Since adsorptive fouling is extremely

difficult to reverse, it is critical to avoid exposure to oils, polymers, and
hydrocarbons. If considering polymers or surfactants, check with GE
W&PT.
MEMBRANE SOLIDS FORMATION: Proper aeration is effective in preventing

membrane solids formation. It is imperative to inspect the aeration
pattern on a routine basis.
A.4.2.4 FOULING PREVENTION

The three most common methods of preventing fouling in a ZeeWeed
subsystem are to perform a backpulse, a maintenance clean, and a
recovery clean. Depending on the type of fouling, maintenance cleans
and recovery cleans are performed with either a sodium hypochlorite or
citric acid solution, used to remove organic and inorganic foulants,
respectively. Refer to A.5 - Preventive Maintenance for more information
regarding cleaning frequency and procedures.
A.4.2.4.1 PRESCREENING
Improper prescreening leads to difficulties in membrane cleaning and
potential damage to the membranes.
Proper prescreening helps eliminate the build-up of trash, hair, lint, and
other fibrous materials, and decreases the risk of solids accumulation.
When screening is required for the ZeeWeed system, a 2 mm or 1/16”

punch hole traveling band screen is appropriate.

A-70 June, 2010
Facility
A.4.3 FIBER SHRINKAGE AND SLACK

ZeeWeed 500D modules consist of hollow fibers supported between two
headers maintained at a product specific fixed distance from each
other. The fiber length on a module relative to the overall distance
between the two headers is marginally larger, which results in fibers that
can move to a limited degree.
ZeeWeed 500D modules are manufactured with inherent fiber slack

designed to optimize membrane air scouring during operation as well as
accommodate typical changes. A module with taut fibers may not
perform well because the random motion of the fibers during aeration is
critical to the filtration efficiency of ZeeWeed membranes. If the fibers
shrink during operation, the predetermined slack will disappear and the
fibers will become taut affecting membrane performance.
Fiber slack changes for a specific plant and application, and is a function
of operating temperature, chlorine concentration, and time. Significant
changes in fiber slack are generally observed when a module is
operated extensively at temperatures of >25ºC (77ºF) or in the presence
of certain solvents sometimes found in industrial wastewater
applications.
Shrinkage is a physical change that can be expected to be observed in

any product composed of synthetic polymers. The slack of the fibers
within respective ZeeWeed 500D products is a measurable property and
adjustments can be made as required.
The exact rate of fiber shrinkage is difficult to predict due to variability in

site specific parameters; however, the shrinkage rate increases with
temperature. For example, a plant operating at 35ºC (95ºF) will typically
exhibit more fiber shrinkage than a plant operating at 30ºC (86ºF) over
the same period of time. Plants operating at temperatures below 25ºC
(77ºF) are not expected to exhibit significant fiber shrinkage and the
need for slack adjustment is unlikely.
For the reasons listed above, it is important for plant operations staff to
monitor their ZeeWeed product slack, even those sites operating below
25ºC (77ºF), to ensure optimum performance from their membranes. If
an insufficient fiber slack problem is observed, it is strongly
recommended that it be remedied in a timely manner.

June, 2010 A-71
Facility
If ZeeWeed 500D membrane modules are permitted to operate with

insufficient slack for an extended period of time, irreversible damage
may occur to the modules.
Refer to Table A.4.1 - Recommended Inspection Intervals and inspect

based on the plant’s operating temperature. The visual inspections
should be repeated regularly on the same cassette over a period of time.
The visual inspection and clear pictures of the broad side of the cassette
can alert the operator. Comparative pictures for adequate fiber slack
adjustment on ZeeWeed 500D products are shown in Figure A.4.2 -
Correct Slack for ZeeWeed 500D through Figure A.4.3 - Incorrect Slack for
ZeeWeed 500D.
It is recommended that plant operators, who suspect slack adjustment

is required, forward the pictures and any observations to GE W&PT’s
Business Service Department for review and examination to determine
if there is any need for further action.
All ZeeWeed 500D products are able to have fiber slack adjusted in the
field, either by the operators following detailed instructions or by GE
W&PT Field Service staff as part of a Membrane Service Agreement
(MSA), Service Audit (SA), or other arranged onsite support visit.
Table A.4.1 - Recommended Inspection Intervals

Recommended Monitoring Inspection
Maximum Operating Temperature
Frequency
0 - 24ºC (32 - 76ºF) Every 2 Years
25 - 30ºC (77 - 86ºF) Once Per Year
>30ºC (> 86ºF) Twice Per Year

A-72 June, 2010
Facility
It is strongly emphasized that a plant’s failure to identify and promptly

address concerns with insufficient fiber slack may impact the overall
usable life of the installed membrane modules and cassettes. In some
extreme cases, inaction may contribute to premature module failures.
This is not a warrantable product failure.
Figure A.4.2 - Correct Slack for ZeeWeed 500D
Figure A.4.3 - Incorrect Slack for ZeeWeed 500D

June, 2010 A-73
Facility
A.4.3.1 SLACK ADJUSTMENT

Every effort has been made by GE Water and Process Technologies to
provide current information while preparing this procedure. GE
maintains that depictions of methods and/or techniques and use of
specific tools and/or apparatus shown within the situations portrayed
are accurate at the time of printing. GE accepts no liability for any
reliance placed on the information contained herein.
A.4.3.1.1 MANPOWER REQUIREMENT

The slack adjustment procedure requires the use of 2 people at all times
to prevent damage to the modules and cassette.
Prior to removing the cassette from the tank, don protective clothing,
face mask, gloves and boots. Using a high flow, low pressure water
supply, hose down the cassette thoroughly during its removal to remove
solids.
This procedure will require the cassette to be out of the process tank for
an extended period of time. The membranes must be sprayed with
water every 30 minutes in order for them to stay moist. Local weather
condition may demand more frequent spraying.
Be careful when removing a cassette caked with solids as the

cassette will be heavier.
When removing cassettes, ensure that they are level and inspect the
aerator plates/tubes. Before beginning work, verify the rated capacity of
lifting brackets, cranes, and the cassette lifting frame. As the cassette is
removed from the water, use a weight scale to ensure that components
under load are within their design capacity.
To reduce the amount of solids on the cassette before lifting, aerate the
cassette without permeation. Use a garden hose to dislodge the solids
from the cassettes as they are being removed from the tank. Remember
to spray the garden hose as gently as possible to avoid permanent
damage to the fibers.

A-74 June, 2010
Facility
To ensure that the water pressure in the hose is not excessive, test
that the stream does not extend more than 3 ft when the hose is held
at a height of 3 ft (as demonstrated in Figure A.4.4 - Water Pressure
Test). If the stream contacts the ground within 3 ft of the hose, the
pressure is suitable for spraying the membranes.
Figure A.4.4 - Water Pressure Test
A thorough clean and soak of the cassettes may be required prior to

lifting them from the membrane tank.
A.4.3.1.2 TOOLS/PARTS REQUIRED

• Large Flat Head Screw Driver (SS or Plated)
• Small Flat Head Screw Driver (SS or Plated)
• Torque Wrench: 25-250 Inch lbs. or 3.6-29 Nm
• 3/8 in. or 1/2 in. Ratchet (same size as torque wrench)
• 17mm socket
• 17mm open wrench
• Rubber Mallet
• Pry Bar (Stainless Steel or Plated)
• Coarse File
• Qty 28 Nordlocks M10 (Replacement)

June, 2010 A-75
Facility
• White Knight Food Grade Anti-Seize
• Module Removal Tool
• Full Face Mask
• Protective clothing including boots and gloves
• 5mm Allen Key Socket
• 13/32 in. drill bit
• Drill
• Qty 6 - M10 x 250 mm Jack Bolts
A.4.3.1.3 DEFINITIONS AND NOTES

During a slack adjustment procedure, remember the following
information:
• The front of the cassette is defined as follows: when facing the

front of the cassette, the 3 in. Aeration pipes are located on the
left side of the cassette
• Apply food grade anti-seize to all bolts (for example: White Knight
Anti-Seize)
• Replace all Nordlocks with new
• Ensure the use of stainless steel or plated tools only
• Review the latest ZeeWeed 500D Module Inspection Checklist for

items to be inspected while cassette/modules are out of the
water.
The ZeeWeed 500D Cassette has four adjustable positions:
1. Position #1: Standard from the Manufacturing Assembly Plant
2. Position #2 Adjustment raises the modules 8mm from position #1

A-76 June, 2010
Facility
3. Position #3 Adjustment raises the modules 16mm from position

#1
4. Position #4 Adjustment raises the modules 24mm from position

#1 (See Figure A.4.5 - Center Beam)
Figure A.4.5 - Center Beam

June, 2010 A-77
Facility
A.4.3.1.4 SLACK ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE - PRELIMINARY STEPS

1. With a 5 mm allen key or a hex wrench, loosen all top and bottom
key side outer support expanders (see Figure A.4.6 - Loosen
Support Expanders). Use care not to gall hardware. Use caution
that no contact is made with the fibers
Figure A.4.6 - Loosen Support Expanders
2. Unlock the module key (top and bottom) prior to continuing with
this procedure. The module is in the unlocked position when the
lock is horizontal (see Figure A.4.7 - Locked and Unlocked Module).
Do not force the lock into position.
Figure A.4.7 - Locked and Unlocked Module

A-78 June, 2010
Facility
3. Remove the aeration tubes by carefully sliding them out of the

bottom front of the cassette (see Figure A.4.8 - Remove the
Aeration Tubes).
Be aware that tubes must be placed back into their original position
in the cassette.
Figure A.4.8 - Remove the Aeration Tubes

June, 2010 A-79
Facility
A.4.3.1.5 ADJUSTMENT FOR THE FRONT/BACK BEAMS

1. On the front side only (top and bottom), slide all of the modules
out of the cassette, approximately 2-3 in. from the permeate
manifolds (see Figure A.4.9 - Module Slid Out of Cassette).
Figure A.4.9 - Module Slid Out of Cassette

A-80 June, 2010
Facility
2. To gain access to the front bottom beam bolts, remove modules

from the following positions within the cassette - # 2, # 9, # 16, #
23, (left to right) (see Figure A.4.10 - Modules Removed From These
Positions).
Figure A.4.10 - Modules Removed From These Positions
3. Remove the bolts from positions # 9, # 16, and # 23. Loosen but
do not remove the bolt in position # 2. This bolt will keep the Front
Bottom Adjustable Beam aligned with the holes (see Figure A.4.11
- Removing the Bolts).
Figure A.4.11 - Removing the Bolts

June, 2010 A-81
Facility
4. Pry the end of the Front Adjustable Bottom Beam where the bolts
have been removed (see Figure A.4.12 - Front Adjustable Bottom
Beam).
Use stainless steel or plated tools only.
Figure A.4.12 - Front Adjustable Bottom Beam
5. To achieve acceptable slack, adjust the Front Adjustable Bottom

Beam to the desired height (see Figure A.4.13 - Adjusting the Front
Adjustable Bottom Beam).
6. Install one bolt in position # 23 (loose). Ensure bolts are installed

properly; bolt threads towards the outside of the cassette.

A-82 June, 2010
Facility
7. Remove bolt from position #2 and repeat steps 4 to 6.
Figure A.4.13 - Adjusting the Front Adjustable Bottom Beam
8. Install bolts in positions # 9 and # 16. If required, use a

screwdriver to align the holes (see Figure A.4.14 - Align the Holes).
Figure A.4.14 - Align the Holes

June, 2010 A-83
Facility
A.4.3.1.6 ADJUSTMENT FOR THE CENTER BEAM

1. Slide all the modules to the STOP position of the top Header (see
Figure A.4.15 - Slide the Modules to the Stop Position).
Figure A.4.15 - Slide the Modules to the Stop Position
2. Tighten all 4 bolts as per drawing specification (247 inch pounds).

Re-install the modules that had been removed (see Figure A.4.16
- Tighten the Bolts).
Do not slide any of the modules back into the permeate saddles.
3. Repeat the procedure for the back beam of the cassette.

A-84 June, 2010
Facility
Number the modules left to right.
Figure A.4.16 - Tighten the Bolts
4. Referencing Figure A.4.5 - Center Beam, remove one of the Slack

Adjustment Clips from the bottom per position change (see Figure
A.4.17 - Remove the Slack Adjustment Clip).
Figure A.4.17 - Remove the Slack Adjustment Clip

June, 2010 A-85
Facility
5. Install Qty 6 - M10 x 250 mm bolts into the existing threaded

jacking bolt holes found on either end and center of the centre
beam (see Figure A.4.18 - Insert Jacking Bolts).
a. If required, file the adjacent saddle to allow insertion of the

bolt at either end of the beam.
Figure A.4.18 - Insert Jacking Bolts

A-86 June, 2010
Facility
b. If required, drill out in between the saddles to allow enough

space for the centre jack bolt to be inserted (see Figure A.4.19
- Drill Out Saddle).
Figure A.4.19 - Drill Out Saddle
6. Before proceeding, use a low pressure hose to flush away any

debris left from the filing or drilling of the saddles (see Figure
A.4.20 - Flush Away Debris).
Figure A.4.20 - Flush Away Debris

June, 2010 A-87
Facility
7. Remove the bolts located at the middle of the centre beam. Note
there is one bolt on either side of the beam (see Figure A.4.21 -
Remove Center Beam Bolts).
.
Figure A.4.21 - Remove Center Beam Bolts
8. Adjust the center beam by removing the bolts from each side of
the centre beam at both ends of the beam - four bolts in total.
Retain all hardware for replacement (see Figure A.4.22 - Adjust
the Center Beam).
.
Figure A.4.22 - Adjust the Center Beam

A-88 June, 2010
Facility
9. Use the jacking bolts to lift the centre beam to the desired height,
referencing Figure A.4.5 - Center Beam.
10. Once all four bolts have been installed at the ends, align the
appropriate middle bolt hole on each side of the middle of the
centre beam (see Figure A.4.23 - Align the Middle Bolt Hole).
Figure A.4.23 - Align the Middle Bolt Hole
11. Install and tighten the six center beam bolts as per torque
specification 247 inch lbs (see Figure A.4.24 - Torque the Bolts).
12. Reinstall modules and lock into position. Reinstall aeration tubes
in their original positions.

June, 2010 A-89
Facility
The installation of a 500D module must be completed with two

people. The bottom module header must not swing freely when the
top header is slid into place. If the bottom header is not controlled
during installation, it can swing into the centre of the cassette and
impact the bottom permeate collectors. Damage from this impact
will result in the need for module replacement.
Figure A.4.24 - Torque the Bolts

A-90 June, 2010
Facility
13. Tighten all top and bottom key side outer support expanders
using a 5 mm Allen Key or a hex wrench. The expander is fully
engaged when flush with the bottom surface of the key side
outer assembly. Max tightening torque not to exceed 5.0 Nm (3.6
FT-LBS, 44 IN-LBS) (see Figure A.4.25 - Tighten Support
Expanders).
.
Figure A.4.25 - Tighten Support Expanders
14. Indicate on the membrane map the date of the slack adjustment
and the amount of slack adjusted. List the bolt positions used.
A.4.4 MODULE REMOVAL FROM A CASSETTE

this procedure.
Completely read and understand this procedure before attempting to

remove modules.

June, 2010 A-91
Facility
A.4.4.1 MANPOWER AND TIME REQUIREMENT

The removal of a single module should take a few minutes once the
cassette is removed from the tank. Always use two people when
extracting a cassette or module.
Figure A.4.26 - Module Removal Tool
A.4.4.1.1 TOOL PREPARATION - REMOVAL
The removal tool is orientated differently when removing from the

top and bottom of the module. To adjust the pin location, remove the
cotter pin, change the face position and reinsert the cotter pin.
Table A.4.2 - Pin Location and Function

Pin Location Function
1 Installation assistance - top header
2 Future use
3 Future use
4 Removal, installation assistance - bottom
header

A-92 June, 2010
Facility
The module removal tool is supplied with a standard faceplate. Use a

repair adaptor faceplate (optional) when removing/installing modules
that have been repaired using the repair adapter (see Figure A.4.29 -
Faceplate).
Figure A.4.27 - Pin Removal From The Top
Figure A.4.28 - Pin Removal From The Bottom

June, 2010 A-93
Facility
Figure A.4.29 - Faceplate
Figure A.4.30 - Standard and Repaired Header (Repair Adapter)
A.4.4.2 TOOL PREPARATION – INSTALLATION
This tool should not be used on Drinking Water (DW) or Tertiary

Treatment (TT) designated cassettes.

A-94 June, 2010
Facility
In all instances, attempt to install the module by hand. Only use the tool
for assistance, if required.
Figure A.4.31 - Installation Assistance From The Top
Figure A.4.32 - Installation Assistance From The Bottom
A.4.4.2.1 TOOLS REQUIRED

• 500D module removal tool

June, 2010 A-95
Facility
• Gloves
Figure A.4.33 - Prohibited Removal Tools
Do not use any other tools to remove or install the 500D module.
Part # 1032836 replaces all previous versions of the 500D Removal Tool.
A.4.4.2.2 MODULE REMOVAL

1. Check that all retaining components of the cassette have been
removed or slacked so the module is no longer restrained in the
cassette.
2. Clamp the teeth of the Insert/Removal tool to the cavities on the

membrane fiber side of the module header face.

A-96 June, 2010
Facility
3. If the cavities are filled with material clean them out so the Insert/
Removal tool will mate properly.
Figure A.4.34 - Attach the Removal Tool
4. Mate the Insert/Removal tool to the face of the module (see

Figure A.4.35 - Module Removal).
Be sure to keep tool flush against module face while locking into
position.
Figure A.4.35 - Module Removal

Turn the circular rotating ring counter clockwise to lock the insert/removal tool to the module by engaging the locking tabs. A light spray lubricant can be used on the locating ring if operation becomes difficult (see Figure A.1.54 - Turn Rotating Ring).

June, 2010 A-97
Facility
Hand manipulate the rotating ring. Do not use tools to gain leverage.
Breaking of the locking tabs could result if tools are applied to the
rotating ring.
Figure A.4.36 - Turn Rotating Ring

A-98 June, 2010
Facility
5. When the Insert/Removal tool is securely locked onto the module

face plate, pull the handle away from the module fibers. Do not
pinch any fibers. This will disengage the module spigot from the
permeate collector.
Figure A.4.37 - Module Removal Handle
6. Move the handle in a long single stroke. Do not use a short

vigorous pumping action to remove modules. Do not to apply
excessive force to remove a module.
7. Pull out the module approximately 10 in. (25.4 cm).
Repeat the procedures for the opposite header.
The removal tool is not designed to fully remove the module from the
cassette. Remove the tool prior to hand removing the module.
Use a gentle hand – do not use force on module.

June, 2010 A-99
Facility
A.4.5 INSTALLATION OF MODULES INTO THE

CASSETTE FRAME

this procedure.
The membrane cassettes are shipped with the modules installed. This
procedure is provided for membrane repair. See A.4.6 Fiber Repair for the
fiber repair procedure. To remove modules from a cassette see A.4.4
Module Removal from a Cassette.
A.4.5.1 MANPOWER REQUIREMENT

The typical installation of a 500D module requires the use of 2 people at
all times to prevent damage to the module.
Figure A.4.38 - ZeeWeed 500D Cassette
A.4.5.2 TOOLS REQUIRED

• Flash Light (Optional)

A-100 June, 2010
Facility
• 500D Module MARS Removal Tool
• O-Ring lubricant (i.e. Lubri-gel)
• Step Ladder
A.4.5.3 CHECKING FOR SLACK ADJUSTMENT

Prior to installing the new module, visually inspect the cassette and refer
to A.4.3 Fiber Shrinkage and Slack to determine if the cassette should be
adjusted for slack.
A.4.5.4 UNPACKING THE MODULE

Each module is packaged in a sealed bag in a box. Using 2 people,
remove the module from the box, and lay it out flat on a clean table or
work surface larger than the fully extended module. Through the clear
bag, inspect the module to ensure that no damage was incurred during
shipping. Check that all O-rings are present. If an O-ring is missing, do
not open bag until a spare O-ring is located. Carefully cut completely
across the one end of the bag. Do not cut towards yourself or the fibers.
With one person holding the header, the second person should pull on
the bottom of the bag sliding the bag off of the module.
Be mindful of the module and membrane at all times when working

around the cassettes. Do not allow clothing, body parts, tools,
materials, jewelry etc. to scrape or touch the membrane. Do not allow
the module headers to bump up against the cassette frame or other
modules. Ensure the module is not allowed to dry out.
A.4.5.5 INSTALLING THE MODULE
A.4.5.5.1 PRELIMINARY INSPECTION AND SET UP

Once the module is unpacked, the permeate spigots will be exposed.

June, 2010 A-101
Facility
1. Inspect the spigot for any cracks or damage.
2. Confirm the black EPDM #118 ‘s are present, intact and in proper
placement on the permeate spigot. O-rings must not be twisted,
cracked, or worn. Apply a water-soluble lubricant (such as Lubri-
gel or KY Jelly) to the O-rings (see Figure A.4.39 - Correct Position
of the O-rings on the Permeate Spigot).
3. When reinstalling a used module that was removed for

inspection, hose down the module to remove any obvious solids
and debris. Pay particular attention to the rail support guide on
the top of the header.
Figure A.4.39 - Correct Position of the O-rings on the Permeate Spigot
A.4.5.5.2 INSTALLING THE TOP HEADER
Quality testing has shown that the majority of module failures can be
attributed to incorrect module installation. It is very important that
the following instructions are followed to prevent damage. Under no
circumstances should excessive force be used on the module to aid in
insertion or removal from the cassette.

A-102 June, 2010
Facility
Each module has one square-end header and one round-end header.
Modules are installed alternating square and round ends up.
Figure A.4.40 - Module Header
For a wastewater application with ZeeWeed 500D-48 cassettes, the

module at the extreme right hand side (when viewed with the 3” aeration
pipes on the left) will have the square-end header at the top and round
end at the bottom. The second module will have the round-end at the
top and square end at the bottom. Subsequent modules will alternate
square and round ends. Install the modules according to the pattern
above.
Figure A.4.41 - Cassette

June, 2010 A-103
Facility
Support the headers at all times. Do not allow the module headers to
bump up against the cassette frame or other modules.
Figure A.4.42 - Handling the Module
Check that the desired end (round or square) is at the top. Use 2 people
to lift the module. Be careful not to let the fibers or the bottom header
contact the ground. While one person climbs the ladder to install the top
header, the second person must support the bottom header at all times.
The installation of a 500D module must be completed with two

people. The bottom module header must not swing freely when the
top header is slid into place. If the bottom header is not controlled
during installation, it can swing into the centre of the cassette and
impact the bottom permeate collectors. Damage from this impact
will result in module replacement.

A-104 June, 2010
Facility
1. To insert the module into the cassette, align the rail on the top of
the module with the cassette.
Figure A.4.43 - Aligning the Rail on the Module with the Cassette Frame
2. If space allows, wipe any visible debris from the rail and apply
lubri-gel to both the rail and rail support guides on the top of the
header to allow a smooth insertion.
Under no circumstances should excessive force be used to insert the

module. Avoid the use of a hammer or any blunt force object.
3. With one person supporting the top and another person

supporting the bottom header of the module, slide the top header
in until it is about 10 in. (250 mm) from being completely installed.

June, 2010 A-105
Facility
A.4.5.5.3 INSTALLING THE BOTTOM HEADER

If necessary, use a flash light to illuminate the bottom permeate port. If
space allows, turn the bottom header sideways to reduce some of the
slack.
Figure A.4.44 - Turning the Bottom Header Sideways During Installation
1. Line up the bottom header spigot with the permeate connection

on the cassette. Use care that the spigot does not impact the
permeate collector.
2. Once alignment is confirmed, use gentle but firm pressure to

push the bottom header towards the centre of the cassette.

A-106 June, 2010
Facility
3. Confirm the O-ring seal on the module is correctly made with the
bottom permeate collector.
Figure A.4.45 - Inserting the Bottom Header
4. With the spigot properly seated, slightly and gently lift the header
- do not put stress on the spigot connection – and slip the
locating nipples on the front of the header into the holes on the
cassette frame.
Figure A.4.46 - Locating Nipples

June, 2010 A-107
Facility
A.4.5.5.4 COMPLETING THE MODULE INSTALLATION

1. After the bottom header is successfully connected, connect the
top header.
2. If space allows, wipe any visible debris from the rail and apply
lubri-gel to both the rail and rail support guides on the top of the
header to allow a smooth insertion.
Under no circumstances should excessive force be used to insert the

module. Avoid hammering or using a blunt force object. Avoid using
force in the area above the GE Water logo.
3. Once the module is in place, it must be locked in position at the

top and bottom. The module is in the locked position when the
locking key is vertical. A “click” will be felt when the locking key is
in proper position. Do not force the locking key into position.
Figure A.4.47 - Lock Position
If a module does not easily slide into the cassette, visually check for the
following:
• Permeate adaptor inserts seated properly. If not, reseat the

inserts.

A-108 June, 2010
Facility
• Extra plastic on the module header or urethane potting material

over flowing header. To remove extra plastic, use a coarse file,
and then a fine file. Carefully file off any extra material which
may be interfering with the insertion of the module into the
saddle.
A.4.5.5.5 TIGHTENING THE EXPANDERS

1. Tighten all top and bottom key side outer support expanders
using a 5 mm Allen Key or a hex wrench.
Figure A.4.48 - Tightening Expanders
Use caution that no contact is made with the fibres.
Expander is fully engaged when flush with the bottom surface of the key
side outer assembly. Max tightening torque not to exceed 5.0 Nm (3.6 FT-
LBS, 44 IN-LBS).
A.4.5.6 FINAL CHECKS

Perform a final check on the cassette and confirm:
• All spigots are seated properly
• All modules keys are in the locked positions
• All hardware is secure and torqued to the proper specifications

(see General Arrangement Drawings).

June, 2010 A-109
Facility
Once the module(s) have been installed and final check has been
completed, it may be necessary to carry out a glycerin flush and
sanitization procedure.
A.4.5.7 RETURNING DAMAGED MEMBRANES

Before returning membranes to GE W&PT, it is imperative that they be
properly cleaned, preserved, and that a “Returned Goods Authorization”
(RGA) number be obtained prior to shipping it. Contact GE W&PT
Technical Support for information on the RGA procedure.
A.4.6 FIBER REPAIR

A delaminated fiber needs to be cut and sealed. This section describes
the procedure for the necessary repair.
Do not separate strands that are glued together at the header as this
will cause damage to the membranes.
A.4.6.1 CUT FIBERS

For leaks detected at either end of the membrane fiber, or for fibers that
have been cut badly, apply the steps outlined below:

A-110 June, 2010
Facility
1. Remove the membrane module from the membrane tank and

cut off the damaged portion 20 mm (3/4 in.) from the potting
material on the ZeeWeed header. See Figure A.4.49 - Membrane
Cut Position for the correct cut position.
Figure A.4.49 - Membrane Cut Position
2. Using a hypodermic syringe filled with silicone sealant (available

from GE W&PT as a “membrane repair kit”, Baan # 1022887),
insert the tip of the needle 10 mm (7/16 in.) into the centre of the
membrane lumen. See Figure A.4.50 - Axial Silicone Injection for
insertion positions.
3. Apply light pressure to inject the silicone. Fill the lumen back to
the header, as indicated by the darkened zone in Figure A.4.50 -
Axial Silicone Injection (this typically takes about 15-45 seconds).
Slowly withdraw the needle while still injecting silicone to assure
the lumen is completely filled. While still applying pressure to the
syringe, use the tip of the needle to spread silicone over the cut
end of the lumen.

June, 2010 A-111
Facility
4. Once the repair is complete, place the cassette back into the
membrane tank. Allow a ten minute curing time before
performing further membrane testing.
Figure A.4.50 - Axial Silicone Injection

A-112 June, 2010
Facility
A.4.6.2 LEAKING FIBERS

If the leak is in the middle of the lumen, follow the steps outlined below:
1. Remove the membrane module from the membrane tank.
2. Using a hypodermic syringe filled with silicone sealant (available

from GE W&PT as a “membrane repair kit”, Baan # 1022887),
push the tip of the needle through the lumen. Ensure that the
needle does not go through the lumen completely, but only into
the hollow centre. See Figure A.4.51 - Subjacent Silicone Injection
for insertion instruction. The correct positioning of the needle is 5
to 10 mm (3/16 in. to 7/16 in.) away from the leak zone, at an
angle of 5 to 10 degrees.
A metal shield should be used to protect the hand holding the fiber.
3. Apply light pressure to fill the lumen so that it is filled 5 to 10 mm

(3/16 in. to 7/16 in.) past the leak zone on either end. Continue
applying pressure while withdrawing the needle from the lumen,
ensuring the puncture is sealed.
4. Once the repair is complete, place the cassette back into the
membrane tank. Allow a ten minute curing time before
performing further membrane testing.

June, 2010 A-113
Facility
The optional DispensGun®, an ergonomic, “pistol-grip” style silicon

delivery tool (Pt. No. 1025796), can be used to simplify and shorten
the time required to perform ZeeWeed fiber repairs.
Figure A.4.51 - Subjacent Silicone Injection

A-114 June, 2010
A.5
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
This page has been
Facility
A.5.1 INTRODUCTION
This section describes various preventive maintenance measures that
may be done to enhance and maintain the operation of the system. The
section includes discussions on:
• The Vendor Data
• The preventive maintenance equipment schedule
• The Zeeweed 500D inspection procedure
• The module interconnection strip inspection procedure
• Methods to prevent stainless steel corrosion
All routine maintenance must be carried out according to the safety

regulations and instructions specified by the supplier of the
equipment.
Read all relevant safety information in the Vendor Data and in Safety
Information before doing any maintenance work.
Handle the cleaning chemicals with care (refer to Material Safety

Data Sheets). Wear a face mask, rubber apron, and rubber gloves
when handling these chemicals.
Rev. 0 ZeeWeed 500D - Preventive Maintenance

June, 2010 A-117
Facility
A.5.2 VENDOR DATA AND MAINTENANCE

PROCEDURES
Technical specifications of the mechanical and electrical items in the
system, as well as detailed maintenance guidelines and procedures,
have been provided in the Vendor Data.
All routine maintenance must be carried out according to the technical

specifications of each system component, as described in the Vendor
Data. A summary of major preventive maintenance items in the system
can be found in Table A.5.1 - Preventive Maintenance Schedule.
The Vendor Data is prepared and provided to the client at the time of
delivery of the ZeeWeed Filtration System and is a compilation of
installation, operation, maintenance, and safety information supplied to
GE Water & Process Technologies (GE W&PT) by manufacturers of
various component parts incorporated into your system.
GE W&PT has not independently verified the information contained in

the Vendor Data and no representations or warranties of any kind,
express or implied, are made by GE W&PT as to the quality, suitability,
accuracy, timeliness, or completeness of any material, information,
or data contained therein. GE W&PT does not accept liability for the
consequences of any action taken on the basis of information
contained in the Vendor Data.
If updated or additional information beyond what has been provided in

the Vendor Data is required, contact GE W&PT Technical Support
Department for assistance.
Selection of the correct lubricant is subject to seasonal conditions,

ambient temperatures, air movement, and air quality. The selection of
lubricants should be made carefully with due reference to the Vendor
Data and with consideration for the operating conditions of the
equipment.
If any of the problems discussed in this section persist or other

difficulties arise, the operator should contact GE W&PT. Complete
operating logsheets are necessary to determine the source of the
problem.
ZeeWeed 500D - Preventive Maintenance Rev. 0

A-118 June, 2010
Facility
A.5.3 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT

SCHEDULE
The purpose of the operator’s preventive maintenance schedule is to
keep the equipment ready and to detect any signs of equipment
malfunction during operation and scheduled maintenance checks.
All analog and digital instruments should be checked/calibrated as

per Vendor Data.
Tasks are presented in Table A.5.1 - Preventive Maintenance Schedule.

The following codes are used at the top of the columns:
D - Daily Maintenance Checklist
W - Weekly Maintenance Checklist
M - Monthly Maintenance Checklist
Q - Quarterly Maintenance Checklist
S - Semi-Annually Maintenance Checklist
A - Annually Maintenance Checklist

Table A.5.1 - Preventive Maintenance Schedule
D W M Q S A Task
Logsheet
X Fill out system logsheet
Analytical Testing
X pH: feed, membrane tank, permeate
X Feed water: Color, TOC/DOC, TSS/VSS
X Treated water: Color, TOC/DOC, Total Coliform
All Motors
X Cleanliness (wipe up any spills or debris). Remove
any corrosion from piping or instruments.
X Security of components

June, 2010 A-119
Facility
Table A.5.1 - Preventive Maintenance Schedule

X Check for leaks anywhere in the system
Replace the PLC battery every two to four years
Every 5 years, replace the UPS
X Inspect the piping for corrosion and repair as
required. See A.5.6 Preventing Stainless Steel
Corrosion.
X Inspect the inside of the membrane tank for
damage. Repair as required.
X Inspect membrane tanks
TW: For wastewater systems,

drain the tank.
X Have the ground checked every year if possible.
Note: Copper-clad ground rods last longer than
galvanized rods. Also check the clamp or weld
connections for corrosion.
All Motors
X Where possible, remove fan cover and clean off dust
from fan and airway. Use low-pressure compressed
air and/or dry cloth.
ZeeWeed Modules
X Check the module interconnecting strip. See A.5.6
Preventing Stainless Steel Corrosion.
X Check the cyclic/sequential aeration is functioning
correctly by observing the membrane tank
X Clean with sodium hypochlorite and/or citric acida
X Check cassettes for level
X Inspect one cassette per train per year for any signs
of wear. Take pictures of membranes in the cassette
and send the pictures to GE W&PT. See A.4.3 Fiber
Shrinkage and Slack, and A.5.5 Module
Interconnecting Strip Inspection.
a. Monthly initially until optimum interval established for system.

A-120 June, 2010
Facility
A.5.4 ZEEWEED 500D INSPECTION

PROCEDURE
This procedure will serve as a guide for the field inspection of the
ZeeWeed 500D membrane module/cassette.
Contact GE W&PT Technical Support if there are any concerns or

questions about the following topics.
A.5.4.1 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT NEEDED

Only common maintenance type tools (wrenches et al) are required to
remove ZeeWeed 500D cassettes for inspection. The particular tools
required are site specific.
Below is a list of tools and equipment you should have available during
the inspection:
• ZeeWeed 500D Membrane Interconnecting Strip (MIS) Removal

Tool
• Associated tools to remove the ZeeWeed 500D cassette safely

from the membrane tank
• ZeeWeed 500D Header Removal Tool. Older versions will not

provide suitable removal effectiveness and should not be used.
A.5.4.2 INFORMATION GATHERING AND RECORDING

It is recommended that the following information be recorded for every
cassette inspected on the "ZW500D Inspection Template":
• Site Name
• Inspector
• Inspection Date
• Train Number

June, 2010 A-121
Facility
• Cassette Position
• Cassette Serial Number
Photos should be taken at each step and filed with the completed
Inspection Forms.
A.5.4.3 INSPECTION FREQUENCY

A typical new ZeeWeed 500 series plant should initially execute the
inspection procedure quarterly (every three months) on at least one
cassette from each train - this is typically called the 'indicator cassette'
and should be the same cassette for each subsequent inspection.
For plants with operating temperatures greater than 30°C (86°F) or with
a potential that suspended solids can accumulate within the membrane
tanks (enhanced coagulation/MBR applications) it is recommended to
initially execute the inspection procedure monthly. Since the processes
at each plant are unique, and considering the variations in feed water
quality, temperature changes and resultant accumulation of solids, the
effects on ZeeWeed modules will vary.
An initial quarterly or monthly inspection frequency should be adjusted

by experienced operating staff either up or down dynamically based on
observed and recorded trends and site specific operating conditions. It
is important for operating staff to monitor potential issues, adjust
inspection frequency in response to trends, and correct detected issues
promptly to ensure optimum performance of the membranes and to
prevent irreversible damage. At a minimum, it is recommended that
each cassette within a plant be inspected annually.
For assistance in determining the optimum frequency of membrane

module inspection, call Technical Support.

A-122 June, 2010
Facility
A.5.4.4 AERATION PATTERNS AND HITCH PINS

Before the cassette is removed from the water, a visual inspection of the
aeration patterns should be performed with the liquid level a few inches
above the permeate pipe. A rectangular air pattern of equal intensity
(Figure A.5.1 - Correct Aeration Pattern) should be seen. Note any
inconsistencies in the Additional Notes section on the inspection
template. Inconsistencies could consist of poor air distribution on one
side of the cassette or less air to the cassette due to poor valve operation
or loose cassette leveling pins.
Ensure that the cyclic valves are operating correctly. Note the cyclic time
(if applicable) in the notes section on the inspection template (i.e.-10
seconds on and 10 seconds off or other cycle time).
Also check hitch pins are all in place and in good condition. Hitch pins
should fit snugly on the pin and not show signs of wear. There should be
4 hitch pins per cassette.
Figure A.5.1 - Correct Aeration Pattern

June, 2010 A-123
Facility
A.5.4.5 HOSES, CAMLOCKS, AND STRAUB CONNECTIONS

Check that the hoses, camlocks, and straub connections are in good
condition. Note any cracks and discolouration on hoses and check all
hose clamps are tight. Check all Straub connections for tightness per
factory torque specifications, and ensure connections are properly
aligned to the pipe.
A.5.4.6 REMOVING THE CASSETTE
A cassette that has been in service will weigh more than it did when
it was first installed. To avoid severe personal injury caused by a
collapse, confirm that the load limits of all lifting equipment and of
the surface that the cassette will be set on are sufficient.
Refer to A.3.10 Membrane Inspection/Replacement for instructions on

removing cassettes from membrane tanks.
When removing a cassette with accumulated solids, verify the rated

capacity of lifting brackets, cranes, and the cassette lifting frame before
attempting a lift. As the cassette is removed from the tank, use a weight
scale to ensure that components under load are within their design
capacity. Ensure that the cassette remains level throughout the lift and
inspect the aerator plates and tubes for solids accumulation.
Never spray membranes with a high-pressure water stream.
To reduce the amount of solids on the cassette before lifting, aerate the
cassette without permeation and use a garden hose with a low-
pressure stream to dislodge solids from the cassette.

A-124 June, 2010
Facility
To ensure that the water pressure in the hose is not excessive, with the
hose held 3 ft above the ground, confirm that the stream does not
extend more than 3 ft from the hose before reaching the ground (refer
to Figure A.5.2 - Water Pressure Test). A stream that extends any further
with the hose held at this height is too strong to be used on the
membranes.
Figure A.5.2 - Water Pressure Test
A.5.4.7 LEVELING PINS

Once the cassette is removed from the water, a visual inspection of the
leveling pins should be performed (Figure A.5.3 - Typical Levelling Pin
Diagram). Check for loose or damaged pins. Check that all fasteners
(nuts, bolts, etc.) are not loose, missing, or damaged. Leveling pins that
are loose may result in cassettes that are not level, which will contribute
to uneven aeration and solids accumulation.
Figure A.5.3 - Typical Levelling Pin Diagram

June, 2010 A-125
Facility
A.5.4.8 SOLIDS ACCUMULATION PATTERNS

Once the cassette has been removed from the membrane tank or the
water level has been lowered to where membrane tank entry is feasible
(abiding by all health and safety regulations), the following steps must
be performed:
• Full length pictures should be taken from all four sides of the
cassette
• Note any solids accumulation patterns on the inspection

template. See Figure A.5.4 - Solids Accumulation (OK). Figure A.5.5
- High Solids Accumulation shows a high level of solids
accumulation, which would cause concern.
Debris, such as sticks and leaves, are a concern. This type of material
should not be in contact with the membranes.
Scaling on the membrane is also a concern. Scaling may cause

undesirable effects on the membrane.
If excessive solids, debris or any scaling is noticed, check all screens prior
to the membrane tank and then contact GE W&PT Technical Support.
Figure A.5.4 - Solids Accumulation (OK)

A-126 June, 2010
Facility
Figure A.5.5 - High Solids Accumulation
A.5.4.9 SHELLS
Check the cassette and membranes closely for signs of aquatic life,
particularly in the form of shell life. Shells can be as small as 1mm in
length. Figure A.5.6 - Shells shows an example of shells.
Figure A.5.6 - Shells
A.5.4.10 CASSETTE FRAME AND HARDWARE

Check the stainless steel (SS) cassette frame welds. Welds should all be
in good condition.

June, 2010 A-127
Facility
Check all fasteners, for example, nuts and bolts are not loose or missing.
Refer to General Assembly drawings for specifics on locations. Contact
GE W&PT Regional Accounts Manager for drawing details. Contact GE
W&PT Technical Support if there are any questions.
A.5.4.11 PERMEATE COLLECTION AND SADDLE INSPECTION

An inspection of both the bottom end position permeate collection ports
(Figure A.5.7 - Bottom Permeate Collection Port) and the top permeate
end saddles should be conducted (Figure A.5.8 - Top Permeate Saddle).
Note any issues on the inspection template. Figure A.5.9 - Location of
Collection Port and Saddle shows the locations of the permeate collector
and saddle.
Figure A.5.7 - Bottom Permeate Collection Port
Figure A.5.8 - Top Permeate Saddle

A-128 June, 2010
Facility
Figure A.5.9 - Location of Collection Port and Saddle
A.5.4.12 AERATION TUBE INSPECTION

The aeration tubes should be inspected to ensure they are not plugged
or clogged. Clean any aeration tube that is plugged or clogged. Note the
location of plugged or clogged aeration tubes on the inspection
template. If plugged or clogged aeration tubes are found, the SS
aeration channel must be cleaned by removing end caps. PVC end caps
are located on the back side of the cassette at the bottom. To review site
specific operating conditions, contact Technical Support. Recheck the
aeration pattern after cleaning.
Figure A.5.10 - Aerator Caps

June, 2010 A-129
Facility
A.5.4.12.1 REPORTING
Submit all your findings (inspection template and photos) along with any
updated membrane maps to your GE W&PT’s Technical Support contact.
A.5.5 MODULE INTERCONNECTING STRIP

INSPECTION
The Module Interconnecting Strip (MIS) holds groups of membrane
modules together in the cassette. It requires monthly inspection to
ensure proper operation and identifies worn parts that require
replacement.
1. Visually inspect all of the Module Interconnecting Strips (MIS) and

verify they are attached (see Figure A.5.11 - MIS Location).
Figure A.5.11 - MIS Location

A-130 June, 2010
Facility
2. Verify that all locking keys are tightly locked in the vertical
position (see Figure A.5.12 - Locking Key Locked Position (Vertical)
and Figure A.5.13 - Locking Key Unlocked Position (Horizontal).
Figure A.5.12 - Locking Key Locked Position (Vertical)
Figure A.5.13 - Locking Key Unlocked Position (Horizontal)

June, 2010 A-131
Facility
3. Inspect the MIS locking pins. The locking pins should be in the
upright position.
Figure A.5.14 - Locking Pin Locked Position (Vertical)
Figure A.5.15 - Locking Pin Unlocked Position (Diagonal)

A-132 June, 2010
Facility
4. Check for wear on the MIS. Each locking pin should lock into
position tightly and securely. If the locking pins move freely, the
MIS is worn. Figure A.5.16 - Module Header, Showing Wear
Location shows typical wear location on a module header.
Figure A.5.16 - Module Header, Showing Wear Location
5. Check for independent movement between the module and the

locking key mechanism.
6. Look for wear on the locking key mechanism.
A.5.6 PREVENTING STAINLESS STEEL

CORROSION
A water treatment system may comprise stainless steel components.
System operators must follow the preventive maintenance steps
provided below in order to prevent corrosion from forming on stainless
steel piping and components.

June, 2010 A-133
Facility
A.5.6.1 CAUSES OF CORROSION

Stainless steel corrosion is primarily caused by surface contamination
and/or chlorine attack. Surface contamination can cause serious
corrosion if it is not removed quickly.
SURFACE CONTAMINATION. When the piping is installed with carbon steel

tools or not protected from nearby welding or grinding work, carbon
steel particles may embed in stainless steel surfaces. Exposure to rusty
water or iron-laden dust and dirt can also cause surface corrosion.
CHLORINE ATTACK. Chlorine-induced corrosion can occur when

chlorinated water splashes on piping or when chlorine vapors condense
on the piping due to inadequate ventilation or high humidity.
A.5.6.2 PREVENTING CORROSION

Minimize corrosion as follows:
CLEAN REGULARLY. Piping and equipment should be kept clean and dry.
Keep potential contaminants (for example, solvents, tools, and
equipment), away from stainless steel components.
MINIMIZE CHLORINE CONTACT. Control splashing or condensation of

chlorinated water streams. Remove contamination as soon as it is
observed. Minimize work near stainless steel components. Avoid welding
or grinding work. If local work is necessary, ensure that the stainless
steel components are fully protected.
FABRICATION, HANDLING, AND INSTALLATION OF COMPONENTS. Use the correct

tools and fabrication techniques for any new work. Properly weld and
passivate new or repaired piping. Avoid the use of dissimilar metal
fasteners and joining components. Ensure that any new components
are thoroughly cleaned, inside and outside, before installation.
If excessive condensation is evident on piping surfaces, adjust the

ventilation system or add dehumidification.

A-134 June, 2010
Facility
A.5.6.3 DETECTING, CLEANING, & REPAIRING CORROSION

The following sections include recommendations on detecting, cleaning,
and repairing corroded or contaminated components.
A.5.6.3.1 DETECTING EMBEDDED IRON

The simplest test for free, embedded iron is to wash down the stainless
steel part with clean water, allow it to dry (or drain), and wait 24 hours. If
there are rust streaks on the surface of the stainless steel, iron is present.
The ferroxyl test is a more sensitive indication of embedded iron. The

system operator applies the solution with a spray bottle and checks for
a blue stain within 15 seconds of the application. If a blue stain appears,
there is iron contamination.
Table A.5.2 - Ingredients to the Ferroxyl Test
Ingredient Volume/Weight
Distilled Water 1000 mL
Nitric Acid, 60-67% 20 mL
Potassium Ferricyanide 30 g
When handling this test solution, wear rubber gloves, protective

clothing, and face shields. Avoid inhalation of the atomized spray!
Prepare the solution (specified in Table A.5.2 - Ingredients to the Ferroxyl

Test) as follows:
1. Add the nitric acid to the distilled water.
2. Add the potassium ferricyanide to the nitric acid/distilled water

combination.
A.5.6.3.2 CLEANING & REPAIRING SURFACE CORROSION
Do not allow cleaning compounds to fall in the membrane tanks.

June, 2010 A-135
Facility
If corrosion occurs on a stainless steel part, clean and treat the oxidized
areas in order to restore the surface to its original corrosion resistance.
Remove the oxidized material with the appropriate wire brush. After the
oxidized areas have been brushed clean, apply a pickling paste to the
affected area to chemically clean the surface and remove any
embedded contaminants.
Table A.5.3 - Effective Cleaning Methods

Job Cleaning Agents Comments
Routine cleaning Warm water, soap, ammonia, Apply with a sponge or soft
and detergent cloth.
Smears and fingerprints 3M Stainless Steel Cleaner Provides a barrier film to
and Polish, Arcal 20, Lac-O- minimize fingerprints.
Nu, Lumin Wash, Stainless
Shine
Stubborn stains and 3M Stainless Steel Cleaner Using a dry or damp cloth,
discoloration and Polish, Twinkle, Liquid Nu rub lightly in the direction of
Steel, Household Cleaners the polish lines of the
stainless steel.
Grease and oil Any good commercial Apply with a sponge or soft
detergent or caustic cleaner cloth in the direction of the
polish lines of the stainless
steel.
As an added precaution, there are various protective coatings that can

be used to help prevent stainless steel contamination and corrosion.
Clear lacquers are preferred over the colored lacquers and paints, so
that the operator can check the condition of the stainless steel surface
below the coating.

A-136 June, 2010
ZW500D Inspection Template
Site Name: MLSS & pH:

Inspection Water Level: Above/Below
Performed by: Permeate Pipe
Date Inspected: Aeration Type:
Aeration Sequence
Train Number: (ie. 10/10 or 10/30):
Cassette Position: Module Inspection
L-Module 1
L-Module 2
L-Module 3
L-Module 4
L-Module 5
L-Module 6
L-Module 7
L-Module 8
L-Module 9
L-Module 10
L-Module 11
L-Module 12
L-Module 13
L-Module 14
L-Module 15
L-Module 16
L-Module 17
L-Module 18
L-Module 19
L-Module 20
L-Module 21
L-Module 22
L-Module 23
L-Module 24
R-Module 1
R-Module 2
R-Module 3
R-Module 4
R-Module 5
R-Module 6
R-Module 7
R-Module 8
R-Module 9
R-Module 10
R-Module 11
R-Module 12
R-Module 13
R-Module 14
R-Module 15
R-Module 16
R-Module 17
R-Module 18
R-Module 19
R-Module 20
R-Module 21
R-Module 22
R-Module 23
R-Module 24
Cassette
S/N Inspection Point
Solids Accumulation - OK, Top

Concern (C), Issue (I) Bot
Fibre Slack - Loose (L) / Tight Top
(T) Bot
Clips and Inserts all Present Top
(Y/N) Bot
Locking Key In Locked Top
Position (Y/N) Bot
INSERT CASSETTE NUMBER HERE
Top
V-wedge Snug (Y/N)
Bot
Header In Good Condition
Top
(Y/N)
Plugged (P) or Clogged
Bot
(C ) Aerator Tubes/Channels
Inspection Point Cassette Inspection
Equal Intensity Aeration
Pattern (Y/N)
Hitch Pins In Good Condition
(Y/N)
Hoses/Hose Clamps In Good
Condition (Y/N)
Camlocks/Straub In Good
Condition (Y/N)
Cassette Lifting Load Limits (
OK / Issue (I) )
Leveling Pins In Good
Condition (Y/N)
Fasteners or Nuts Loose (L) /
Missing (M)
Bottom Permeate Collector in
Good Condition (Y/N)
Top Permeate Saddle In
Good Condition (Y/N)
*Note – Comments can be written on next page
QRF-020 REV 04 Page 1 of 2 Aug 24, 2007

ZW500D Inspection Template
Site Name:
Inspection
Performed by:
Date Inspected:
Train Number:
Cassette Position: Module Inspection
L-Module 25
L-Module 26
L-Module 27
L-Module 28
L-Module 29
L-Module 30
L-Module 31
L-Module 32
R-Module 26
R-Module 28
R-Module 30
R-Module 32
R-Module 25
R-Module 27
R-Module 29
R-Module 31
Cassette
S/N Inspection Point
Solids Accumulation - OK, Top

INSERT CASSETTE NUMBER HERE
Concern (C), Issue (I) Bot

Fibre Slack - Loose (L) / Tight Top
(T) Bot
Clips and Inserts all Present Top
(Y/N) Bot
Locking Key In Locked Top
Position (Y/N) Bot
Top
V-wedge Snug (Y/N)
Bot
Header In Good Condition
Top
(Y/N)
Plugged (P) or Clogged
Bot
(C ) Aerator Tubes/Channels
ADDITIONAL NOTES
QRF-020 REV 04 Page 2 of 2 Aug 24, 2007

This page has been
A.6
CLEANING & VENTILATION
This page has been
Facility
A.6.1 CLEANING CHEMICALS

Depending on the type of cleaning required and the fouling on the
membranes, use either a sodium hypochlorite (NaOCl) solution or a citric
acid (MC-1) solution. Sodium hypochlorite is used to remove organic/
biological fouling on the membranes. Citric acid is used to remove
fouling due to mineral scales, iron, or other metals.
For more severe fouling, GE Water & Process Technologies (GE W&PT)
offers specially designed and formulated cleaning chemicals for
ZeeWeed membranes. These approved cleaning chemicals should be
used along with the Maintenance Clean and Recovery Clean procedures
provided in this section. Safety and handling instructions for these
cleaning chemicals are located in Material Safety Data Sheets.
GE W&PT will advise on chemicals that are suitable.

Table A.6.1 - Chemicals Required for ZeeWeed Cleaning
Design Frequency
Chemical Purpose Design pH
Concentration of Cleaning
Sodium Hypochlorite Maintenance Clean
Sodium Organic 200 mg/La 2 per week Maximum
hypochlorite Cleaner 10.5
12% and
specific
gravity 1.168
Citric Acid Maintenance Clean

Citric acid Scale 2000 mg/Lb 1 per week 2.5-3.5
50% Removal
Sodium Hypochlorite Recovery Clean

Sodium Organic 1000 mg/Lb 2 per year Maximum
hypochlorite Cleaner 10.5 at
12% and T<30°C.
specific Maximum pH
gravity 1.168 10 at 30°C
<T< 40°C.
Citric Acid Recovery Clean

Citric acid Scale 2000 mg/Lb 2 per year 2.5-3.5
50% Removal
a. Backpulse concentration
b. Membrane tank concentration
c. If required
Rev. 0 ZeeWeed 500D - Cleaning & Ventilation

June, 2010 A-139
Facility
Other cleaning chemicals may contain materials incompatible with

the membranes and should NOT be used. Use of non-approved
cleaning chemicals voids any membrane warranties.
Wear a face mask, rubber apron, and rubber gloves when handling
chemicals. For more information, see Material Safety Data Sheets.
A.6.2 FREQUENCY OF CLEANINGS

The frequency of cleanings depends on specific operating conditions
(operating time, feed flow rates, and permeate flow rates) and on the
particular chemistry of the fluid being processed. During normal
operation, membranes can become fouled by mineral salts (calcium
carbonate, calcium sulfate, magnesium sulfate), iron (Fe), insoluble
organics (such as oil), and biological matter (bacteria or products from
bacterial action). Deposits that build up on the membrane surface during
operation can cause a loss in permeability. It should be noted that
permeability drops if the feed temperature decreases. This decrease is
normal and does not necessarily indicate fouling.
For frequency of cleanings, refer to Table A.6.1 - Chemicals Required for

ZeeWeed Cleaning.
A.6.3 TYPES OF CLEANINGS
Never apply Backpulse pressures greater than 8 psig (22.7 psia)

across the membranes. Membrane life may decrease as a result.
ZeeWeed 500D - Cleaning & Ventilation Rev. 0

A-140 June, 2010
Facility
To maximize membrane life and operation, the system automatically

undergoes a Backpulse according to a system operator-set frequency
and duration. See During Relax, the membranes sit for a system
operator-specified duration without permeation before resuming
production. During this time, the membrane aeration disperses the solids
that have concentrated around the membranes..
Relax is an alternative to Backpulse. If a Backpulse failure occurs and no

pump is available, the PLC places the trains into Relax mode. See A.6.3.2
Relax.
An automatic Maintenance Clean is also performed according to a

system operator-set frequency. See A.6.3.4 Maintenance Clean. GE W&PT
must be consulted for assistance with setting up a Maintenance Clean
schedule.
A Recovery Clean procedure is required to prevent fouling of the

membranes and when it is no longer possible to operate the unit at the
required flux without exceeding the maximum Transmembrane
Pressure (TMP). See A.6.3.5 Recovery Clean.
A.6.3.1 CLEANING LOGSHEET

All cleaning data should be recorded on the cleaning logsheet located in
performance monitoring. This logsheet should be faxed to GE W&PT’s
Process Group (or e-mailed to service@zenon.com) for verification of
cleaning effectiveness.
A.6.3.2 RELAX
During Relax, the membranes sit for a system operator-specified
duration without permeation before resuming production. During this
time, the membrane aeration disperses the solids that have
concentrated around the membranes.

June, 2010 A-141
Facility
A.6.3.3 BACKPULSE
Backpulse cleanings occur automatically during the normal production
cycle of the system, at a system operator-set frequency and duration.
The Backpulse frequency and duration should be periodically optimized
by the system operator for changes in operating conditions and the
influent feed to the system.
A.6.3.3.1 ENTERING BACKPULSE SETPOINTS

If required, the default setpoints for Backpulse can be adjusted at the
HMI as follows:
1. Select Enable to switch a train from Relax to Backpulse. (It is not

possible to enable Relax).
Figure A.1 - Train Overview

A-142 June, 2010
Facility
Figure A.2 - Train Setpoints
2. Input the Backpulse frequency and duration.
3. Record all changes to the setpoints.
A.6.3.3.2 INITIATING BACKPULSES

The system operator can also initiate an additional Backwash by
selecting the Initiate Backpulse button on Figure A.3 - Mode of Operation.
The Backpulse occurs for the duration already set by the system
operator. The Backpulse timer will be reset so that future Backpulse will
occur at the set frequency. This button is only active in On mode, and is
disabled if any other train is in Backpulse.

June, 2010 A-143
Facility
When a system operator initiates a Backpulse, the Backpulse begins

immediately. The selected train becomes the lead train. The system
adjusts the production cycle time to maintain staggered backpulsing.
Figure A.3 - Mode of Operation
A.6.3.4 MAINTENANCE CLEAN

Maintenance Clean is an automatic procedure that results in consistent
performance of ZeeWeed membranes. A regular Maintenance Clean
prolongs the interval between Recovery Cleans. The Maintenance Clean
is performed at frequencies and chemical concentrations detailed in
Table A.6.1 - Chemicals Required for ZeeWeed Cleaning. For more
information, refer to the Control Documentation.
There are two types of Maintenance Cleans: Chlorine Clean and Acid
Clean. The Chlorine Clean removes the organic foulants; the Acid Clean
removes the inorganic foulants.
The system operator must ensure that there are sufficient cleaning
chemicals available. The system operator must set the day and time
when the Maintenance Clean needs to occur using Figure A.4 -
Maintenance Clean Schedule for each unit respectively. The time is
normally set between 12 a.m. and 6 a.m. when system demand is lowest.

A-144 June, 2010
Facility
For more information about alternative Maintenance Clean procedures,

contact the Service Department at (905) 465-3030 or by email at
zenon.service@ge.com.
A.6.3.4.1 SCHEDULING A MAINTENANCE CLEAN

To schedule a Maintenance Clean for a train, complete the following
steps:
1. On the Maintenance Clean schedule screen (see Figure A.4 -

Maintenance Clean Schedule), enter the day and time for the
Maintenance Clean. For days when a Maintenance Clean is not
required, enter a time of 24:00.
Figure A.4 - Maintenance Clean Schedule

June, 2010 A-145
Facility
2. Record all setpoint changes in the Maintenance Clean Setpoints

Screen.
Figure A.6.1 - Maintenance Clean Setpoints Screen
A.6.3.4.2 PERFORMING A MAINTENANCE CLEAN
The cleaning solution is pumped back through the membrane fibers,

similar to a Backpulse.
Only one unit can be in Maintenance Clean or Recovery Clean at a

time.
Maintenance Cleans are performed as follows:
Refer to the OSC for a detailed description of the steps involved.
A.6.3.4.3 ALTERNATIVE MAINTENANCE CLEAN

For details about alternative Maintenance Clean procedures, contact GE
W&PT.

A-146 June, 2010
Facility
Since a foulant can contain a variety of substances, rotating between

sodium hypochlorite and citric acid (one cleaning event with sodium
hypochlorite and the next one with citric acid) is recommended. Other
chemical cleaners may also be used if recommended and approved by
GE W&PT. It is recommended that the correct chemicals be selected for
each site during the initial operating period.
A.6.3.5 RECOVERY CLEAN

A Recovery Clean should be performed if the automatic backpulsing of
the system does not maintain membrane performance above the
specified level. A Recovery Clean procedure is required to prevent fouling
of the membranes and when it is no longer possible to operate the unit
at the required flux without exceeding the maximum Transmembrane
Pressure.
A Recovery Clean is operator-initiated and should have the operator

present during the majority of the clean.
There are two types of Recovery Cleans: Chlorine Clean and Acid Clean.
The Chlorine Clean removes the organic foulants; the Acid Clean
removes the inorganic foulants. Normally, an Acid Clean follows a
Chlorine Clean. At a reduced average operating capacity, the average
interval between Recovery Cleans may be extended.
A 50% by weight solution of citric acid has a density of 1.24. Therefore, a

50% citric acid solution 0.62 kg of citric acid per liter of water.
0.5 kg citric acid - 1.24

kg of citric - = ----------------------------------------------- kg 50% citric soln
------------------------------------------ × -------------------------------------------------------
L of 50% solution 1 kg 50% citric soln 1 L 50% citric soln
kg of citric - = --------------------------------------------------------
0.62 kg citric acid -
------------------------------------------
L of 50% solution 1 kg 50% citric solution

June, 2010 A-147
Facility
The sodium hypochlorite (NaOCl) cleaning solution should be limited

to a maximum pH of 11 at a temperature less than 30ºC, and a
maximum pH of 10 at a temperature between 30ºC and 35ºC.
Citric acid solubility is 500 g/L at 10ºC. GE W&PT does not recommend
increasing the concentration beyond 500 g/L. A 50% by weight
solution of citric acid has a density of 1.24. Therefore, a 50% citric
acid solution is made up using 0.62 kg of citric acid per liter of water.
An example calculation for adding citric acid to the dosing tank is as
follows: Required weight of citric acid = volume of water x 620 grams.
When topping up the dosing tank by 4 L: Weight of citric acid = 4x620
= 2,480 grams. Therefore, add another 2,480 g of citric acid.
A.6.3.5.1 PREPARING FOR A RECOVERY CLEAN

To prepare for a Recovery Clean, complete the following steps:
Do not clean the membranes with a cleaning solution above 38ºC.
1. Ensure that the chemical tanks have sufficient solution.
2. Record the current water temperature, flux, and permeability

while the train is operating in Production.
A.6.3.5.2 PERFORMING A RECOVERY CLEAN
Sodium hypochlorite cleaning solution generates gas that is both a

health and safety concern and corrosive. Adequate ventilation must
be provided.

A-148 June, 2010
Facility
Do not pour chemicals directly on the membranes.
For the PLC-controlled Recovery Clean procedure, see the OSC.
To perform a Recovery Clean, complete the following steps:
Refer to the OSC for a detailed description of the steps involved in

performing a recovery clean.
Toxic chlorine gas is produced if citric acid and sodium hypochlorite

mix with each other. Always ensure that one chemical is completely
rinsed from the tank and piping prior to cleaning with the other
chemical. Clean water should be backpulsed through all
contaminated piping until residual chlorine levels are less than 10
ppm. If chlorine gas is detected, the system operator should evacuate
the area immediately and advise the plant safety officer and/or
immediate supervisor accordingly. To minimize the chances of
producing toxic chlorine vapors, the chemical feed pumps are
interlocked during automatic operation so that sodium hypochlorite
(NaOCl) and citric acid (MC-1) cannot be sent to the same location
simultaneously. It is the system operator’s responsibility to ensure
that sodium hypochlorite (NaOCl) and citric acid (MC-1) are not sent
to the same location simultaneously if these devices are manually
operated.
A.6.4 VENTILATION
Ventilation of the membrane tanks must be provided if the membrane
plant is located in a building. This should include forced-air vents in the
checker plate above the membrane tank, as well as standard ventilation
for the building (for example, 4-6 exchanges/hour). Venting should be
designed to provide only a small negative pressure above the
membrane tank. Ventilation should be left on at all times.

June, 2010 A-149
This page has been
A.7
TROUBLESHOOTING
This page has been
Facility
A.7.1 OVERVIEW
GE Water & Process Technologies’ Technical Support Desk has drawn
upon many years of experience in a wide variety of plants to compose
this troubleshooting section. It conveniently brings together the most
common issues and frequently asked questions.
GE W&PT has prepared specific training courses to develop

troubleshooting skills. To discuss training options, call the Service
department.
For pressurized systems, relieve the pressure before starting

troubleshooting. Disconnect the air from the valves. Closing the valve
will not relieve the pressure.
All routine troubleshooting must be carried out according to the

safety regulations and instructions specified by the supplier of the
equipment.
Read all relevant safety information in the Vendor Data and in Safety
Information before doing any maintenance work.
Handle the cleaning chemicals with care (refer to the Material Safety
Data Sheets). Wear a face mask, rubber apron, and rubber gloves
when handling these chemicals.
Rev. 0 ZeeWeed 500D - Troubleshooting

June, 2010 A-153
Facility
A.7.2 EQUIPMENT TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The following troubleshooting guide is provided for quick reference only.
For detailed troubleshooting of system components, consult the Vendor
Data.
If any of the problems discussed in this section persist or other difficulties

arise, the operator should contact GE W&PT. Completed operating log
sheets are necessary to determine the source of the problem.
Be sure to consult all necessary safety information prior to

troubleshooting. Ensure that only qualified personnel are
troubleshooting system components.
Mechanical or electrical maintenance should only be performed by

qualified personnel. In the event of any differences between this manual
and the supplied Vendor Data, the supplied Vendor Data should always
take precedence. It is up to the operator to follow the correct safety
procedures when doing any type of troubleshooting.
ZeeWeed 500D - Troubleshooting Rev. 0

A-154 June, 2010
Facility
Mechanical or electrical problems should be reported to GE W&PT.
Table A.7.1 - Troubleshooting Guide

Problem Cause Recommended Remedy
General
Low flow shutdowns Flow valve (FV) or solenoid Check valves for correct
valve downstream of the operation
process pump discharge is
closed
Vacuum ejector not Check vacuum at pump inlet
operating or not at sufficient
vacuum
Hand valves on the discharge Verify correct position of
of the pump are throttled or hand valve, as per P&IDs
closed
High Transmembrane Hand valve on the suction to Verify correct position of
Pressure (TMP) shutdown (low the pump is throttled or hand valve, as per P&IDs
pressure). closed
System recovery has Verify current vs. design
wandered to higher than system recovery
designed
Membranes require cleaning Perform Recovery Clean as
per A.6.3.5 Recovery Clean of
this manual or contact GE
W&PT
PID tuning: overshooting the Contact GE W&PT
flow/pressure control
setpoints after backpulse
The TMP is based on two Check the calibration on the
instruments: the permeate instruments; check the
header pressure transmitter readings on the HMI.
and the level transmitter in
the membrane tank. If either
of these instruments fail or
are inaccurate, it can prevent
the entire train from
operating.

June, 2010 A-155
Facility
Table A.7.1 - Troubleshooting Guide

Problem Cause Recommended Remedy
High-pressure shutdown Hand valve on the suction to Verify the correct position of
(backpulse) the pump is throttled or hand valves, as per P&IDs
closed
System recovery wandered Verify current vs. design
to higher than designed system recovery
The timers are too quick as Contact GE W&PT
they relate to pressure
shutdowns
Level problems (analog) Failed 24 V DC power supply Verify power supply outlet
Problems with moisture in Check probe seals
probe
Level problems (digital) Switch compromised by Verify operation of switch
chemicals
Blown fuse to device Check the continuity of the
fuses
Programing problem: switch Verify switch input to PLC
programmed to behave versus program
improperly
ZeeWeed Membranes
Leaking/cut fiber Damaged fiber See A.4.6 Fiber Repair for
fiber repair methods
A.7.3 PERMEATE QUALITY

Permeate quality may be affected by any number of factors, such as
membrane damage, or a leak in the cassette seal.
A.7.3.1 MEMBRANE DAMAGE

To determine if damage has occurred to one or more of the membrane
modules, examine the permeate from each membrane cassette. If the
permeate is acceptable, the modules and cassette may continue
service. If a damaged cassette is identified, find the damaged module
either by visual fiber inspection or by a bubble test. Inspect and repair or
replace any damaged modules to bring the overall system performance
up to appropriate levels.

A-156 June, 2010
Facility
To locate a leaking element, use a bubble test. Streams of bubbles

identify the location of possible leaks in the ZeeWeed system. After the
cassette has been removed from the membrane tank and placed in
another tank, slowly raise the module out of the water to locate the leak.
In most cases, the cassette does not require disassembly to locate and
repair leaking fibers.
Alternately, the membranes may be inspected after removing them from

the system. This option should only be accomplished under the direct
supervision of GE W&PT personnel. See A.3.10 Membrane Inspection/
Replacement.
A.7.3.2 CASSETTE SEAL LEAKAGE

A leak in a cassette seal may result from improper attachment or
loosening of the connections to the cassette. Check these connections
periodically to see that they are properly installed.
A.7.4 PROCESS PUMP HAS LOST PRIME

A centrifugal permeate pump will not tolerate excessive air. Water in
contact with air at atmospheric pressure naturally contains dissolved
gases. After the water crosses the membrane boundary, the lower
pressure encountered on the lumen side reduces the solubility of these
gases in the water. The gases come out of solution and start to collect
into bubbles.
If the air is not removed for any reason, the process pump will lose prime.
An alarm will be generated and the train will be shut down.
PROBLEM: Process pump will not achieve prime due to air inside permeate
header.
POSSIBLE CAUSES:
• Air leaks along pipe work.
• Missing or pinched camlock O-rings attached to permeate pipes.

June, 2010 A-157
Facility
• Cracks along PVC piping.
• Permeate header sample valves not entirely closed.
• Failed check valves.
• Air release valve rubber seat stuck at the discharge orifice.
• Air separator and/or associated spool fittings might have cracks,

allowing in air.
RECOMMENDED REMEDIES: To determine exactly where a leak is occurring

along the permeate header, use a spray bottle containing a soapy
solution that can be sprayed at fittings and along piping and pipes to
check for leaks. Because the system runs under a vacuum during
production, wait until a backpulse occurs (positive pressure) to check for
leaks on the permeate header.
• Physically check all permeate pipes for evidence of cracks, and

replace as required.
• Replace any damaged or pinched O-rings inside permeate

camlock fittings. Install any missing camlock O-rings.
• Ensure that sample valves are closed when the system is in

operation.
• Ensure that the backpulse tank volume is well above the

discharge point on the tank.
• Determine if the air release valve rubber seat is stuck at the top
orifice. If so, it will prevent air from being vented from the
permeate header. See A.7.5 Air Release Valves (Crispin Valve with
ejector) for troubleshooting approaches. Ensure that the air
release valve moves freely (vertically) inside the housing.
• Repair any leaks at or around the air separator.
• If the TMP is high, there is a greater probability of air being pulled

across the membranes, which could hinder priming of the
process pumps. Initiate a membrane cleaning to unclog
membrane pores.

A-158 June, 2010
Facility
• Replace broken or missing check valve components.
• Request a program change to ensure that flow valves remain

open in Standby.
A.7.5 AIR RELEASE VALVES (CRISPIN VALVE

WITH EJECTOR)
PROBLEM: Air cannot be removed from the permeate header, either due
to the air release valve rubber seat remaining stuck to the top orifice
discharge port on the air release valve housing or blockage inside the
orifice port.
POSSIBLE CAUSES:
• Rust deposits formed on the internal surface area of the air

release valve may prevent the float ball from rising/falling freely
inside the air release valve housing.
• Rubber seat is set too far away from the top side of the brass
support arm.
• Flakes of rust from non-epoxy-coated air release valve housings

may have broken free and lodged into the orifice vent, creating a
blockage and preventing air from being removed from the air
separator.
RECOMMENDED REMEDIES:
1. Shutdown the train. Remove the air release valve housing cover.
Inspect the interior surface area of the air release valve. If a low
volume leak persists with the rubber valve against the orifice,
then the rubber valve should be adjusted or replaced. If rust is
present, arrange to have the air release valve sandblasted to
remove the rust and recoat with epoxy.
2. Ensure that the float ball moves freely up/down inside the air
release valve housing. If not, remove any obstructions.

June, 2010 A-159
Facility
3. Reassemble the air release valve.
4. Switch to train to On from Off mode to start the ejector. If

necessary readjust the position of the rubber seat for the air
release valve.
A.7.6 AERATION PROBLEM

Check all air connections and piping for damage. If damage is present,
the system will have to be repaired immediately.
Ensure the air filter is changed at regular intervals. Refer to the Vendor
Data for the recommended maintenance schedule. Proper aeration is
essential to the operation of the ZeeWeed system. See A.3.9.2 Checking
Aeration for instructions on checking for proper aeration.
A.7.7 SYSTEM COMPONENT FAILURE

If a system component has failed, perform the following steps:
1. Ensure that the device is locked out.
2. Record any information found on the device; for example, part

number, model number, make, and tag number.
3. Check the spare parts list for availability.
4. Check the Vendor Data for troubleshooting, spare components

list, and method to repair the device.
5. Contact GE W&PT at (905) 465-3030 and speak to our Service

Department to order spare parts.

A-160 June, 2010
Facility
In Manual mode, all interlocks are disabled. This allows for manual
entry of setpoints. Equipment can be damaged in Manual mode.

June, 2010 A-161
This page has been
A.8
PERFORMANCE MONITORING
This page has been
Facility
A.8.1 INTRODUCTION
This section provides information regarding the procedures, tools, and
schedules associated with gathering and tracking subsystem
performance data. This information is essential when assessing long-
standing performance issues, establishing trends, and determining the
durability of various components.
A.8.2 LOGSHEETS
Logsheets, which are provided as electronic copies, are used for
manually recording operational data and analytical results.
PERFORMANCE LOGSHEETS: Performance logsheets include those used for

recording process data. Electronic copies of these documents will be
provided by GE W&PT. Completed performance logsheets should be
emailed to GE W&PT on a weekly basis in order to facilitate GE W&PT's
ability to provide guidance,
SETPOINT LOGSHEET: The setpoint logsheet is used to record all changes

made to setpoints associated with the subsystem or its various
components (example: pumps). Because a complete loss of power to the
system will cause the PLC to reboot using the original setpoints stored in
the E2PROM, it is essential that this logsheet be updated whenever
setpoints are changed so that the most recent values can be reentered.
A.8.3 ZENOTRAC
ZenoTrac is a powerful system support tool available as an option for all
GE W&PT clients. Contact GE W&PT for more information about
ZenoTrac.
Rev. 0 ZeeWeed 500D - Performance Monitoring

June, 2010 A-165
This page has been
A.9
CALCULATIONS
This page has been
Facility
A.9.1 INTRODUCTION
This section provides calculations used to determine chemical quantities
required for cleaning, maintenance, and various other subsystem
procedures. These calculations are intended as general examples only;
additional information specific to your subsystem may be provided by
GE W&PT personnel during initial startup and commissioning.
A.9.1.1 UNIT CONVERSIONS

TIP: Multiply a value Convert all values to metric equivalents before performing the
in US gpm by 3.785 to calculations provided in this section.
get the equivalent in
lpm, and a value in lb/
ft3 by 0.016 to get the To find the corresponding value in kg/L for a known solution density, look
equivalent in kg/L.
up the density in Table A.9.1 - Solution Concentrations and Densities.
Concentrations are given as weight percentages. To create a solution

using a dry chemical, use [x]/(1-[x]) kg of chemical for every liter of water,
where [x] is the solution concentration written as a decimal.
EXAMPLE: To make a 35% calcium chloride solution, 0.35/(1-0.35) = 0.538

kg of calcium chloride for every liter of water used to make the solution.
Rev. 0 ZeeWeed 500D - Calculations

June, 2010 A-169
Facility
Table A.9.1 - Solution Concentrations and Densities

Solution Concentration
Chemical Solution Density (kg/L)
(Weight%)
Aluminum sulfate 48.50 1.335
Ammonium chloride 10.00 1.080
Calcium chloride (35% soln.) 35.00 1.250
Calcium chloride (15% soln.) 15.00 1.150
Calcium hydroxide 5.00 1.050
Ferric chloride 35.00 1.360
MC-1 50.00 1.240
Phosphoric acid (75% soln.) 75.00 1.582
Phosphoric acid (85% soln.) 85.00 1.694
Polyaluminum chloride 33.00 1.205
Potash 25.00 1.150
Potassium permanganate 3.00 1.030
Powdered activated carbon 5.00 1.025
slurry
Sodium aluminate (10% soln.) 10.00 1.090
Sodium aluminate (32% soln.) 32.00 1.300
Sodium bicarbonate 3.50 1.035
Sodium bisulfite 40.00 1.370
Sodium carbonate 10.00 1.110
Sodium hydroxide (25% soln.) 25.00 1.260
Sodium hydroxide (50% soln.) 50.00 1.520
Sodium hypochlorite (12% soln.) 12.00 1.168
Sodium hypochlorite (6% soln.) 6.00 1.076
Sulfuric acid (77.67% soln.) 77.67 1.704
Sulfuric acid (93.19% soln.) 93.19 1.834
Sulfuric acid (98% soln.) 98.00 1.836
Urea 23.00 1.000
ZenoTreat 150 (antiscalant) 100.00 1.150
ZenoTreat 450 (antiscalant) 100.00 1.080
NOTES:
• Before mixing solution, consult the applicable MSDS for
chemical purity.
ZeeWeed 500D - Calculations Rev. 0

A-170 June, 2010
Facility
A.9.2 GENERAL DOSING CALCULATION

To determine the amount of chemical(s) required when dosing the
subsystem, use the following calculation:
Calculate the flow rate of 35% ferric chloride solution to dose to 60 ppm
in a 100 lpm stream.
Figure A.9.1 - Dosing Calculation Diagram
Feedwater flow rate Qf = 100 lpm
Chemical concentration in feedwater stream Cf = 60 ppm (60 mg/L)
Stock solution concentration Cc = 35% by weight

Stock solution density ρc = 1.36 kg/L
The mass flow rate of ferric chloride in the feedwater stream equals the
mass flow rate of ferric chloride dosed.
In the equations below, Qf and Qc are in lpm, Cf is in mg/L, ρc is in kg/L,

and Cc is weight percent written as a decimal (example: 35% as 0.35).
Qf x Cf
Qc =
ρc x Cc x 106
Example:
100 x 60
= 0.0126 lpm
1.36 x 0.35 x 106
mg FeCl3 L FeCl3 soln. 35 kg FeCl3 6

100 L feed x 60 = Qc x 1.36 kg soln. x x 10 mg
minute L feed minute L soln. 100 kg soln. kg

June, 2010 A-171
Facility
If the required nutrient concentration (nitrogen or phosphorus) in the

feedwater stream (Cf) is given in mg/L (or ppm), then an extra calculation
step must be included.
Calculate the chemical flowrate according to the general example

above, and then divide this flowrate by the mass percent nitrogen or
phosphorus in the chemical being used (refer to Table A.9.2 - Mass
Percent Nitrogen or Phosphorus in Chemical.
Table A.9.2 - Mass Percent Nitrogen or Phosphorus in Chemical

Mass Percent Nitrogen or Phosphorus in
Chemical
Pure Chemical
Ammonium chloride 26.1%
Urea 46.6%
Phosphoric acid 31.6%
A.9.3 CALCULATING MEMBRANE PERMEABILITY

To gauge the effectiveness of a cleaning session, calculate the overall
permeability of the membranes before versus after the session has been
performed.
Refer to the example below when calculating membrane permeability.
EXAMPLE: A subsystem has a typical operating temperature of 20ºC

(68ºF) (T1) and an actual (observed) operating temperature of 15ºC (59ºF)
(T2). The permeate flowrate was recorded at 3,285.4 lpm (868 gpm) at a
membrane pressure of 0.414 bar (6 psi), while total membrane surface
area equals 4,548.53 m2 (48,960 ft2).
1. Calculate the membrane area:
Membrane area Number of modules Number of cassettes Surface area per

= x x
per train per cassette per train module
48 modules per
x 3 cassettes per train x 340 ft2 per module = 48,960 ft2 per train
cassette

A-172 June, 2010
Facility
2. Convert flow rate to flux at the observed temperature:
Flow Number of
Flux at 59ºF = x
Membrane surface area per train minutes per day
868 gpm
x 1,440 minutes per day = 25.5 gfd
48,960 in.2 per train
3. Correct the flux value from the observed temperature (15ºC

(59ºF)) (T2) to the reference temperature (20ºC (68ºF)) (T1).
Viscosity values required for this calculation can be found in
Table A.9.3 - Water Viscosity.
Table A.9.3 - Water Viscosity

Temperature Viscosity Temperature Viscosity Temperature Viscosity
°C °F cP °C °F cP °C °F cP
1 34 1.7311 23 73 0.9356 45 113 0.5988
2 36 1.6736 24 75 0.9142 46 115 0.5884
3 37 1.6192 25 77 0.8935 47 117 0.5782
4 39 1.5677 26 79 0.8736 48 118 0.5683
5 41 1.5188 27 81 0.8544 49 120 0.5587
6 43 1.4723 28 82 0.8359 50 122 0.5494
7 45 1.4281 29 84 0.8180 51 124 0.5403
8 46 1.3860 30 86 0.8007 52 126 0.5315
9 48 1.3459 31 88 0.7840 53 127 0.5229
10 50 1.3077 32 90 0.7679 54 129 0.5145
11 52 1.2712 33 91 0.7523 55 131 0.5064
12 54 1.2362 34 93 0.7372 56 133 0.4984
13 55 1.2029 35 95 0.7225 57 135 0.4907
14 57 1.1709 36 97 0.7084 58 136 0.4832
15 59 1.1403 37 99 0.6946 59 138 0.4758
16 61 1.1109 38 100 0.6813 60 140 0.4687
17 63 1.0828 39 102 0.6685 61 142 0.4617
18 64 1.0558 40 104 0.6560 62 144 0.4549
19 66 1.0298 41 106 0.6438 63 145 0.4482
20 68 1.0049 42 108 0.6321 64 147 0.4418
21 70 0.9809 43 109 0.6207 65 149 0.4355
22 72 0.9578 44 111 0.6096

June, 2010 A-173
Facility
viscosity at T1
Flux at T1 = Flux at T2 x
viscosity at T2
1.0049
25.5 gfd x = 22.47 gfd
1.1403
4. Using the recorded membrane pressure, convert the

temperature-corrected flux to membrane permeability.
Membrane Corrected flux

=
permeability Membrane pressure
22.47 gfd
= 3.7 gfd per 1 psi
6 psi
In order to accurately assess the effectiveness of a cleaning procedure,

measure and record the membrane permeability immediately before
and after each cleaning session is performed.

A-174 June, 2010

GE Water and Process Tech OMManual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

GE Water and Process Tech OMManual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GE Water & Process

OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CLIENT: SCLA Industrial Wastewater Treatment Facility

LOCATION: City of Victorville, CA

DATE: June, 2010

Section 1 - General Safety

Section 2 - System Overview

Section 3 - Pre-Installation & Initial Startup

3.2 Preparing the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1

Section 4 - Operating the System

Section 5 - Control Documentation

Appendix A - ZeeWeed 500D

A.3.6 Uncrating and Installing Cassettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-23

A.4.3.1.2 Tools/Parts Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-75

A.5.6 Preventing Stainless Steel Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-133

Figure A.4.8 - Remove the Aeration Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-79

Figure A.5.3 - Typical Levelling Pin Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-125

Failure to adhere to the instructions provided in this manual may

USING THIS MANUAL

Bold - indicates a control with which the reader is required to interact.

Bold italics - indicates important information.

Warns against an unsafe situation or practice that, if not avoided,

Warns against an unsafe situation or practice that, if not avoided,

Warns against an unsafe situation or practice that, if not avoided,

Warns against an unsafe situation or practice that, if not avoided, will

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

Record the date of each change in the following table:

Change Date Change Date Change Date

Failure by facility management or system operators to adhere to the

1.2 PERSONAL SAFETY

1.2.1 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

1.2.1.1 HEAD AND FACIAL PROTECTION

• When handling chemicals or working near pressurized lines, (air

Rev. 0 General Safety

• When exposed to noise levels that exceed 85 dB, wear adequate

1.2.1.2 LIMB PROTECTION

1.2.1.3 FALL PROTECTION

1.3 SAFETY ON SITE

General Safety Rev. 0

1.3.1 GENERAL PRECAUTIONS

• Install flange guards on all chemical lines.

• Install spray curtains or Plexiglas shields around all chemical

• Ensure that chemical-resistant protective clothing is worn by all

• When preparing to perform maintenance on pipes or tubing,

• Ensure that all personnel working with hazardous chemicals are

• Personnel engaged in a procedure that involves obvious risk of

Rev. 0 General Safety

• Personnel engaged in a procedure for which they do not feel

1.3.2 SAFETY CHECKLIST

Table 1.1.1 - Safety Checklist

General Safety Rev. 0

1.3.3 ELECTRICAL AND THERMAL HAZARDS

Only qualified personnel should perform installation and

HEATED SURFACES: Areas on certain pieces of equipment, such as pumps,

1.3.4 MECHANICAL AND CHEMICAL HAZARDS

PUMPS: When working with or around pumps, take the following

• Before performing maintenance, isolate and drain all piping

• Before performing maintenance, turn off power to a pump and

• After completing maintenance, replace any guards or other

Rev. 0 General Safety

• Personnel working on pumps used to transfer chemicals must be

• When working with diaphragm pumps used to transfer

1.3.5 PINCH AND FALLING HAZARDS